Systems Manual Simatic ET200S.pdf - Google Drive

Preface

1

______________ 2 ______________ 3 Configuration options ______________ 4 Installation ______________ 5 Wiring and Assembling ______________ Commissioning and 6 Diagnostics ______________ General technical 7 specifications ______________ 8 Interface modules ______________ 9 Terminal modules ______________ 10 Power modules ______________ 11 Digital Electronic Modules ______________ 12 Analog electronic modules ______________ 13 4 IQ-SENSE ______________ 14 RESERVE modules ______________ A Order numbers ______________ B Dimension drawings ______________ Address space of the inputs C and outputs ______________ D Response Times ______________ Determining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200S E ______________ Station Product overview

SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System ET200S

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S

SIMATIC Distributed I/O System ET 200S Operating Instructions

The following supplement is part of this documentation: No.

Designation

Drawing number

Edition

1 2

Product information Product information

A5E00352937-02 A5E00583609-01

01/2005 07/2005

Edition 07/2005

EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Special Measures for Interference-Free Operation

F ______________

Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Notice indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed Usage Note the following: Warning This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Automation and Drives Postfach 48 48 90437 NÜRNBERG GERMANY

Order No.: EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 Edition 09/2005

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005. Technical data subject to change

Preface Purpose of the manual The information in this manual enables you to operate the distributed I/O system ET 200S on the PROFIBUS DP as DP-Slave: • As a DP slave on PROFIBUS DP • As a PROFINET IO device on PROFINET

Required level of knowledge Knowledge of the field of automation engineering is required to understand the manual.

Scope of the manual This manual applies to the components of the ET 200S distributed I/O system specified in the appendix. The manual contains a description of the components that were valid at the time the manual was published. We reserve the right to enclose a Product Information bulletin containing up-to-date information regarding new components and new versions of components.

Changes since the previous version The following changes/additions have been made since the previous version of the manual: • Function enhancement for interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE • Function enhancement for interface module IM151-3 PN

Approvals See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

CE certification See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

Labeling for Australia (C-tick mark) See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

Distributed I/O System ET200S Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

iii

Preface

Standards See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

Position in the information landscape The following table shows an overview of the contents of the handbooks for the ET 200S: Manual

Contents

ET 200S Distributed I/O System

• • • •

Installing and wiring of ET 200S Commissioning and diagnostics of ET 200S Technical specifications of IM151-1, digital, and analog electronic modules Order numbers for ET 200S

ET 200S Motor Starters

• • • • • •

Installing and wiring of motor starters Commissioning and diagnostics of motor starters Technical specifications of motor starters Fail-safe motor starters Safety-integrated SIGUARD system Order numbers for motor starters

PROFINET System Description

• • • •

Basic principles of PROFINET Network components and structures Data exchange and communication PROFINET engineering

From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO

• • • •

Differences Blocks System status lists Diagnostics

Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System

ET 200S IM151-7 CPU Interface Module and Instruction List • • • •

Addressing of IM151-7 CPU ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU in the PROFIBUS network Commissioning and diagnostics of IM151-7 CPU Technical specifications of the IM151-7 CPU

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter operating instructions

• • • • •

Installation Commissioning Open- and closed-loop control techniques Protection and monitoring functions Technical specifications

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter list manual

• • •

Parameter list Function diagrams Alarm and fault messages

Positioning ET 200S

• • • • •

1STEP 5V/204kHz 1POS INC/Digital 1POS SSI/Digital 1POS INC/Analog 1POS SSI/Analog

Technological functions ET 200S

• • • •

1COUNT 24V/100kHz 1COUNT 5V/500kHz 1SSI 2PULSE

iv


Preface Manual

Contents

Serial Interface Module ET 200S

• •

1SI 3964/ASCII 1SI MODBUS/USS

Fail-safe modules

• •

4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe 4 F-DO DC24/2A PROFIsafe

SIWAREX CS

•

Measurement of weight and power values

The manuals are available on the Internet in the languages German, English, French, Spanish and Italian (see Service & Support on the Internet).

Guide You can quickly access specific information in the manual by using the following aids: • At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the figures and tables that appear in the manual. • An overview of the contents of each section is indicated on the left of each page throughout the manual. • Following the appendices, you will find a glossary in which important technical terms used in the manual are defined. • At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index enabling rapid access to the information you are looking for.

Special note In addition to this manual, you will also need the manual for the DP master or PROFINET IO controller you are using (see appendix).

Note This manual contains a detailed listing of the contents of the ET 200S manuals (reference in "See also"). We recommend that you begin by orienting yourself to the manuals (and portions thereof) that are most relevant to solving your task.

Recycling and disposal Due to the fact that it is low in contaminants, the ET 200S is recyclable. Contact a certified electronic-waste disposal company to recycle and dispose of your old equipment in an environment-friendly manner.

SIMATIC Technical Support, Contact Persons and Training You will find information on this in the product information on the intranet at http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/19293011


v

Preface

See also Module order numbers (Page A-1) Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module (Page A-9) Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts (Page A-8) Order numbers for ET 200S network components (Page A-7) Order numbers for ET 200S accessories (Page A-6) Standards, certifications, and approvals (Page 7-1) Order numbers for manuals (Page A-9)

vi


Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... iii 1

2

3

Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1

What are distributed I/O systems?............................................................................................. 1-1

1.2

What is PROFINET IO? ............................................................................................................. 1-3

1.3

What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system? ............................................................................ 1-4

1.4

Guide to the ET 200S manuals................................................................................................ 1-10

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S ........................................................................................ 2-1 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7

Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................................ 2-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2-1 Example: Installing ET 200S...................................................................................................... 2-3 Example: Wiring and assembling ET 200S ............................................................................... 2-4 Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager............................................................... 2-5 Example: Creating a user program............................................................................................ 2-6 Example: Switching on ET 200S................................................................................................ 2-6 Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages ............................................................................... 2-7

2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7

Commissioning on PROFINET IO ........................................................................................... 2-10 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2-10 Example: Installing and wiring ET 200S .................................................................................. 2-12 Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager............................................................. 2-13 Example: Assigning device names for the IO device............................................................... 2-14 Example: Creating a user program.......................................................................................... 2-14 Example: Switching on ET 200S.............................................................................................. 2-15 Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages ............................................................................. 2-16

Configuration options.............................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1

Precisely Modular System ......................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2

ET 200S Power Supply.............................................................................................................. 3-3

3.3

Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential.......................................... 3-4

3.4

Configuration options for the interface modules ........................................................................ 3-6

3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5

Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules ......................... 3-9 Electronic modules and applications ......................................................................................... 3-9 Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module .................................................... 3-14 Configuration example: Terminal modules for power modules ............................................... 3-16 Identifying the proper terminal module for an electronic module............................................. 3-19 Configuration example: Terminal modules for electronic modules.......................................... 3-20

3.6

Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................ 3-23

3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3

Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................... 3-25 Cycle Synchronization on the PROFIBUS DP - Basics ........................................................... 3-25 Parameterizing Cycle Synchronization .................................................................................... 3-26 Fault correction during isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP .......................................... 3-29


vii

Table of contents

4

5

6

viii

3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 3.8.6 3.8.7

Option handling on PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................................... 3-30 Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP ............................................................ 3-30 Principle of operation of option handling.................................................................................. 3-30 Requirements for option handling ............................................................................................ 3-32 Example: Use of RESERVE modules...................................................................................... 3-33 Assigning parameters for option handling................................................................................ 3-34 Controlling and monitoring options .......................................................................................... 3-35 Fault correction during option handling.................................................................................... 3-37

3.9

Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-38

3.10

Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system ............................................................................. 3-41

3.11

Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration.......... 3-43

Installation .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1

Basic principles of installation .................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2

Mounting the interface module................................................................................................... 4-4

4.3

Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules ....................................................................... 4-6

4.4

Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module................................................................... 4-9

4.5

Mounting the terminating module............................................................................................. 4-11

4.6

Mounting the shield connection ............................................................................................... 4-13

4.7

Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates .............................................................. 4-15

4.8

Setting the PROFIBUS address............................................................................................... 4-17

Wiring and Assembling ........................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1

General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S ......................................................... 5-1

5.2

Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply ........................................................... 5-3

5.3

Electrical configuration of the ET 200S...................................................................................... 5-6

5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.4.9 5.4.10

Wiring the ET 200S .................................................................................................................... 5-7 Wiring rules for ET 200S ............................................................................................................ 5-7 Wiring a terminal module with screw terminals.......................................................................... 5-7 Wiring a terminal module with spring terminals ......................................................................... 5-8 Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect............................................................................... 5-9 Wiring terminal modules........................................................................................................... 5-12 Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted power module .................................... 5-15 Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted electronic module .............................. 5-16 Wiring the IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules..................................................................................................................... 5-17 Wiring IM151-3 PN interface module ....................................................................................... 5-19 Wiring the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module ............................................................ 5-20

5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2

Inserting and identifying electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-25 Inserting and identifying electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-25 Removing and inserting electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-28

5.6

Assigning a device name for the IO device.............................................................................. 5-30

Commissioning and Diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 6-1 6.1

Safety tests prior to commissioning ........................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2

Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP.................................................................. 6-1 Basic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP...................................... 6-1 Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................... 6-3


Table of contents 6.2.2.1 6.2.2.2 6.2.2.3 6.2.2.4 6.2.2.5 6.2.2.6 6.2.3 6.2.3.1 6.2.3.2 6.2.4 6.2.4.1 6.2.4.2 6.2.4.3 6.2.4.4 6.2.4.5 6.2.4.6 6.2.4.7 6.2.4.8 6.2.4.9 6.2.4.10

Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software ............................................................. 6-3 Grouping modules for configuration........................................................................................... 6-4 Grouping of digital input modules .............................................................................................. 6-6 Grouping of digital output modules ............................................................................................ 6-7 Grouping of motor starters ......................................................................................................... 6-8 Example of a project design....................................................................................................... 6-8 Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP.................................................... 6-10 Commissioning ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP........................................................................... 6-10 Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP.............................................................................. 6-11 Diagnostics using LED display................................................................................................. 6-13 LED displays on the interface module ..................................................................................... 6-13 LED displays on the power module ......................................................................................... 6-15 LED displays on digital electronic modules ............................................................................. 6-16 LED displays on analog electronic modules ............................................................................ 6-17 LED displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module ............................................... 6-18 LED displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module ................................................. 6-19 LED displays on the 1SSI electronic module........................................................................... 6-20 LED displays on the STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module ...................................................... 6-21 LED displays on the 2PULSE electronic module..................................................................... 6-22 LED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, and 1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules ..................................................................................... 6-23 6.2.4.11 LED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface module.............. 6-25 6.2.4.12 LED displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module .............................................................. 6-26 6.2.5 Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules...................................................................... 6-27 6.2.6 Evaluating interrupts by ET 200S ............................................................................................ 6-27 6.2.7 Diagnostics with STEP 5 and STEP 7 ..................................................................................... 6-29 6.2.7.1 Reading out the diagnostics..................................................................................................... 6-29 6.2.7.2 Structure of the slave diagnostics ............................................................................................ 6-32 6.2.7.3 Station statuses 1 to 3 ............................................................................................................. 6-34 6.2.7.4 Master PROFIBUS address..................................................................................................... 6-35 6.2.7.5 Manufacturer ID ....................................................................................................................... 6-36 6.2.7.6 Identifier-related diagnostics .................................................................................................... 6-36 6.2.7.7 Module status........................................................................................................................... 6-37 6.2.7.8 Channel-specific diagnostics ................................................................................................... 6-40 6.2.7.9 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................. 6-49 6.2.7.10 Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ................................................. 6-57

6.3 6.3.1 6.3.1.1 6.3.1.2 6.3.1.3 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.7.1 6.3.7.2 6.3.7.3 6.3.7.4 6.3.7.5 6.3.7.6

Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO ................................................................. 6-59 Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS IO .................................................................................. 6-59 Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PROFINET IO....................................... 6-59 Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software ........................................................... 6-59 Combine modules for the configuration ................................................................................... 6-60 Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFINET IO ..................................................... 6-61 Diagnostics using LED display................................................................................................. 6-63 Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules...................................................................... 6-65 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200S ............................................................................................. 6-66 Differences in the replacement value behavior........................................................................ 6-67 Diagnostics with STEP 7.......................................................................................................... 6-68 Reading out the diagnostics..................................................................................................... 6-68 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................. 6-68 Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO .................................................. 6-72 Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus ............................................................................. 6-72 Failure of the load voltage of the power module...................................................................... 6-75 STOP of IO controller and recovery of IO device .................................................................... 6-75


ix

Table of contents 7

8

General technical specifications ............................................................................................................. 7-1 7.1

Standards, certifications, and approvals .................................................................................... 7-1

7.2

Electromagnetic compatibility .................................................................................................... 7-6

7.3

Transport and storage conditions .............................................................................................. 7-8

7.4

Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions.................................................................... 7-8

7.5

Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S............................................................................................................. 7-11

7.6

Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ......... 7-12

Interface modules ................................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2

9

x

8.1.3

Parameters for interface modules.............................................................................................. 8-1 Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module ............................................................... 8-1 Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .......................................................................................................... 8-2 Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module ..................................................................... 8-3

8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7 8.2.8 8.2.9 8.2.10 8.2.11 8.2.12 8.2.13 8.2.14 8.2.15

Parameter description for the interface modules ....................................................................... 8-4 DP interrupt mode ...................................................................................................................... 8-4 Bus length .................................................................................................................................. 8-4 Operation at Preset Actual Configuration ............................................................................. 8-4 Option handling, general ............................................................................................................ 8-5 Option handling: slots 2 to 63..................................................................................................... 8-5 Diagnostic interrupt .................................................................................................................... 8-5 Hardware interrupt ..................................................................................................................... 8-6 Insert/remove-module interrupt.................................................................................................. 8-6 Analog-value format ................................................................................................................... 8-6 Interference frequency suppression........................................................................................... 8-6 Reference junction input ............................................................................................................ 8-7 Reference junction input ............................................................................................................ 8-7 Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle ......................................................................................... 8-7 Time Ti (read in process values)................................................................................................ 8-7 Time To (output process values) ............................................................................................... 8-8

8.3

IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)...................................................... 8-9

8.4

IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0) ........................................... 8-12

8.5

IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0) ..................................... 8-16

8.6

Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0).................................... 8-20

8.7 8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3 8.7.4

Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0).......................................................... 8-24 Features of the IM151-3 PN interface module ......................................................................... 8-24 SNMP ....................................................................................................................................... 8-28 SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for IM151-3 PN ........................................................................ 8-28 Updating the firmware of the IM151-3 PN................................................................................ 8-30

Terminal modules ................................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1

Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules ............................ 9-1

9.2

TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-4

9.3

TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-6

9.4

TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0) ............................................................................................................ 9-8


Table of contents

10

11

9.5

TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0) .................. 9-10

9.6

TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00) ......................... 9-13

9.7

TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-15

9.8

TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-18

9.9

TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-20

9.10

TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-22

9.11

TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0) .................. 9-24

9.12

TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0) .................. 9-27

9.13

TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0) .................. 9-29

Power modules..................................................................................................................................... 10-1 10.1

Parameters for power modules................................................................................................ 10-1

10.2

PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0) .......................................................... 10-2

10.3

PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)..................................................... 10-5

10.4

PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) ............................... 10-8

Digital Electronic Modules .................................................................................................................... 11-1 11.1 11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3

Parameters for digital electronic modules................................................................................ 11-1 Parameters for digital input modules ....................................................................................... 11-1 Parameters for 4DI NAMUR .................................................................................................... 11-3 Parameters for digital output modules ..................................................................................... 11-4

11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5

Parameter description for the digital electronic modules......................................................... 11-5 Hardware interrupt ................................................................................................................... 11-5 Input delay................................................................................................................................ 11-5 Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge .............................................................................. 11-5 Pulse stretching........................................................................................................................ 11-5 Chatter monitoring ................................................................................................................... 11-7

11.3

2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0). ....................................... 11-9

11.4

4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)...................................... 11-13

11.5

4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0) ............................. 11-17

11.6

2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)...................... 11-21

11.7

4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) ..................... 11-25

11.8

4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) ................ 11-29

11.9

4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)........................................... 11-33

11.10

2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0) .......................... 11-41

11.11

2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0) .......................... 11-45

11.12

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)................. 11-49

11.13

4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) ................ 11-54

11.14

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0) .......... 11-59

11.15

2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0).................... 11-64


xi

Table of contents

12

11.16

4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0).................... 11-69

11.17

2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0).............. 11-74

11.18

Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)............................... 11-79

11.19

2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)........................................................................................................ 11-84

11.20

2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)........................................................................................................ 11-90

Analog electronic modules.................................................................................................................... 12-1 12.1

Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 12-1

12.2 12.2.1 12.2.2 12.2.3

Analog value representation .................................................................................................... 12-1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 12-1 Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7 .................................... 12-2 Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage, current, and resistance-type sensors....................................................................................... 12-4 Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for resistance thermometer............................................................................................................................. 12-6 Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for thermocouples..... 12-9 Output ranges of the analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage and current ............................................................................................................................. 12-12

12.2.4 12.2.5 12.2.6 12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3

Fundamentals of analog value processing ............................................................................ 12-13 Connecting measuring sensors ............................................................................................. 12-13 Connecting thermocouples .................................................................................................... 12-18 Connecting unused channels of analog input modules ......................................................... 12-23

12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4

Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems................... 12-24 Influence of supply voltage and operating state on analog input and output values ............. 12-24 Effect of the value range for the analog input ........................................................................ 12-25 Effect of the value range for the analog output ...................................................................... 12-25 Use of the shield connection .................................................................................................. 12-26

12.5 12.5.1

12.5.7

Parameters for analog electronic modules ............................................................................ 12-26 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST, 4AI I 2WIRE ST, and 2AI I 4WIRE ST ................................................................................... 12-26 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF........................ 12-27 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, and 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed................................................................................................. 12-28 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST, and 2AI TC HF ....................................................................................................................... 12-29 Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module ......................................... 12-31 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST, 2AO I HF ................................................................................................................................ 12-34 Parameter description for the analog electronic modules...................................................... 12-35

12.6

2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) ..................................... 12-37

12.7

2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) ............................... 12-41

12.8

2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)................................. 12-46

12.9

2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0).......................... 12-50

12.10

Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0) ................................... 12-54

12.11

2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0) ..................... 12-57

12.12

2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0).......................... 12-61

12.13

2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0) ................ 12-65

12.5.2 12.5.3 12.5.4 12.5.5 12.5.6

xii


Table of contents

13

14

12.14

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0) ..................... 12-69

12.15

2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)................................. 12-73

12.16

2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) ......................... 12-77

12.17

2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) ................................... 12-85

12.18

2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) ............................ 12-91

12.19

2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0) ................................... 12-95

12.20

2AO U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0) ............................. 12-99

12.21

2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0) .................................. 12-102

12.22

2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)............................ 12-106

4 IQ-SENSE ......................................................................................................................................... 13-1 13.1

Features of 4 IQ-SENSE.......................................................................................................... 13-1

13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 13.2.4 13.2.5 13.2.6 13.2.7

Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................................. 13-3 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 13-3 Group diagnostics parameter................................................................................................... 13-4 Synchronization group parameter............................................................................................ 13-4 Sensor type parameter ............................................................................................................ 13-6 Switching hysteresis parameter ............................................................................................... 13-7 Time functions and time value parameters.............................................................................. 13-8 Teach-in disable parameter ..................................................................................................... 13-8

13.3 13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3

Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)................................................................................. 13-9 Fundamentals of the control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)................................................ 13-9 Standard................................................................................................................................. 13-10 Enhanced ............................................................................................................................... 13-11

13.4

Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 13-15

RESERVE modules .............................................................................................................................. 14-1 14.1

A

B

RESERVE modules ................................................................................................................. 14-1

Order numbers .......................................................................................................................................A-1 A.1

Module order numbers............................................................................................................... A-1

A.2

Order numbers for ET 200S accessories .................................................................................. A-6

A.3

Order numbers for ET 200S network components .................................................................... A-7

A.4

Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts ................................................................................... A-8

A.5

Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module................................ A-9

A.6

Order numbers for manuals ....................................................................................................... A-9

Dimension drawings ...............................................................................................................................B-1 B.1

Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and heat dissipation ............................................... B-1

B.2

Interface modules ...................................................................................................................... B-2

B.3

Terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic module inserted ............... B-3

B.4

Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted...................................... B-7

B.5

Terminating module ................................................................................................................. B-10

B.6

Shield connection..................................................................................................................... B-10


xiii

Table of contents C

Address space of the inputs and outputs ................................................................................................C-1 C.1

D

Address space of the inputs and outputs...................................................................................C-1

Response Times.....................................................................................................................................D-1 D.1

Overview ....................................................................................................................................D-1

D.2

Response times at the DP master .............................................................................................D-1

D.3

Response times for the ET 200S ...............................................................................................D-2

D.4

Response times for the digital input modules ............................................................................D-6

D.5

Response times for the digital output modules ..........................................................................D-7

D.6

Response times for analog input modules.................................................................................D-7

D.7

Response times for analog output modules...............................................................................D-8

D.8

Response times for a 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module ............................................................D-10

D.9

Response times for technological modules .............................................................................D-10

D.10

Response times of PROFINET IO ...........................................................................................D-10

E

Determining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200S Station .................................................................E-1

F

Special Measures for Interference-Free Operation ................................................................................. F-1 Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1 Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1

Tables Table 1-1

ET 200S components................................................................................................................. 1-6

Table 1-2

Features and benefits of ET 200S ............................................................................................. 1-9

Table 2-1

Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP................................................................ 2-5

Table 2-2

Configuration table in HW config for PROFINET IO ................................................................ 2-13

Table 3-1

Configuration examples for ET 200S ......................................................................................... 3-1

Table 3-2

Power supply of the ET 200S..................................................................................................... 3-3

Table 3-3

Interface modules and the applications for which they are suited ............................................. 3-6

Table 3-4

Electronic modules and the applications for which they are suitable ........................................ 3-9

Table 3-5

TM-P terminal modules and the power modules for which they are suitable .......................... 3-11

Table 3-6

TM-E terminal modules and the electronic modules for which they are suitable..................... 3-12

Table 3-7

Terminal modules for power modules...................................................................................... 3-16

Table 3-8

Terminal modules for electronic modules ................................................................................ 3-20

Table 3-9

Control interface....................................................................................................................... 3-36

Table 3-10

Feedback interface................................................................................................................... 3-36

Table 3-11

Fault correction during option handling.................................................................................... 3-37

Table 3-12

Structure of DS 248 for ET 200S ............................................................................................. 3-38

Table 3-13

Basic structure of data records with identification data............................................................ 3-39

Table 3-14

Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-39

xiv


Table of contents Table 3-15

Parameter length in bytes ........................................................................................................ 3-44

Table 3-16

Maximum configuration per voltage group............................................................................... 3-45

Table 4-1

Mounting dimensions ................................................................................................................. 4-2

Table 5-1

Removing and inserting electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-28

Table 6-1

Configuration table and address space ..................................................................................... 6-9

Table 6-2

Software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP ................................................ 6-10

Table 6-3

Status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC/ IM151-1 STANDARD/ IM151-1 FO STANDARD/ IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .................................................................................. 6-14

Table 6-4

Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 on PROFIBUS DP ............................ 6-30

Table 6-5

Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ....................................................................................... 6-34

Table 6-6


Table 6-7


Table 6-8

Structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5) .......................................................................... 6-36

Table 6-9

Power module error types........................................................................................................ 6-42

Table 6-10

Digital electronic module error types ....................................................................................... 6-42

Table 6-11

Analog input module error types .............................................................................................. 6-44

Table 6-12

Analog output module error types............................................................................................ 6-45

Table 6-13

1SSI error types ....................................................................................................................... 6-45

Table 6-14

1COUNT 24V/100kHz error types ........................................................................................... 6-46

Table 6-15

1COUNT 5V/500kHz error types ............................................................................................. 6-46

Table 6-16

1STEP 5V/204kHz error types................................................................................................. 6-46

Table 6-17

2PULSE error types ................................................................................................................. 6-47

Table 6-18

1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog error types ....... 6-47

Table 6-19

1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS error types ........................................................................ 6-48

Table 6-20

4 IQ-SENSE error types........................................................................................................... 6-48

Table 6-21

Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO ................................................. 6-61

Table 6-22

Status and error displays of IM151-3 PN................................................................................. 6-64

Table 6-23

Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7................................................................................ 6-68

Table 7-1

Use in industrial environment..................................................................................................... 7-5

Table 7-2

Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ......... 7-12

Table 8-1

Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module ............................................................... 8-1

Table 8-2

Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE .......................................................................................................... 8-2

Table 8-3

Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module ..................................................................... 8-3

Table 8-4

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module.................................................. 8-9

Table 8-5

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module....................................... 8-13

Table 8-6

Terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD................................. 8-17

Table 8-7

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module................................ 8-21


xv


Terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module...................................................... 8-26

Table 8-9

Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards ................................................................................ 8-29

Table 9-1

Assignment of TM-P terminal modules and power modules ..................................................... 9-1

Table 9-2

Assignment of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules................................................ 9-2

Table 9-3

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-4

Table 9-4

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-6

Table 9-5

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-8

Table 9-6

Terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module................ 9-11

Table 9-7

Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module ............................................... 9-13

Table 9-8

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules.............................................. 9-16

Table 9-9

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-18

Table 9-10

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-20

Table 9-11

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-22

Table 9-12

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal module ............... 9-25

Table 9-13

Terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module................. 9-27

Table 9-14

Terminal assignment of the terminal module ........................................................................... 9-30

Table 10-1

Parameters for power modules................................................................................................ 10-1

Table 10-2

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module ...................................................... 10-2

Table 10-3

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module ................................................. 10-6

Table 10-4

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module ........................... 10-9

Table 11-1

Parameters for digital input modules ....................................................................................... 11-2

Table 11-2

Parameters for 4DI NAMUR..................................................................................................... 11-3

Table 11-3

Parameters for digital output modules ..................................................................................... 11-4

Table 11-4

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard.................................................................. 11-9

Table 11-5

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard................................................................ 11-13

Table 11-6

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard ....................................................... 11-17

Table 11-7

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature ......................................................... 11-21

Table 11-8

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature ......................................................... 11-25

Table 11-9

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature .................................................... 11-29

Table 11-10

Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 ............................ 11-33

Table 11-11

Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contact or sensor to IEC 60947-5-6 .............. 11-34

Table 11-12

Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact) ...................................................................................... 11-34

xvi



Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical changeover contact).......................................................................................... 11-35

Table 11-14

Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact).................................................................................................... 11-35

Table 11-15

Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact) .................................................................................................................................. 11-36

Table 11-16

Diagnosis for changeover contacts........................................................................................ 11-40

Table 11-17

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard.............................................................. 11-41

Table 11-18

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard.............................................................. 11-45

Table 11-19

Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard .................................................... 11-49

Table 11-20

Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard .................................................... 11-54

Table 11-21

Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature .............................................. 11-59

Table 11-22

Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard ....................................................... 11-64

Table 11-23

Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard ....................................................... 11-69

Table 11-24

Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature ................................................. 11-74

Table 11-25

Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24-230 VAC ...................................................................... 11-79

Table 11-26

Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of Version 2)............................................................................................................................... 11-85

Table 11-27

Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts ............................................................ 11-89

Table 11-28

Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A......................... 11-90

Table 11-29

Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts ..................................................................... 11-94

Table 12-1

Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled .......... 12-2

Table 12-2

Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format) ................................................................. 12-2

Table 12-3

Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format) .................................. 12-3

Table 12-4

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges ±80 mV, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, and ±10 V ............................ 12-4

Table 12-5

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA .............................. 12-4

Table 12-6

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range ± 20 mA ...................................................................... 12-5

Table 12-7

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 150 Ω, 300 Ω, 600 Ω, 3000 Ω .................................. 12-5

Table 12-8

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F......... 12-6

Table 12-9

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F........... 12-6

Table 12-10

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F......... 12-7

Table 12-11

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F........... 12-7

Table 12-12

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Standard in °C und °F.................................... 12-8

Table 12-13

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Climatic in °C und °F...................................... 12-8

Table 12-14

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type B in °C and °F.................................................... 12-9

Table 12-15

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type C in °C and °F ................................................... 12-9

Table 12-16

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type E in °C and °F.................................................. 12-10

Table 12-17

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type J in °C and °F .................................................. 12-10

Table 12-18

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type K in °C and °F.................................................. 12-10


xvii


SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type L in °C and °F .................................................. 12-11

Table 12-20

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type N in °C and °F.................................................. 12-11

Table 12-21

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type R, S in °C and °F ............................................. 12-11

Table 12-22

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type T in °C and °F .................................................. 12-12

Table 12-23

SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges ± 5 V; ± 10 V; ± 20 mA ................................................. 12-12

Table 12-24

SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 1 to 5V; 4 to 20mA ........................................................ 12-13

Table 12-25

Compensation of the reference junction temperature............................................................ 12-18

Table 12-26

Reference junction parameters.............................................................................................. 12-21

Table 12-27

How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) and the supply voltage L +.............................................................. 12-24

Table 12-28

Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog input value in the value range................................................................................................................... 12-25

Table 12-29

Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output value in the value range ......................................................................................................... 12-25

Table 12-30

Parameters for analog input modules U, I Standard.............................................................. 12-26

Table 12-31

Parameters for analog electronic modules U, I High Feature................................................ 12-27

Table 12-32

Parameters for analog input modules U, I High Speed ......................................................... 12-28

Table 12-33

Parameters for analog input modules RTD, TC..................................................................... 12-29

Table 12-34

Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module ......................................... 12-31

Table 12-35

Parameters for analog output modules U, I ........................................................................... 12-34

Table 12-36

Terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard .......................................................................... 12-38

Table 12-37

Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature.................................................................... 12-42

Table 12-38

Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed...................................................................... 12-46

Table 12-39

Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard ............................................................... 12-50

Table 12-40

Terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST ......................................................................... 12-54

Table 12-41

Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed........................................................... 12-57

Table 12-42

Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard ............................................................... 12-62

Table 12-43

Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature...................................................... 12-65

Table 12-44

Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed........................................................... 12-70

Table 12-45

Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard ..................................................................... 12-74

Table 12-46

Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature............................................................... 12-78

Table 12-47

Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard........................................................................ 12-86

Table 12-48

Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature.................................................................. 12-91

Table 12-49

Terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard ........................................................................ 12-96

Table 12-50

Terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature .................................................................. 12-99

Table 12-51

Terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard........................................................................ 12-103

Table 12-52

Terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature ................................................................. 12-107

Table 13-1

Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................................. 13-3

Table 13-2

Diffuse sensor .......................................................................................................................... 13-6

xviii



Reflex sensor ........................................................................................................................... 13-6

Table 13-4

Standard feedback interface .................................................................................................. 13-10

Table 13-5

Enhanced feedback interface ................................................................................................ 13-11

Table 13-6

Enhanced control interface .................................................................................................... 13-12

Table 13-7

Terminal assignment of the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................. 13-15

Table A-1

Interface module order numbers................................................................................................ A-1

Table A-2

Terminal module order numbers................................................................................................ A-2

Table A-3

Power module order numbers.................................................................................................... A-3

Table A-4

Digital electronic module order numbers ................................................................................... A-3

Table A-5

Analog electronic module order numbers .................................................................................. A-4

Table A-6

Process-related module order numbers .................................................................................... A-5

Table A-7

Reserve module order numbers ................................................................................................ A-5

Table A-8

ET 200S accessories order numbers ........................................................................................ A-6

Table A-9

Network components (PROFIBUS DP) for ET 200S order numbers ........................................ A-7

Table A-10

Network components (PROFINET IO) for ET 200S order numbers.......................................... A-8

Table A-11

Fuse for digital input module and power module ....................................................................... A-8

Table A-12

Connecting cable for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module ............................................................... A-9

Table A-13

ET 200S documentation packages or manuals ......................................................................... A-9

Table A-14

STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals .......................................................................................... A-10

Table A-15

STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals .......................................................................................... A-11

Table A-16

Technical Guide to PROFIBUS DP and SIMATIC S7 ............................................................. A-11

Table C-1

Address spaces of the inputs and outputs of the ET 200S........................................................ C-1

Table C-2

PII feedback interface and PIQ control interface .......................................................................C-2


xix

Table of contents

xx


Product overview 1.1

1.1

1

What are distributed I/O systems?

Distributed I/O System – Range of Application When a system is set up, it is common for the inputs to and outputs from the process to be incorporated centrally in the automation system. If the inputs/outputs are located at greater distances from the automation system, the wiring can become very extensive and complex, and electromagnetic interferences can impair reliability. Distributed I/O systems are suited for these types of installations: • The controller CPU is located centrally. • The I/O systems (inputs and outputs) operate decentrally on-site. • The powerful PROFIBUS DP with its high data transmission rates ensures smooth communication between the controller CPU and the I/O systems.

What is PROFIBUS DP? PROFIBUS DP is an open bus system based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 with the "DP" transmission protocol (DP stands for distributed peripherals). Physically, PROFIBUS DP is either an electrical network based on a shielded two-wire line or an optical network based on a fiber-optic cable. The "DP" transmission protocol enables a rapid, cyclic exchange of data between the controller CPU and the distributed I/O systems.

What is a DP master and what are DP slaves? The DP master links the controller CPU with the distributed I/O systems. The DP master exchanges data with the distributed I/O systems via PROFIBUS DP and monitors the PROFIBUS DP. The distributed I/O systems (= DP slaves) prepare the sensor and actuator data on-site so that they can be transmitted to the controller CPU via PROFIBUS DP.


1-1

Product overview 1.1 What are distributed I/O systems?

Which devices can be connected to PROFIBUS DP? An extremely wide range of devices can be connected on the PROFIBUS DP as a DP master or as DP slaves, provided their behavior complies with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. The devices that can be used include the following: • SIMATIC S5 • SIMATIC S7/M7/C7 • SIMATIC programming device or PC • SIMATIC HMI (operator panel (OP), operator station (OS), and text display (TD) operator control and monitoring devices) • Devices from other manufacturers

Structure of a PROFIBUS DP network The figure below illustrates a typical PROFIBUS DP network structure. The DP masters are integrated in the relevant device. For example, the S7-400 has a PROFIBUS DP interface and the IM 308-C master interface module is inserted in an S5-115U. The DP slaves are the distributed I/O systems, which are connected to the DP masters by means of PROFIBUS DP.

6

68 ZLWK,0&

3URJUDPPLQJGHYLFH3&

'3PDVWHU

352),%86'3 '3VODYHV

(7;

(76

Figure 1-1

1-2

(7/

'ULYH

(70

6

(7%

'3$6,/,1.

68'3

2326

2WKHUILHOGGHYLFHV

Typical PROFIBUS DP network structure


Product overview 1.2 What is PROFINET IO?

1.2

1.2

What is PROFINET IO?

Definition PROFINET IO is the open transmission system with realtime functionality defined in accordance with the PROFINET standard. The standard defines a vendor-neutral communication, automation, and engineering model. An industrial-grade connection system is available for cabling of PROFINET components. • PROFINET departs from the hierarchical master-slave principle of PROFIBUS. A provider-consumer principle is used instead. During configuration, the user specifies which modules of an IO device are subscribed to by an IO controller. • The quantity frameworks are extended in accordance with the options available on PROFINET IO. Parameter limits are not exceeded during configuration. • The transmission rate is 100 Mbits/s. • The user view during configuration is largely the same as that on the PROFIBUS DP (STEP 7 → HW Config is used for configuration).

Structure of a PROFINET IO network The figure below illustrates a typical PROFINET IO network structure. PROFIBUS slaves, if present, can be integrated by means of an IE/PB link.

,2FRQWUROOHU 6

6ZLWFK

,2GHYLFH (76

6ZLWFK

,2GHYLFH (76

6ZLWFK

23

6ZLWFK

3URJUDPPLQJ GHYLFH

6ZLWFK

,(3% OLQN 352),%86'3

Figure 1-2

PD[P

352),1(7,2 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW

Typical structure of a PROFINET IO network


1-3

Product overview 1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?

1.3

1.3

What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?

Definition The ET 200S distributed I/O system is a discretely modular, highly flexible DP slave with IP 20 degree of protection.

Area of application You can insert practically any number of I/O modules in practically any combination directly next to the interface module that transfers the data to the DP master. This means you can adjust the configuration to suit your on-site requirements. Independent from the interface module, an ET 200S can consist of up to 63 modules such as power modules, peripheral modules and motor starters. The ability to integrate motor starters (switching and protecting of any three-phase load up to 7.5 kW) ensures that the ET 200S can be adapted quickly to suit almost any process-related use of your machine. The fail-safe modules of the ET 200S enable you to read in and output data in a fail-safe manner up to Safety Category 4 (EN 954-1).

Terminal modules and electronic modules The ET 200S distributed I/O system is connected as follows: • To PROFIBUS DP by means of a cable connector for PROFIBUS DP at the IM151-1 interface module • To PROFINET IO by means of a cable connector for PROFINET IO at the IM151-3 PN interface module Every ET 200S peripheral system is a • A DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP • An IO device on the PROFINET IO

1-4



View The figure below shows an example configuration of an ET 200S. 1

2

10

3

4

5

6

7

9

8

①

ET 200S IM151-1 interface module

②

PM-E power module for electronic modules

③

Electronic modules

④

Power module for PM-D motor starters

⑤

Direct starter

⑥

Reversing starter

⑦

Terminating module

⑧

Power bus

⑨

TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules

⑩

TM-P terminal modules for power modules


1-5


ET 200S components The following table provides an overview of the most important components of the ET 200S: Table 1-1

ET 200S components

Component

...is the mounting rail for the ET 200S. You install the ET 200S on the mounting rail.

Interface module • IM151-1 BASIC • IM151-1 STANDARD • IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

...connects the ET 200S to the DP master and prepares the data for the assembled electronic modules and motor starters.

•

IM151-1 FO STANDARD

Interface module • IM151-3 PN

1-6

Function

Mounting rail

Image

With RS 485 interface:

With fiber-optic cable interface:

... ...connects the ET 200S to the PROFINET IO controllers and prepares the data for the assembled electronic modules and motor starters.

with PROFINET interface:


Product overview 1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system? Component Terminal module

Function

Image

...carries the wiring and accommodates the power and electronic modules. Terminal modules are available in the following variants: • For power modules • For electronic modules • With screw terminal • With spring terminal • With Fast Connect (quick connection method, no stripping required)

Power module

...monitors the voltage for all electronic modules in the voltage group. The following power modules are available: • For a 24 VDC infeed with diagnostics • For a 24 VDC to 48 VDC infeed with diagnostics • For a 24 VDC to 48 VDC, 24 VAC to 230 VAC infeed with diagnostics and fuse

Electronic module

...is inserted onto the terminal module and determines the function: • Digital input modules with 24 VDC, 120/230 VAC, and NAMUR • Digital output modules with 24 VDC and 120/230 VAC • Relay modules • Analog input modules with voltage, current, and resistance measurement; thermoresistor; and thermocouples • Analog output modules for voltage and current • Technology modules • Fail-safe modules • RESERVE

Terminating module

...terminates the ET 200S and can be used as a mount for 6 reserve fuses (5 mm x 20 mm).


1-7

Product overview 1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system? Function

Image

Slot number labels

...are used for identifying the slots on the terminal module.

Color coding labels

...enable customer- and country-specific coding of the terminals on the terminal module

PROFIBUS cable with bus connector

... connects nodes of a PROFIBUS DP configuration to each other.

63

...for machine labeling or printing • 80 strips per labeling sheet

62

Labeling sheet (DIN A4, perforated, film)

2

...is used for connecting cable shields.

1

Component Shield connection

Fiber optic duplex cable ... connects nodes of a with simplex plug (in the PROFIBUS DP configuration to each plug adaptor for other. IM151-1 FO STANDARD) PROFINET connector according to the specifications in the

... connects nodes of a PROFINET IO configuration to each other.

PROFINET Installation Guide and the Industrial

Ethernet FC installation instructions

1-8



Features and benefits of ET 200S The table below presents the features and benefits of ET 200S. Table 1-2

Features and benefits of ET 200S Features

Benefits Structure Function-oriented, cost-optimized station design Significant reduction in effort for configuration and documentation Space savings due to the ability to string modules together in any order

Discretely modular design • 1/2/4-channel electronic modules • Power modules • Integrated motor starters

•

Extensive range of electronic modules

Broad area of application

Communication capable, system-integrated motor starter: Direct and oscillating starter up to 7.5 kW

PLC inputs and outputs, terminal blocks, circuit breakers, and contactors in a plug-in module save space and the effort involved in wiring

Permanent wiring due to the separation of mechanical and electronic components

• •

Prewiring possible Module replacement during operation of the ET 200S ("hot swapping")

Individual connection of power modules to common potential

•

Individual formation of voltage groups (identifiable by color coding of the TM-P terminal modules for power modules) Simple load interruption

• •

• Robust design for harsh industrial conditions (5 g vibration resistance)

High operational reliability when mounted directly on the machine, high availability

Connection system Integrated voltage buses

Reduced effort required for wiring

Power bus up to 50 A for motor starters

Minimization of wiring in 400 V range

Screw terminals, spring terminals, and Fast Connect

A change in terminal connection method is not necessary

• •

2- and 3-conductor connection or 2-, 3- and 4-conductor connection

Optimal selection on grounds of space and cost Connection method with no stripping required Time savings during wiring

Fast Connect

• •

Replaceable terminal box in the terminal module

No need to remove the terminal module in the event of terminal damage

Automatic coding of the I/O modules

Quick and reliable module replacement

Large label

Adequate space for clear identification

High data transfer rate of up to 12 Mbits/s on the PROFIBUS DP and 100 Mbit/s on the PROFINET IO

Short reaction times

Integrated safety functions

Savings on time-consuming safety engineering

For motor starters up to safety category 4 according to EN 954-1 Fail-safe modules


For detecting and outputting fail-safe signals via PROFIBUS (PROFIsafe) up to Safety Category 4 (EN 954-1)

1-9

Product overview 1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals

1.4

1.4

Guide to the ET 200S manuals

Required manuals for various configurations The components of ET 200S are described in various manuals. These manuals are part of various documentation packages. The table below shows possible configuration variants of the ET 200S and the manuals in the documentation packages that are required for each variant. You will need the information contained in the following manuals:

$2

$,

'2

Distributed I/O System ET 200S 30(

,0

ET 200S consists of the following components:

38/6(

+

3RV,QF$QDORJ

66,

'2

30(

,0


+

Technological Functions ET 200S

3RV,QF'LJLWDO

'2

30(

,0

ET 200S Distributed I/O System Positioning ET 200S

0RGEXV866

$,

'2

30(

+

ET 200S Serial Interface Module

$2

$,

'2

ET 200S Distributed I/O System 30(

,0 &38

,0


+

IM151-7 CPU Interface Module

1-10

$2

$,

'2

30(

,0 31

ET 200S Distributed I/O System +

PROFINET System documentation


Product overview 1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals

PM-D

2AO

2DO

PM-E

IM151-1

ET 200S consists of the following components:

DS

DS

You will need the information contained in the following manuals:

ET 200S Distributed I/O System +

ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System


)'2

)',

30(

'2

'2

30(

,0

+

ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules

30')352),VDIH

)'2

)',

30(

,0

ET 200S Distributed I/O System )'6H[

)'6H[

+

ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules +

ET 200S Motor Starters Fail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter operating instructions +

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter list manual ET 200S Distributed I/O System +

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter operating instructions +

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter list manual 1

ICU24F for fail-safe frequency converter


1-11

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1

2.1.1

2.1

2

Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

Introduction

Introduction Using the following simple examples, you will learn how to place the ET 200S into operation on the PROFIBUS DP step by step: • ET 200S assembling and wiring up • Configuring ET 200S in the SIMATIC manager • Creating a user program • Switching on ET 200S • Evaluating diagnostic messages: – Removing and inserting of modules – Switching off the load voltage on the power module – Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module

Requirements • You have assembled an S7 station consisting of a power supply component and a DP master (e. g. CPU 315-2 DP). A CPU 315-2 DP was used as a DP master for this example. Every other DP master (Norm IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1) is naturally also usable. • STEP 7 (starting V5.0 with ServicePack 3) is completely installed on you PG. You have STEP 7 knowledge. • The programming device must be connected at the DP master.


2-1

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

Required components The following graphic shows you which ET 200S components you require for the example on the PROFIBUS DP:

30

',

',

',

',

6ORW

30 '2 '2 '2 '2

,0 5DLO 7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH

[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG '29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH 7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG 30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH [70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG',9'& +LJK)HDWXUHHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH 7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH ,067$1'$5'LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH 352),%86EXVFRQQHFWRU

Figure 2-1

Components for the example on PROFIBUS DP

Order numbers for example configuration on the PROFIBUS DP Quantity

2-2

Ordering data

Order number

1×

Standard profile rails 35 mm (e. g. length 483 mm)

6ES5 710-8MA11

1×

IM151-1 STANDARD interface module and terminating module, 1 unit

6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0

2×

Fast Connect Terminal Module TM-P15N23-A1, 1 piece

6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0

2×

Fast Connect Terminal Module TM-E15N24-A1, 5 pieces

6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0

2×

PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit

6ES7138-4CA01-0AB0

1×

2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0

1×

2DO DC24V/0,5A HF, 5 pieces

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0

1×

Bus connector

6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0



2.1.2

Example: Installing ET 200S

Procedure 1. Mount the rail (35 mm x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a stationary base. 2. Install the various modules on the rail beginning on the left (hook on, swing in, move to the left). Adhere to the following sequence: – IM151-1 STANDARD interface module – TM-P15S23-A1 terminal module – 4 x TM-E15S24-A1 terminal module – TM-P15S23-A1 terminal module – 4 x TM-E15S24-A1 terminal module – Terminating module 3. Set PROFIBUS address 3 on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module. Set PROFIBUS Address 3: 2)) 21

*)

Intended for future enhancements. Switch must be in OFF position.


2-3


2.1.3

Example: Wiring and assembling ET 200S

Procedure 1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:

$8;

$

$

1

①

$8;

/ 0

2

3

24 VDC electronic power supply

②

24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1

③

24 VDC load supply voltage group 2

1. Use the PROFIBUS bus connector to connect the DP master with the ET 200S. The PROFIBUS DP interface is located on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module. 2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules. 3. Switch on the power supply for the DP master. 4. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master. CPU 315-2 DP: – DC 5 V → lights up – SF DP → off – BUSF → flashes

2-4



2.1.4

Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager

Procedure 1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with a DP master (e.g., CPU315-2 DP). Create OB1 and OB82 for the project. 2. Create the PROFIBUS subnet. 3. Connect the PROFIBUS subnet with the DP master in HW Config. 4. Take the ET 200S from the hardware catalog and put it on the PROFIBUS. 5. Set PROFIBUS address 3 for ET 200S. 6. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration table. 7. Select the electronic modules in the configuration table, and click the "Pack addresses" button. Table 2-1

Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP

Module/ DP identifier

Order number

I address

Q address

Comment

1

6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V

Power module

2

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

3

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

Byte 0.2 and 0.3

4

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

Byte 0.4 and 0.5

5

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

Bits 0.6 and 0.7

6


Power module

7

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

8

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

Byte 0.2 and 0.3

9

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

Byte 0.4 and 0.5

10

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

Bits 0.6 and 0.7

0

Byte 0.0 and 0.1

0

Byte 0.0 and 0.1

1. Set the following parameters: – In the DP slave properties dialog box for ET 200S: Enable startup for set- actual configuration: enable – In the DP slave properties dialog box for the PM-E 24 VDC, Module/DP ID 1 (in the configuration table) Diagnostics: Missing load induced stress – In the DP slave properties dialog box for 2 DO 24 VDC, Module/DP ID 7 (in the configuration table) Diagnostics: Wire failure A0 2. Save the configuration.


2-5


2.1.5

Example: Creating a user program

Procedure 1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB1. Example 1: Reading in an input and controlling an output: STL A I 0.0

If input byte 0.0 and

A M 2.0

memory bit 2.0 are set, then

S Q 0.0

set output byte 0.0

Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte: STL L PIB 0

Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator (bytes 0.0 to 0.7)

T PQB 0

Transfer the accumulator content to I/O output byte 0 (byte 0.0 to 0.7)

1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager. 2. Download the configuration to the DP master.

2.1.6

Example: Switching on ET 200S

Procedure 1. Switch on all of the power supplies on the ET 200S. 2. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master and ET 200S. – CPU 315-2 DP: DC 5 V: lights up SF DP: off BUSF: off – ET 200S: SF: off BF: off ON: lights up

2-6



2.1.7

Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages

Introduction In this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S. In the event of an error, OB82 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB82. Tip: Call SFC13 in OB82, and evaluate the diagnostic frame.

Removing and inserting the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module 1. Remove the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module during operation. 2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module: – SF: lights up → a diagnostic message is pending. – BF: off – ON: lights up Result: The ET 200S continues to run error-free. 3. Evaluate the diagnostic message: Result: – Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set → external diagnostic – Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.1 is set → Slot 2 – Module status: Byte 19.2/19.3: 11B → no module 4. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module. Result: – Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module: SF: off BF: off ON: lights up – The diagnostic message is deleted.


2-7


Switching off load voltage on the power module 1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E 24 VDC (slot 1). 2. Observe the status LEDs. IM 151 STANDARD interface module: – SF: lights up Power module: – PWR: off → No load voltage available on the power module – SF: lights up → a diagnostic message is pending. I/O modules in the voltage group: – LEDs: light up 3. Evaluate the diagnostics. Result: – Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set → external diagnostics – Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.0 is set → Slot 1 – Channel-specific diagnostics: Byte 35.0 to 35.5: 000000B → Slot 1 Byte 37.0 to 37.4: 10001B → sensor or load voltage missing 4. Switch on the load voltage on the power module again, and reevaluate the diagnostics. Result: – Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module: SF: off – Status LEDs on the power module: PWR: on SF: off – Status LEDs on the I/O modules: LEDs: off – The diagnostic message is deleted.

2-8



Simulating a wire break in the actuator wiring 1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A; High Feature electronic module (slot 7) 2. Observe the status LEDs: IM151-1 STANDARD interface module: – SF: lights up 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module: – SF: lights up → a diagnostic message is pending – 1: off → output is not activated 3. Evaluate the diagnostic message: Result: – Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set → external diagnostics – Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.6 is set → Slot 7 – Channel-specific diagnostics: Byte 35.0 to 35.5: 000110B → Slot 7 Byte 36.0 to 35.5: 000000B → Channel 0 Byte 37.0 to 37.4: 00110B → Wire break 4. Reattach the cable to the actuator to terminal 1, and reevaluate the diagnostics: – Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module: SF: off – Status LEDs on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module: SF: off 1: off/on – The diagnostic message is deleted.

See also Reading out the diagnostics (Page 6-29)


2-9

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO

2.2

2.2.1

2.2

Commissioning on PROFINET IO

Introduction

Introduction The following simple example teaches you step-by-step how to commission the ET 200S on PROFINET IO: • Installing and wiring of ET 200S • Configuring with STEP 7 using the GSD file • Transferring device names to the IO device • Integrating into the user program • Switching on the ET 200S • Evaluating the interrupts and diagnostics: – Removing and inserting of modules – Switching off the load voltage on the power module – Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module

Requirements • You have set up an S7 station consisting of a power supply module and an IO controller (e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). A CPU 317-2 PN/DP was used as the IO controller in this example. • STEP 7 (V5.3 Service Pack 1 or higher) is fully installed on your programming device (PG). You are familiar with STEP 7. • The PG is connected to the PROFINET IO.

2-10



Required components The figure below illustrates the ET 200S components needed for the example on PROFINET IO:

,0 31

30

',

',

',

', 30 '2 '2 '2 '2

6ORW

5DLO 7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH

[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG '29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH 7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG 30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH [70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG',9'& +LJK)HDWXUHHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH 7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG30(9'&SRZHUPRGXOH ,031LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW)&LQVWDOODWLRQFDEOHZLWK352),1(7FRQQHFWRU

Figure 2-2

Components for the example on PROFINET IO

Order numbers for the example configuration on PROFINET IO Quantity

Ordering data

Order number

1×

Standard mounting rail, 35 mm (e.g., length of 483 mm)

6ES5 710-8MA11

1×

IM151-3 PN interface module and terminating module, 1 unit

6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0

1×

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (e. g. 64k)

6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0

2×

TM-P15N23-A1 Fast Connect terminal module, 1 unit

6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0

2×

TM-E15N24-A1 Fast Connect terminal module, 5 units

6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0

2×

PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit

6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0

1×

2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0

1×

2DO DC24V/0.5A HF, 5 pieces

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0

PROFINET connector (according to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation Guide) Appropriate installation cables: • FC Standard Cable • FC Trailing Cable • FC Marine Cable


6XV1 840-2AH10 6XV1 840-3AH10 6XV1 840-4AH10

2-11


2.2.2

Example: Installing and wiring ET 200S

Installing the mounting rail 1. Mount the rail (35 mm x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a stationary base. 2. Start from the left with the installation of the individual modules on the profile rail (hook in - swivel in - slide to left). Adhere to the following sequence: – IM151-3 PN interface module – TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module – 4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module – TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module – 4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module – Terminating module

Wiring and assembling ET 200S 1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:

$8;

1

2-12

$8;

$

$

/ 0

2

3

①

24 VDC electronic power supply

②

24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1

③

24 VDC voltage group 2


Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO 1. Use the PROFINET connector to connect the ET 200S (IO device) to the IO controller via a switch. The PROFINET interface is located on the IM 151-3 PN interface module. 2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules. 3. Switch on the power supply for the IO controller. 4. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller. CPU 317-2 PN/DP: – DC 5 V → lights up – SF → off – BF2 → flashes

2.2.3

Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager

Procedure 1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with an IO controller (e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). Create OB1, OB82, and OB83 for the project. 2. Open the "Properties - Ethernet Interfaces" window in the HW config and apply a subnet e. g. Ethernet(1). 3. Take the IM151-3 PN from the ET 200S catalog of the hardware catalog and insert it on Ethernet(1):PROFINET IO System (100). 4. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration table. Table 2-2 Module

Configuration table in HW config for PROFINET IO Order number

I address

Q address

Comment

0

6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 IM151-3 PN

1


2

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

0

Byte 0.0 and 0.1

3

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

1

Byte 1.0 and 1.1

4

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

2

Byte 2.0 and 2.1

5

6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V

3

6


7

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

0

Byte 0.0 and 0.1

8

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

1

Byte 1.0 and 1.1

9

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

2

Byte 2.0 and 2.1

10

6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V

3

Byte 3.0 and 3.1


Power module

Byte 3.0 and 3.1 Power module

2-13

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO 1. Set the following parameters: – In the IO device properties dialog for the PM-E 24 VDC, Module 1 (in the configuration table) Diagnostics: Missing load induced stress – In the IO device properties dialog for the 2 DO 24 VDC, Module 7 (in the configuration table) Diagnostics: Wire failure A0 2. Compile and save the configuration.

2.2.4

Example: Assigning device names for the IO device

Procedure 1. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN. 2. Switch on the power supply for the IM151-3 PN interface module. 3. Open the "Properties - IM151-3 PN" window in the HW config and enter the device name for the IO device there. 4. An online PROFINET connection from the PG to the IO device via a switch is required for transferring the name to the IM151-3 PN interface module. The device name is transferred to the IM151-3 PN using "PLC > Ethernet > Assign Device Name." To do so, activate the "Assign name" button in the "Assign device name" window. The device name is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the interface module IM151-3 PN. Once the name is assigned, it appears in the window.

2.2.5

Example: Creating a user program

Procedure 1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB1. Example 1: Reading in an input and controlling an output: STL

2-14

A I 0.0

If input byte 0.0 and

A M 2.0

memory bit 2.0 are set, then

S Q 0.0

set output byte 0.0


Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte: STL L PIB 0

Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator (bytes 0.0 to 0.7)

T PQB 0

Transfer the accumulator content to I/O output byte 0 (byte 0.0 to 0.7)

1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager. 2. Download the configuration to the IO controller.

2.2.6

Example: Switching on ET 200S

Procedure 1. Switch on all of the power supplies on the ET 200S. 2. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller, ET 200S, and switch. – CPU 317-2 PN/DP: DC 5 V: lights up SF: off BF2: off LINK: lights up – ET 200S: SF: off BF: off ON: lights up LINK: lights up – Switch: LINK: lights up 100MB: lights up


2-15


2.2.7

Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages

Introduction In this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S. In the event of an error, OB83 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB83. Hint: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 83 and evaluate the diagnostic telegram.

Procedure 1. Remove the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module (e.g., from slot 2) during operation. 2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-3 PN interface module: – SF: lights up → diagnostic message present. – BF: off – ON: lights up Result: The ET 200S continues to run without fault. 3. In the event of a remove interrupt, OB83 is started. Start SFB 52 in OB83. Evaluate the E002H diagnostic data record. Byte

Contents

Meaning

Header information 0 and 1

8104H

Data record with discrepancies between the preset and actual configurations

2 and 3

0014H

20 bytes follow

4 and 5

0100H

Version 1.0

6 and 7

0001H

0001H if the preset configuration deviates from the actual configuration

IO device header information 8 and 9

0000H

steady

10 and 11

0000H

steady

12 and 13

0001H

Number of slots in which there is a discrepancy between the preset configuration and the actual configuration

Configuration data of slots

2-16

14 and 15

0002H

Slot number of the slot with a discrepancy between the preset and actual configurations

16 to 19

XXXXXXXXH

20 and 21

0000H

Identification of the inserted module No module inserted

22 and 23

0000H

Number of submodule slots with a discrepancy between the preset and actual configurations. Because the content is 0000H, no additional submodule data follow.


Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO 1. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module. Result: – Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module: SF: off BF: off ON: lights up – Once the module is inserted, diagnostic data record E002H no longer indicates a discrepancy between the preset and actual configurations for any slot.

Switching off load voltage on the power module 1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E 24 VDC (slot 1). 2. Observe the status LEDs. IM 151-3 PN interface module: – SF: lights up Power module: – PWR: off → Load voltage on power module not present – SF: lights up → diagnostic message present. I/O modules in the voltage group: – LEDs: light up 3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00AH. Hint: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 81 or OB82 and evaluate the diagnostic telegram. Byte

Contents

Meaning


0010H

Data record with channel diagnostics

2 and 3

0012H

18 bytes follow

4 and 5

0100H

Version 1.0

Channel diagnostic data 6 and 7

0001H

Slot 1

8 and 9

0001H

Submodule slot 1

10 and 11

8000H

12

08H

Incoming fault

13

00H

Reserved

14 and 15

8000H

Error on submodule

Submodule diagnostic is pending

Channel diagnostic data record 0 with detailed information on the fault 16 and 17

0000H

18

08H

Arriving fault

Channel 0

19

01H

Data type: 1 Bit

20 and 21

0011H

Sensor or load voltage missing


2-17

Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO 1. Switch on the load voltage on the power module again, and reevaluate the diagnostics. Result: – Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module: SF: off – Status LEDs on the power module: PWR: on SF: off – Status LEDs on the I/O modules: LEDs: off – The diagnostic is deleted.

Simulating a wire break in the actuator wiring 1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A; High Feature electronic module (slot 7) 2. Observe the status LEDs: IM151-3 PN interface module: – SF: lights up 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module: – SF: lights up → diagnostic message present. – 1: 1: off → output is not activated 3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00AH: Byte

Contents

Meaning


0010H

Data record with channel diagnostics

2 and 3

0012H

18 bytes follow

4 and 5

0100H

Version 1.0

Channel diagnostic data 6 and 7

0007H

Slot 7

8 and 9

0001H

Submodule slot 1

10 and 11

8000H

12

08H

Incoming fault

13

00H

Reserved

14 and 15

8000H

Error on submodule

Submodule diagnostic is pending

Channel diagnostic data record 0 with detailed information on the fault

2-18

16 and 17

0000H

18

48H

Incoming fault at an output

Channel 0

19

01H

Data type: 1 Bit

20 and 21

0006H

Wire break


Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO 1. Reattach the cable to the actuator to terminal 1, and reevaluate the diagnostics: – Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module: SF: off – Status LEDs on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module: SF: off 1: off/on – The diagnostic is deleted.


2-19


2-20


3

Configuration options 3.1

3.1

Precisely Modular System

Principle In describing the ET 200S as a discretely modular system, we mean you can adapt the ET 200S configuration to meet the exact requirements of your application. The table below shows you a number of examples of ET 200S distributed I/O system configurations: Configuration examples for ET 200S

','&967

','&967

$2867

$,57'67

&28179N+]

6ORW

&RPSOHWLRQ

30(SRZHUPRGXOH

Structure

,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH

Example ET 200S with • Digital electronic modules • Analog electronic modules • Technology modules

66,

Table 3-1

66,


3-1

Configuration options 3.1 Precisely Modular System

'6

'6

0 a

0 a

6ORW &RPSOHWLRQ

30'SRZHUPRGXOH

Structure

,QWHUIDFH PRGXOH

Example ET 200S with motor starters

'6

6ORW &RPSOHWLRQ

'6

','&967

','&967

30(SRZHUPRGXOH

30'SRZHUPRGXOH

30(SRZHUPRGXOH

,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH

','&967

ET 200S with • Electronic modules • Motor starters

','&967

a

a

0 a

3-2

0 a

0DQGDWRU\


Configuration options 3.2 ET 200S Power Supply

3.2

3.2

ET 200S Power Supply

Overview Power is supplied to the ET 200S: • With 24 VDC at the interface module (see table below). Power supply of the ET 200S

6ORW

&RPSOHWLRQ

66,

&RXQW9N+]

$,57'

$28

,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH

24 VDC at the interface module

','&9

Configuration (example)

30(SRZHUPRGXOH

Power supply

','&9

Table 3-2

66, '&9


3-3

Configuration options 3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential

3.3

3.3

Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential

Placing and Connecting to Common Potential With ET 200S, you can choose where to position the power modules. Each TM-P terminal module (for a power module) that you install in the ET 200S opens a new voltage group. All sensor and load supplies of the downstream electronic modules/motor starters are fed from this TM-P terminal module (for a power module). If you place an additional TM-P terminal module after an electronic module/motor starter, you interrupt the voltage buses (P1/P2) and simultaneously open a new voltage group. This enables sensor and load supplies to be individually connected to common potential.

AUX(iliary) Rail (AUX 1) A TM-P terminal module (for a power module) enables you to connect an additional potential (up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module), which you can apply by means of the AUX(iliary) bus. You can set the AUX(iliary) bus individually: • As a protective conductor bar • For additionally required voltage

Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential

(0

5

(0

(0

3

(0

5

(0

(0

2

(0

5

(0

6

(0

1

4

9

8

3-4

7

①

Voltage group 1

⑧

Supply voltage 2

②

Voltage group 2

⑨

Supply voltage 1

③

Voltage group 3

⑩

Additionally required voltage

④

Termination

⑪

Protective conductor

⑤

Power module

⑫

P1/P2 power buses

⑥

Interface module

⑬

AUX bus

⑦

Supply voltage 3


Configuration options 3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential

Warning If you connect the AUX1 bus to common potential independently of the P1/P2 buses (different voltages), there is no safe electrical separation between the AUX1 bus and the P1/P2 buses.

Connecting different potentials to the AUX1 bus Note If you apply different potentials to the AUX1 bus within an ET 200S station, you must separate the voltage groups by means of a power module with the TM-P15S23-A0 terminal module.


3-5

Configuration options 3.4 Configuration options for the interface modules

3.4

3.4

Configuration options for the interface modules

Which Interface Module Matches Your Application: Table 3-3

Interface modules and the applications for which they are suited Applications

• • • • • • • • • • •

Interface module

Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485 Transfer rates: IM151-1 BASIC interface 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s Operation as a DPV0 slave Direct data exchange ET 200S Power Supply Bus Length: not relevant Number of modules: max. 12 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485 interface Operation as a DPV0 slave Direct data exchange ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be parameterized) Number of modules: max. 63 Option handling and status byte for power modules

Transfer rates: 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.,75; 187.5; 500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s

IM151-1 STANDARD

In addition, for 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher: • Operation as a DPV1 slave – Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record) – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts • Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP • Identification data • • • • • •

Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via fiber-optic cable Operation as a DPV0 slave Direct data exchange ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be parameterized) Number of modules: max. 63 Option handling and status byte for power modules

Transfer rates: IM 151-1 FO STANDARD 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 12 Mbit/s

In addition, for 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher: • Operation as a DPV1 slave – Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record) – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts • Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP • Identification data

3-6



• • • • • • •

•

•

Applications Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485 interface Direct data exchange Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication via PROFIBUS DP Use of fail-safe modules Clocking as of 1.5 Mbps Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP using HW Config Operation as a DPV0 slave – Noncyclical data traffic (dataset read/write): Class 2 services (e.g. firmware update) Operation as a DPV1 slave – Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record) – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts Number of modules: max. 63

Interface module Transfer rates: IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s

after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 additional: • ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be parameterized) • Identification Data • Option handling and status byte for power module • Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication for fault-secure modules • Operation as DPV1-slave on the Y-switching • •

• • •

Connection of the PROFINET IO via RJ45 connector Operation as an IO device – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m Number of modules: max. 63 Status byte for power modules

Transfer rate: 100 Mbit/s Autosensing

IM151-3 PN

after 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 additional: • Summary of modules within a byte (packing) • Slot granular replacement value behavior • Data sets for I/O devices


3-7


Rules for setting up a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD For fiber-optic cable networks containing nodes with integrated fiber-optic cable interfaces, note the following: • The fiber-optic cable network can only be set up as a line segment. • If you remove the fiber-optic cable from an integrated fiber-optic cable interface, or the supply voltage to the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module fails, all the downstream nodes are no longer accessible.

Example configuration of a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD The figure below presents an example of how to set up a fiber-optic cable network with the ET 200S and the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module. 1

2

3

①

S7-400H automation system with IM 467 FO as the DP master

②

ET 200S Distributed I/O with IM151-1 FO STANDARD

③

Fiber-optic duplex cable

Rules for setup of a PROFINET network You can find information about setting up and starting up PROFINET in the PROFINET system documentation.

3-8


Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules

3.5

3.5.1

3.5

Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules

Electronic modules and applications

Use of electronic modules Table 3-4

Electronic modules and the applications for which they are suitable Applications

•

Evaluating switches, proximity switches (BEROs), sensors, and encoders

24 VDC

Electronic module 2DI 24 VDC Standard 2DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC Standard 4DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard

UC 24 to 48V

4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature

• •

Evaluating NAMUR sensors Evaluating wired, unwired mechanical sensors

4 input channels

4DI NAMUR

•

Evaluating switches, proximity switches (BEROs), sensors, and encoders

120 VAC

2DI 120 VAC Standard

230 VAC


Switching solenoid valves, DC and AC contactors, indicator lights, actuators

24 VDC up to 0.5 A

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard

•

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard 24 VDC up to 2 A

2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

120/230 VAC up to 1 A

2DO 24 to 230 VAC/1 A

Up to 120 VDC/230 VAC up to 5 A

2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A

Up to 48 VDC/230 VAC up to 5 A

2RO NO/NC 24 to 48 VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A

•

Measuring voltages

±10 V/ ± 5 V/ 1 to 5 V

2AI U Standard

•

Measuring voltages with high resolution

±10 V/ ± 5 V/ 1 to 5 V

2AI U High Feature

•

Time-critical measuring of voltages

± 10V/ ± 5V/ ± 2.5V/ 1 to 5V

2AI U High Speed

•

Measuring currents with two-wire measuring transducers

4 to 20 mA

2AI I 2WIRE Standard

Time-critical measuring of currents with two-wire measuring transducers

4 to 20 mA

Measuring currents with four-wire measuring transducers

± 20 mA/ 4 to 20 mA

•

•

4AI I 2WIRE Standard 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed

0 to 20 mA



3-9

Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules Applications

Electronic module

•

Measuring currents with two-wire, four-wire measuring transducers and high resolution

± 20 mA/ 4 to 20 mA

2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature

•

Time-critical measuring of currents with four-wire measuring transducers

4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA ± 20 mA

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

•

Measuring temperatures with thermoresistors and resistors Measuring reference junction temperatures in thermocouple applications

Pt100/ Ni100 150 Ω/300 Ω/600 Ω

2AI RTD Standard

Measuring temperatures with thermoresistors and resistors Measuring reference junction temperatures in thermocouple applications High degree of accuracy Temperature coefficient can be assigned

Pt100/ Ni100/ Pt 200/ Ni 120/ Pt 500/ Ni 500/ Pt 1000/ Ni 1000 150 Ω/ 300 Ω/ 600 Ω/ PTC

2AI RTD High Feature

•

Measuring temperatures with thermocouples and voltages

Type E/N/J/K/L/S/R/B/T ± 80 mV

2AI TC Standard

•

Measuring temperatures with thermocouples and voltages Internal reference junction in connection with TM-E15S24-AT

Type E/N/J/K/L/S/R/B/T/C ± 80 mV

2AI TC High Feature

•

Outputting of voltages

± 10 V/ 1 to 5 V

2AO U Standard

•

Outputting of voltages with high resolution

± 10 V/ 1 to 5 V

2AO U High Feature

•

Outputting of currents

±20 mA/ 4 to 20 V

2AO I Standard

•

Outputting of currents with high resolution

± 20 mA/ 4 to 20 V

2AO I High Feature

•

Photoelectric proximity switch

Reflex sensor and diffuse sensor with IQ-SENSE

4 IQ-SENSE

•

Counting of pulses, measurement of frequency, rotational speed, or period duration by means of incremental encoders

24 V signals up to 100 kHz

1COUNT 24V/100kHz

5 V signals up to 500 kHz

1COUNT 5V/500kHz

Detecting and evaluating of paths with absolute encoders (SSI) Simple positioning tasks

Absolute encoder: 13 Bit/ 21 Bit/ 25 1SSI Bit

Control of stepper motor power sections Positioning of stepper motors

5 V pulses up to 204 kHz

1STEP 5V/204kHz

•

Outputting of pulses in 4 different operating modes

Minimum pulse duration of 200 µs

2PULSE

•

Controlled positioning, incremental encoder 5 V differential signals

Drive controlled by means of digital 1POS INC/Digital outputs: backwards, forwards, rapid traverse/creep speed

•

• •

• •

•

• • • •

Drive triggered via analog output ±10V

3-10

1POS INC/Analog


Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules Applications •

Controlled positioning, SSI encoder

Electronic module

Drive controlled by means of digital 1POS SSI/Digital outputs: backwards, forwards, rapid traverse/creep speed Drive triggered via analog output ±10V

1POS SSI/Analog

•

RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485 serial data transmission

ASCII and 3964(R) protocol

1SI 3964/ASCII

Protocol mode and USS

1SI Modbus/USS

•

Reservation of a slot for any electronic module

Width 15 mm

RESERVE

Width 30 mm

Use of electronic modules on terminal modules You can combine the terminal modules in the ET 200S configuration. Table 3-5

TM-P terminal modules and the power modules for which they are suitable

Power modules


Screw terminal

15S23-A1

15S23-A0

15S22-01

30S44-A0

F30S47-F0

Order number 6ES7-193

...4CC20-0AA0

...4CD20-0AA0

...4CE00-0AA0

...4CK20-0AA0

3RK1 903-3AA00

Spring terminal

15C23-A1

15C23-A0

15C22-01

30C44-A0


...4CC30-0AA0

...4CD30-0AA0

...4CE10-0AA0

...4CK30-0AA0

---

---

---

Fast Connect

15N23-A1

15N23-A0

15N22-01


...4CC70-0AA0

...4CD70-0AA0

...4CE60-0AA0

PM-E 24 VDC

●

●

●

PM E 24-48 VDC

●

●

●

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/ 24 to 230 VAC

●

●

●

PM-E F pm 24 VDC PROFIsafe*

●

PM-E F pp 24 VDC PROFIsafe*

●

PM-D F 24 VDC PROFISafe

●

* see manual ET 200S Fault-Secure Modules


3-11

Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules Table 3-6

TM-E terminal modules and the electronic modules for which they are suitable

Electronic modules


Screw terminal

15S26-A1

15S24-A1

15S24-01

15S23-01

15S24-AT

30S44-01

30S46-A1

Order number 6ES7193

...4CA400AA0

...4CA200AA0

...4CB200AA0

...4CB000AA0

...4CL200AA0

...4CG200AA0

...4CF400AA0

Spring terminal

15C26-A1

15C24-A1

15C24-01

15C23-01

15C24-AT

30C44-01

30C46-A1


...4CA500AA0

...4CA300AA0

...4CB300AA0

...4CB100AA0

...4CL300AA0

...4CG300AA0

...4CF500AA0

Fast Connect

15N26-A1

15N24-A1

15N24-01

15N23-01

---

---

---


...4CA800AA0

...4CA700AA0

...4CB700AA0

...4CB600AA0

●

●

●

●

4DI UC24..48V HF

●

●

●

●

4DI NAMUR

●

●

●

●


●

●

●

●


●

●

●

●


●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A

●

●

●

●


●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2DI 24 VDC Standard 2DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC Standard 4DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

2RO NO/NC 24 to 48 VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A 2AI U Standard 2AI U High Feature 2AI U High Speed 2AI I 2WIRE Standard 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed 4AI I 2WIRE Standard

●

●


●

●


●

●

●

●

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed 2AI RTD Standard

3-12


Configuration options 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules Electronic modules


Screw terminal

15S26-A1

15S24-A1

15S24-01

15S23-01

15S24-AT

30S44-01

30S46-A1


...4CA400AA0

...4CA200AA0

...4CB200AA0

...4CB000AA0

...4CL200AA0

...4CG200AA0

...4CF400AA0

Spring terminal

15C26-A1

15C24-A1

15C24-01

15C23-01

15C24-AT

30C44-01

30C46-A1


...4CA500AA0

...4CA300AA0

...4CB300AA0

...4CB100AA0

...4CL300AA0

...4CG300AA0

...4CF500AA0

Fast Connect

15N26-A1

15N24-A1

15N24-01

15N23-01

---

---

---


...4CA800AA0

...4CA700AA0

...4CB700AA0

...4CB600AA0


●

●

●

●

2AI TC Standard

●

●

●

●

2AI TC High Feature 2AO U Standard

● ●

●

2AO U High Feature 2AO I Standard

●

●

●

●

2AO I High Feature 4 IQ-SENSE

●

●

1COUNT 24V/100kHz

●

●

1COUNT 5V/500kHz

●

1SSI

●

●

1STEP 5V/204kHz

●

●

2PULSE

●

●

1POS INC/Digital

●

1POS SSI/Digital

●

1POS INC/Analog

●

1POS SSI/Analog

●

1SI 3964/ASCII

●

●

1SI Modbus/USS

●

●

4/8 F-DI 24 VDC PROFIsafe*

●

●

4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 A PROFIsafe*

●

●

●

●

RESERVE (width 15 mm)

●

●


●

●

●

* see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual


3-13


3.5.2

Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module

Applicability of power modules The table below indicates which power modules you can use with the various electronic modules: Power modules

Electronic modules

PM-E 24 VDC

Can be used with all electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC Standard, and 2DO 120/230 VAC.

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC

Can be used with all electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC Standard, and 2DO 120/230 VAC.

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/ 24 to 230 VAC

Can be used with all electronic modules.

PM-E F pm 24 VDC PROFIsafe

For the fail-safe modules.

PM-E F pp 24 VDC PROFIsafe

See ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules manual

PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe

3-14



Procedure Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module for your application:

'R\RX QHHGDFFHVVDWWKLV WHUPLQDOPRGXOHWRWKH$8; EXVE\PHDQVRIWHUPLQDOVIRU H[DPSOHIRUSURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUVRU DGGLWLRQDOVXSSO\RISRWHQWLDOXSWR WKHPD[LPXPORDGYROWDJHRIWKH PRGXOH "

6FUHZW\SHWHUPLQDO 7036 [WHUPLQDOV 1R

6SULQJWHUPLQDO 703& [WHUPLQDOV )DVW&RQQHFW 7031 [WHUPLQDOV

"Properties" button > "Parameter" tab > "Properties" button > "Network settings" tab > "Options" button – Activate equidistance on the DP master system – Set the length of the equidistance DP cycle (max. 32 ms) – Set "Times Ti and To for all DP slaves equal" (causes a synchronization of the I/O data of the various DP slaves) – Times Ti and To can be set separately. Recommendation: accept the standard settings Ti and To. Equidistance

Network Station

Cables

Activate equidistant bus cycle Recalculate

Optimize DP cycle (and poss. Ti, To): Number of PGs/OPs/TDs etc. on PROFIBUS Configured:

0

Total:

0

Graduation: Equidistant DP cycle:

8.000

ms

0.125

ms

Details ...

(min = 6.000 ms; max. = 32.000 ms) Synchronization of Slaves Times Ti an To identical for all slaves (if not: setting in Properties - Slaves) Graduation: Time Ti (read in process values): (min = 3.4375 ms; max = 3.5625 ms)

3.5000

ms

0.0625

ms

Graduation: Time To (output process values): (min = 0.8125 ms; max = 3.5625 ms)

Figure 3-4

3.5000

ms

0.0625

ms

Dialog box options

Note The "recalculate" button enables you to recalculate a value for the equidistant DP cycle from STEP 7 that takes the current PROFIBUS DP configuration into account. This value is then automatically entered in the fields "Equidistant DP cycle", Time Ti (...)" and "Time To (...)".


3-27

Configuration options 3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP 3. DP slave settings: DP slave "Object properties" > "Cycle synchronization" tab – Activate "Synchronize DP slave to equidistant DP cycle". – Enter times Ti and To (if "Times Ti and To for all DP slave equal" was not set on the DP master). Recommendation: Accept the standard settings for Ti and To. – Select the devices to be configured and assign in the "Addresses" tab the subprocess image defined in the CPU. 3URSHUWLHV'3VODYH *HQHUDO LQIRUPDWLRQ

6ODYHSDUDPHWHUV

&ORFNLQJ

6\QFKURQL]H'3VODYHWRHTXLGLVWDQW'3F\FOHWKHVDPH7L7RIRUDOOVODYHV 7LPH7LUHDGSURFHVVYDOXHV PLQ PVPD[ PV

PV 7LPHEDVH

PV

7LPH7LUHDGSURFHVVYDOXHV PLQ PVPD[ PV

PV 7LPHEDVH

PV

(TXLGLVWDQW'3F\FOH PLQ PVPD[ PV

PV

Figure 3-5

DP slave properties dialog box

Note If you click on "Cycle synchronization" in the "Edit" menu, a configuration overview of the cycle synchronized devices is displayed.

4. Create user program: – Creation of the OB 61. – At the start of the OB 61, the SFC 126 has to call up the inputs to update the subprocess image. – At the end of the OB 61, the SFC 127 has to call up the outputs to update the subprocess image. – The subprocess image to be used is the one in the CPU parameterized subprocess image ("Cycle synchronization alarms" tab).

3-28


Configuration options 3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP

3.7.3

Fault correction during isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics Event

Cause

Action

Station failure of the ET 200S

Faulty isochronous operation (10 or more clock failures or clock violations).

Check the parameter assignment.

The obtainable equidistance times are too long.

The input delays of the HIGH FEATURE digital input modules are not optimally set.

Decrease the input delay of the HIGH FEATURE digital input modules.

No isochronous signal detection/output

Wrong process image partition used.

Check whether the same process image partition was used in the user program of OB61 (or up to OB64) when SFCs 126/127 are called and in the configuration of the DP master/DP slave.

Neg. RET_VAL in the case of SFCs 126/127

Further information You can find further information to the cycle synchronization in the STEP 7 Online Help and in the manual Cycle synchronicity.


3-29

Configuration options 3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

3.8

3.8.1

3.8

Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP

Principle Option handling enables you to set up the ET 200S for future expansions (options). Option handling means that you install, wire, configure, and program the planned maximum configuration of the ET 200S. The electronic modules required for this are merely replaced with inexpensive RESERVE modules, which you can easily replace later with the planned electronic modules. This means that the ET 200S can be completely prewired ("master cabling") because the RESERVE module is not connected to the terminals of the terminal module and therefore is not connected to the process. The RESERVE modules for future expansion at the right-hand end of the station are optional. In this case, preparatory installation and wiring are possible but not required.

See also Removing and inserting electronic modules (Page 5-28)

3.8.2

Principle of operation of option handling

Principle With option handling, the configuration of slots 2 to 63 of the ET 200S is checked. If the check is enabled for a slot, the RESERVE module (option) or a configured electronic module can occupy this slot without a diagnostic being signaled. If the check is disabled, only the configured electronic module can be located in this slot. Any other module will trigger a diagnostic. You can also control the configuration of slots 2 to 63 and monitor the configuration of slots 1 to 63 using the control and feedback interface in the process input image (PII) and process output image (PIQ).

3-30


Configuration options 3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP 7KHVHWWLQJRIWKHSDUDPHWHUರ2SHUDWLRQDW3UHVHW!$FWXDO FRQILJXUDWLRQರLVQRWUHOHYDQWIRUWKHSURFHVVLOOXVWUDWHG

,VWKHFRQILJXUHG HOHFWURQLFPRGXOHLQVHUWHG"

actual installation" blocked, • The ET 200S does not start up if a module is missing or if an incorrect module is inserted. The diagnostic "No module" or "Incorrect module" is signaled. • The ET 200S starts up if you enable option handling for the slot of an inserted RESERVE module. A diagnostic is not signaled.

3-34



Substitute values If you have assigned an electronic module for the RESERVE module, the following substitute values are signaled: • Digital input modules: 0 • Analog input modules: 7FFFH • Function module: 0

3.8.6

Controlling and monitoring options

Introduction You can use the control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) to control and monitor options by means of the user program. Recommendation: Before you work with the optional enhancements of the ET 200S, check via the feedback interface (see table further below) whether all configured electronic modules are plugged in.

Note The use of SFCs 14/15 enables consistent accesses to the control and feedback interface.

Principle The control and feedback interface is in the process output and input image of the PM-E 24 to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power modules. It is only available if you have selected the entries ending in ...O or ...SO for the relevant power module in the configuration software. There is one bit for each slot of the electronic or RESERVE modules of the ET 200S. • Control interface: Slot 2 to 63 • Feedback interface: Slot 1 to 63 ,%4%[ ,%4%[ ,%4%[

,%4%[ ,%4%[ ,%4%[ ,%4%[ ,%4%[

%LWQR

1RWDSSOLFDEOH

Figure 3-8

Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII)


3-35


Control interface PIQ (AB x to AB x+7): You can use these bytes (8 bytes) to control the diagnostic behavior of the slots that you enabled for option handling in HW Config. Only the bits of the slots you enabled for option handling during parameter assignment are evaluated (they are marked with "0"). Table 3-9 Slot 2 to 63

Control interface Value of the bit

Response

0

Parameter assignment for option handling applies. RESERVE modules are permitted: • The station is engaged in data exchange. • A diagnostic is not signaled. • The SF LED on the interface module is off.

1

Parameter assignment for option handling is cancelled. RESERVE modules are not accepted on this slot: • The station is engaged in data exchange. • The diagnostic "Incorrect module" is signaled. • The SF LED on the interface module lights up.

Feedback interface PII (EB x to EB x+7): The feedback interface (8 bytes) tells you which module is actually on each slot. All slots are reported. This includes slots that you have not enabled for option handling. Table 3-10 Slot 1 to 63

3-36

Feedback interface Value of the bit

Response

0

The RESERVE module, an incorrect module, or a removed module is on the slot.

1

The configured module is on the slot.



3.8.7

Fault correction during option handling

Fault correction during option handling Table 3-11

Fault correction during option handling Event

ET 200S does not start up; configuration error

Cause

Action

There are multiple entries of power modules ending in ...O or ...SO in the ET 200S configuration.

Check and correct the configuration in HW Config.

There is no power module entry ending in ...O or ...SO in the ET 200S configuration.

Use a power module entry ending in ...O or ...SO in HW Config.


3-37

Configuration options 3.9 Identification data

3.9

3.9

Identification data

Definition Identification data are data that are stored in a module for assisting the user in: • Checking the system configuration • Locating hardware changes in a system • Correcting errors in a system Identification data enable modules to be uniquely identified online. For IM151-STANDARD (after 6ES7151-AA04-AB0), IM151- FO STANDARD (after 6ES7151-AB03-AB0) and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0), this data is available on the ET 200S. In STEP 7, the identification data are displayed in the "Module Information - IM 151" and "Properties - DP Slave" tabs (see STEP 7 online help).

Reading of identification data The user can access particular identification data with Read data record. This requires a two-stage access: 1. A data record containing the associated data record numbers for the various indices is stored in data record 248 (see table below). Table 3-12

Structure of DS 248 for ET 200S Content

Length (bytes)

Coding (hex)

Header information ID of content directory

2

00 01

Index of content directory

2

00 00

Length of subsequent blocks in bytes

2

00 08

Number of blocks

2

00 05

SSL Associated data record number Length of data record Index

2 2 2 2

F1 11 00 E7 00 40 00 01


2 2 2 2

F1 11 00 E8 00 40 00 02


2 2 2 2

F1 11 00 E9 00 40 00 03


2 2 2 2

F1 11 00 EA 00 40 00 04

Block information for identification data

8-bytes of block information for additional data record objects Σ: 48

3-38


Configuration options 3.9 Identification data 1. The portion of the identification data assigned to the respective index is located under the associated data record number (see table on identification data below). – All data records with identification data have a length of 64 bytes. – The data records are structured according to the principle shown in the table below. Table 3-13

Basic structure of data records with identification data Content

Length (bytes)

Coding (hex)

Header information SSL

2

F1 11

Index

2

00 0x

Length of identification data

2

00 38

Number of blocks with identification data

2

00 01

Index

2

00 0x

Identification data for the respective index (see table below)

54

Identification data

The identification data are assigned to the indices corresponding to the table below. The data structures in data records 231 to 234 correspond to the specifications of PROFIBUS Guideline - Order No. 3.502, Version 1.1, May 2003. Table 3-14

Identification data

Identification data

Access

Default setting

Explanation

Identification data 0: Index 1 (data record 231) MANUFACTUREROR_ID

Read (2 bytes)

2A hex (=42 dec)

The name of the manufacturer is stored here. (42 dec = SIEMENS AG)

ORDER_ID

Read (20 bytes)

Dependent on the module

Order number of the module

SERIAL_NUMBER

Read (16 bytes)

Not relevant

HARDWARE_REVISION

Read (2 bytes)

Not relevant

SWSOFTWARE_REVISION

Read (4 bytes)

Firmware version

Provides information on the firmware version of the module.

REVISIONS_COUNTER

Read (2 bytes)

-

Provides information on the assigned changes on the module.

PROFILE_ID

Read (2 bytes)

F600 hex

Generic device

PROFILE_SPECIFIC_ TYPE

Read (2 bytes)

0005 hex

On interface modules

IM_VERSION

Read (2 bytes)

0101 hex

Provides information on the version of the identification data (0101 hex = Version 1.1)

IM_SUPPORTED

Read (2 bytes)

000E hex

Provides information on the available identification data (Index 2 to 4)

Maintenance Data 1: Index 2 (data record 232) TAG_FUNCTION

Read/write (32 bytes)

-

Enter a system-wide unique identifier for the module here.

TAG_LOCATION


-

Enter the installation location of the module here.


3-39

Configuration options 3.9 Identification data Identification data

Access

Default setting

Explanation

Maintenance Data 2: Index 3 (Data set 233) INSTALLATION_DATE


-

Enter the installation date of the module here.

RESERVED


-

Reserved

-

Enter a comment on the module here.

Maintenance Data 3: Index 4 (Data set 234) DESCRIPTOR

3-40



Configuration options 3.10 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system

3.10

3.10

Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system

Properties The ET 200S is integrated in a redundant DP system as DPV0 or DPV1 slave via the Y switching.

Requirements DPV0 • • •

DPV1

Possible with all interface modules after STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 GSD file

• •

IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE after (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0) STEP 7 V5.3 SP3

5HGXQGDQW'3V\VWHP 5HGXQGDQW352),%86'3

Install New GSD File" in HW Config. 2. In the next dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with "OK." Result: The IO device is displayed in the PROFINET IO directory in the hardware catalog. 3. Configure the ET 200S using STEP 7 (refer to STEP 7 integrated help).

6.3.1.3

Combine modules for the configuration

Introduction The IM151-3 PN has a maximum address scope of 256 byte for inputs and 256 bytes for outputs. For a better utilization of the available address space of the IO controller, you can combine multiple electronic modules/ load branches within a byte in the input or output area of the system image. This occurs though a systematic arrangement and identification of the ET 200S electronic modules/ motor starters.

Note The combination is only possible with the IM151-3 PN after 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 and STEP 7 V5.3 SP 2.

You can find a specification of the required address space for individual modules in the appendix. You can combine the following device types within a byte: • Digital input modules • Digital output modules • Motor starters (direct starters and oscillating starters) Optional other devices may be connected between combinable devices. The combination procedure is identical to PROFIBUS DP.

6-60


Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO

Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupts The combination of devices takes place during the configuration. By selecting a device label without "*", you open a byte. By selecting a device with "*", you fill the byte until all bits are occupied. For the generation of insert/remove interrupts results in the following asymmetrical behavior: %\WH[ 0RGXOH 0RGXOH 0RGXOH ZLWKRXW ZLWK ZLWK ಯ ರ ಯ ರ ಯ ರ

,IUHPRYHGWKHQRQO\WKHUHPRYHGPRGXOHZLOOIDLO DUHPRYHPRGXOHLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHG ,IUHPRYHGWKHQDOOPRGXOHVWKDWDUHFRPELQHGLQWKLVE\WH FDQQRORQJHUEHVXSSOLHGZLWKWKHUHIHUHQFHGDWD

Figure 6-22

Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupts

Further information You can find further information on combining modules for the configuration in chapter ET200S configuration on the PROFIBUS DP.

See also Grouping modules for configuration (Page 6-4)

6.3.2

Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFINET IO

Software requirements Table 6-21

Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO

Configuration software used

STEP 7 Configuration software for a different IO controller

Version Version 5.3 Service Pack 1 or higher

Notes You use HW Config and the supplied GSD file. You need the GSD file of ET 200S.


6-61


Requirements for commissioning The following additional requirements must be satisfied for commissioning the ET 200S on PROFINET IO: • IO device installed • IO device wired • SIMATIC Micro Memory Card inserted, IO device configured with device names (configured and parameterized) • Supply voltage for the IO controller is switched on (see manual for the IO controller) • IO controller is switched to RUN mode (see manual for the IO controller)

Commissioning the ET 200S To commission the IO device, proceed as follows: 1. Switch on the voltage supply for the IO device (see relevant section in this manual). 2. If necessary, switch on the supply voltage for the load.

Startup of the ET 200S

Switch on the supply voltage for the IO device

IO device sets outputs to "0" and accepts the configured device name from the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card The "ON" LED comes on "BF" LED flashes. (with connection to the switch) “BF” LED lights up (without connection to the switch)

IO device receives connect telegram and parameter data from IO controller

"BF" LED off; inputs and outputs enabled; data transfer possible.

Figure 6-23

6-62

Startup of the ET 200S on the PROFINET IO



Note The IM151-3 PN interface modules support the default startup. The following conditions then apply: • The preset parameters are used (refer to parameters for the electronic modules). • All supply voltages at the power modules must be switched on.

6.3.3

Diagnostics using LED display

Interface module LED display on the interface module IM151-3 PN (front door opened):

6)

1

%)

2

21

3

/,1.

4

5;7;

5

(76

①

Group error (red)

②

Bus fault (red)

③

Supply voltage (green) under the front door:

④

IO controller not available (green)

⑤

Data exchange (yellow)


6-63


Status and error displays by means of LEDs on IM151-3 PN interface module Table 6-22

Status and error displays of IM151-3 PN LEDs

SF

BF

Meaning

Remedy

ON

Off

Off

Off

There is no voltage at the interface module, or the interface module has a hardware defect.

Switch on the power supply voltage DC 24 V on the interface module.

*

*

On

There is voltage at the interface module.

-

*

Flashing On

Incorrect or no connect telegram - no data exchange between the IO controller and the interface module (IO device) takes place, but the device is physically linked with a switch.

• •

Causes: • Device name is incorrect • Configuration error • Parameter assignment error *

On

On

•

The IO device is not linked with a switch

• •

• • • • •

On

*

On

The designed configuration of the ET 200S does not match the actual configuration.

Check the interface module. Check the configuration and parameter assignment. Check the device name. Assign a valid device name to the interface module.

Establish a connection to the IO controller (via a switch). Assign a valid device name to the interface module. Check the bus configuration. Check that the bus connector is correctly inserted. Check whether the bus cable to the IO controller has been disconnected.

Check the configuration of the ET 200S to determine whether a module is missing or defective or whether an unconfigured module is inserted. Check the configuration (e.g., with STEP 7), and correct the parameter assignment error.

There is an error in an I/O module, or the interface module is defective.

Replace the interface module, or contact your Siemens representative.

Incoming diagnostic On

Off

On

• •

•

Off

Off

On

No SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is inserted. The inserted SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is full or does not have enough storage space for the device name. No suitable SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is inserted (i.e. no SIMATIC Micro Memory Card from Siemens).

Data exchange is taking place between the IO controller and the ET 200S.

Before switching on the power supply voltage, insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.

-

The preset configuration and actual configuration of the ET 200S match. On

On

Off

Flashing Off 0.5 Hz

6-64

Off

FW update is running FW update successfully completed


Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO LEDs SF

BF

Meaning

Remedy

ON

On

Flashing Off 0.5 Hz

External error during FW update (e.g., incorrect FW)

Use the proper FW for the update

On

Flashing Off 2 Hz

Internal error during FW update (e.g., read/write error)

Repeat FW update

LINK

RX/TX

Off

Off

There is no connection to the switch/IO controller (no IO controller is available on the network)

• •

On

*

Autonegotiation is complete and PROFINET transmission rate is accepted

-

On

On

Transmission/reception is in progress

-

No uniform transmission rate Autonegotiation not successful

* Not applicable

Power modules, electronic modules, technology modules The use of LED displays for diagnostics for power modules, electronic modules, and technology modules is the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.

6.3.4

Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules

Actions after a diagnostic message Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: • The SF LED on the interface module lights up. • Several simultaneous diagnostic messages are possible. • Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic interrupts and can be read using data records. • After a diagnostic message is signaled, the message is stored in the diagnostic buffer of the IO controller. • OB82 is called. If OB82 is not available, the IO controller goes to STOP mode. • Acknowledgement of the diagnostic interrupt (after which a new interrupt is possible).

Causes of errors and corrective actions The causes of the errors and the correction actions to be taken when specific diagnostic messages appear are described later on in this manual.


6-65


6.3.5

Evaluating interrupts of ET 200S

Introduction Interrupts are triggered by the IO device when certain errors occur. Interrupt evaluation differs according to the IO controller used.

Evaluating interrupts with IO controller The ET 200S supports the following interrupts: • Diagnostic interrupts • Process interrupts • Insert/remove module interrupts In case of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the IO controller (see information on program design in the System Software for S7-300/ S7-400 programming manual). You can obtain information on the cause of the error and the error type using the OB number and the start information. You can obtain detailed information on the error event in the error OB with SFB 54 RALRM (read supplementary interrupt information)

Triggering of a diagnostic interrupt When an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break) is registered , the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt if "Enable: Diagnostic interrupt" is set. The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB82 diagnostic block. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of OB82.

Triggering of a process interrupt When a process interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB40 process interrupt block. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of OB40.

Triggering of an insert/remove-module interrupt The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB83 diagnostic block. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of OB83.

6-66



Diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" For the modules • 2DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0), • 4DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0 and • 4DI UC24..48V HF (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) the diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" is not available at present.

Note If more than 90 process interrupts are generated per second, process interrupts can be lost.

6.3.6

Differences in the replacement value behavior

Replacement value behavior station granular with 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 If you use an interface module 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 in the IO device, the following replacement value behavior is displayed: • All output modules output their parameterized replacement values or 0 on their outputs.

Replacement value behavior slot granular starting with 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 If you use an interface module 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 in the IO device, the following replacement value behavior is displayed: • All outputs whose reference data companion are "Bad", output their parameterized replacement values or 0 on their outputs.


6-67


6.3.7

Diagnostics with STEP 7

6.3.7.1

Reading out the diagnostics

Options for reading out the diagnostics Table 6-23

Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7

Automation system with IO controller SIMATIC S7

6.3.7.2

Block or tab in STEP 7

Application

Reference

In HW Config via "Station > Open ONLINE"

Device diagnostics in form of plain text on STEP 7 interface (in the Quick View, Diagnostics View, or Module Information windows)

"Diagnosing hardware" in

SFB 52 "RDREC"

Reading data records from the IO device

For SFBs, refer to STEP 7 online help (system

SFB 54 "RALRM"

Receiving interrupts from the IO device

For SFBs, refer to STEP 7 online help (system

STEP 7 online help

functions/system function blocks)

functions/system function blocks)

Channel diagnostics

Definition The channel diagnostics provide information on channel faults of modules. Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics in IO diagnostic data records. Each data record contains 10 bytes. Diagnostics can be read for all of the following: a submodule slot, a slot, the slots in a device that are assigned to an IO controller, and a device. The determination is reached via the data record number:

6-68

800AH

Channel diagnostics for a submodule slot

800BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming)

800CH

Manufacturer-specific diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming and going)

C00AH

Channel diagnostics for a slot

C00BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming)

C00CH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming and going)

E002H

Deviation of the set configuration by the actual configuration of an IO controller assigned IO device


Commissioning and Diagnostics 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO E00AH

Channel diagnostics for the slots in a device that are assigned to an IO controller

E00BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO controller assigned channel in an IO device (coming)

E00CH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for the IO controller assigned channels in an IO device (coming and going)

F00AH

Channel diagnostics for a device

F00BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming)

F00CH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming and going)

AFF0H to AFFFH

Manufacturer, order number, creation state, version, etc.

The data record is read with the SFB 52 RDREC (read data record).

Structure of diagnostic data records You can find the diagnostic data records structure and examples for programming in the programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO. The data records that the ET 200S supports are based on the PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.0 standard. You can download the standard at http://www.profibus.com at no cost.


6-69


Channel diagnostics The channel diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-3 PN interface module:

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+

%\WHDQG 'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK

%\WHDQG 9HUVLRQ

%\WHDQG 6ORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW

%\WHDQG 6XEPRGXOHVORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

,GHQWLILFDWLRQRIWKHLQWHUUXSWVRXUFH+6XEPRGXOH

%\WH

%LWQR

5HVHUYHG (UURUW\SH %,QFRPLQJIDXOW

%\WH

%LWQR

%LWQR

%\WHDQG (UURUW\SH +ELV)))+5HVHUYHG +'LDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHIRUVXEPRGXOHLVSHQGLQJ +0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV +WR))))+5HVHUYHG

Figure 6-24

6-70

Structure of the channel diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN



%LWQR

%LWQR

%\WHDQG &KDQQHOQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW

%\WH

%LWQR

5HVHUYHG (UURUW\SH %,QFRPLQJIDXOW &KDQQHOW\SH 5HVHUYHG ,QSXWFKDQQHO 2XWSXWFKDQQHO ,QSXWRXWSXWFKDQQHO

%LWQR

%\WH &KDQQHOW\SH +IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG +%LW +'RXEOHZRUG +ELWV +GRXEOHZRUGV +ELWV +WR))+5HVHUYHG +%\WH

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

Figure 6-25

Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN

The bytes 16 to 21 repeat themselves for every further error that is reported in this diagnostic message.

Error types of the other modules The error types of the power modules, digital electronic modules, analog electronic modules, and the technology modules are the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.


6-71


6.3.7.3

Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO

Incorrect configuration states The following incorrect structure states of the ET 200S lead to a malfunction of the IO device ET 200S or prevent the entry in the data exchange: • starting with 2 missing modules • Terminating module missing • Number of modules exceeds the maximum configuration • Faulty backplane bus (for example, terminal module is defective)

Note If one module is missing (gap) and the ET 200S is powered up, the IO device will not start up.

6.3.7.4

Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus

Special diagnostics for bus interruption If the ET 200S does not start up or data exchange is terminated, the cause can be a defective terminal module. The defective terminal module causes the ET 200S backplane bus to be physically interrupted. The IM151-3 PN (slot 0) has a manufacturer-specific diagnostic consisting of 35 bytes for locating a bus interruption. The module status and the identifier-related diagnostics are mapped within this diagnostic, as is the familiar case with PROFIBUS DP. An interrupt is not generated in the event of an interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus. The information must be read out explicitly by the user. The data record with index F00BH is available for this purpose.

6-72



Composition of manufacturer-specific diagnostics Content of manufacturer-specific diagnostics:

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+


%\WHDQG 9HUVLRQ



%\WHDQG

%LWQR


%\WH

%LWQR


%\WH

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

%LWQR

(UURUW\SH +0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV

Figure 6-26

Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on PROFINET IO


6-73


%LWQR

%LWQR


%\WH

%LWQR


%LWQR

%\WH &KDQQHOW\SH +IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG +%LW +'RXEOHZRUG +ELWV +GRXEOHZRUGV +ELWV +WR))+5HVHUYHG +%\WH

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

Figure 6-27

Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on the PROFINET IO


6-74



6.3.7.5

Failure of the load voltage of the power module

Failure of the load voltage If there is a failure of the load voltage of the power module, electronic modules with their own controller (including analog and technology modules) exhibit the following behavior: • If such a module is removed during the load voltage failure, a remove-module interrupt is generated. • If such a module is inserted during the load voltage failure, the associated insert module interrupt is generated once the load voltage is restored and the module has powered up.

Restoration of the load voltage After the load voltage is restored and the electronic modules with their own controller are powered up, the IM151-3 PN interface module reassigns parameters for these modules with the saved startup parameters.

Note If parameters have been reassigned for an electronic module with its own controller by means of the user program, the reassigned data are no longer available after the load voltage is restored.

6.3.7.6

STOP of IO controller and recovery of IO device

Diagnostics after IO controller STOP If diagnostics are reported by the IO device while the IO controller is in STOP mode, the corresponding organization blocks are not started after startup of the IO controller. You must create an image of the device state in OB100.

Diagnostics after restoration of the IO device When an IO device is restored, you must use SFB 52 to read the E00CH data record. There, you will find complete diagnostics for the slots in a device that are assigned to an IO controller.


6-75


6-76


General technical specifications 7.1

7.1

7

Standards, certifications, and approvals

Introduction The general technical specifications comprise the standards and test values met by the ET 200S distributed I/O system, as well as the criteria used to test the ET 200S distributed I/O system.

CE certification

The distributed I/O system ET 200S fulfills the requirements and protection target/goals of the following EC guidelines and matches the harmonized European standards (EN) that were published for the memory-programmable controllers in the official journals of the European communities. • 73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment for Use within Fixed Voltage Ranges" (Low-Voltage Directive) • 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive) • 94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive) The EC declarations of conformity are kept available for the responsible authorities at the following address: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Automation and Drives A&D AS RD ST Type Test P.O. Box 1963 D-92209 Amberg Federal Republic of Germany


7-1

General technical specifications 7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals

UL approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with • UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

CSA approval

Canadian Standards Association in accordance with • C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) or

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to • UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) • CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Industrial Control Equipment) or

HAZ. LOC.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to • UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) • CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment) • UL 1604 (Hazardous Location) • CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)

7-2


General technical specifications 7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx The motor starters ET 200S have no cUlus for HAZ. LOC.

Note You can find the currently valid certificates and approvals on the type plate of each module.

FM approval

Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance with Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810 APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx The ET 200S motor starters are not FM-approved. All other modules of the ET 200S are FM-approved.

In accordance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; type of protection "n") II 3 G EEx nA II T4 to T5

Warning Personal injury and property damage can occur. Personal injury and property damage can occur can occur in hazardous areas if you disconnect plug-in connections while an ET 200S is in operation. In hazardous areas, always deenergize the ET 200S before disconnecting plug-in connections.


7-3

General technical specifications 7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals

Warning Warning Explosion Hazard Substitution of components may impair the suitability for Class I, Div. 2.

Warning This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D or in non-hazardous locations only.

Mark for Australia

The ET 200S distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements of AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).

IEC 61131 The distributed I/O system ET 200S fulfills the requirements and criteria of the standard IEC 61131-2 (memory programmable controllers, part 2: equipment requirements and verifications).

PROFIBUS standard The ET 200S distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.

Marine type approval Classification organizations: • ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) • BV (Bureau Veritas) • DNV (Det Norske Veritas) • GL (Germanischer Lloyd) • LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping) • Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

Use in industrial environment SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environment.

7-4


General technical specifications 7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals Table 7-1

Use in industrial environment

Area of application

Requirement for Emitted interference

Industry

EN 61000-6-4: 2001 2001

Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2 : 2001 2001

Use in residential areas If you use the ET 200S in residential areas, you must ensure limit class B in accordance with EN 55011 with respect to emission of radio interference. Suitable measures for achieving a limit class B radio interference level are: • Installation of the ET 200S in grounded control cabinets/control boxes • Use of filters in supply lines


7-5

General technical specifications 7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

7.2

7.2

Electromagnetic compatibility

Definition Electromagnetic compatibility is the capability of an electrical device to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with this environment. The ET 200S distributed I/O system meets the requirements of the European Union's EMC law, for example. This requires that the ET 200S distributed I/O system meets the specifications and directives concerning electrical installation.

Pulse-shaped interferences The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O system relative to pulse-shaped interferences. Pulse-shaped interference

Tested with

Corresponds to severity

Electrostatic discharge

8 kV

3 (air discharge)

in accordance with IEC 61000-4-2

4 kV

2 (contact discharge)

Burst pulses (rapid, transient interferences) in accordance with IEC 61000-4-4.

2 kV (supply line) 2 kV (signal line)

3 3

Surge in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5 Only with lightning protection elements (see the DP master manual and the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks description) •

Asymmetrical interconnection

2 kV (supply line) 2 kV (signal line/data line)

•

Symmetrical interconnection

1 kV (supply line)

3

1 kV (signal line/data line)

7-6


General technical specifications 7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility

Sinusoidal interferences The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O system relative to sinusoidal interferences. RF radiation in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic RF field Amplitude-modulated 80 MHz to 1000 MHz

Pulse-modulated 900 MHz ±5 MHz

0.15 MHz to 80 MHz

50% ED

80% AM (1 kHz)

200 Hz repetition rate

150 Ω source impedance

10 V/m 80% AM (1 kHz)

RF coupling in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6

10 Veff unmodulated

Emission of radio interferences Emitted interference of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit class A, Group 1 (measured at a distance of 10 m). Frequency

Emitted interference

From 30 MHz to 230 MHz

< 40 dB (µV/m)Q

From 230 MHz to 1000 MHz

< 47 dB (µV/m)Q


7-7

General technical specifications 7.3 Transport and storage conditions

7.3

7.3

Transport and storage conditions

Transport and storage conditions The ET 200S distributed I/O system surpasses the transport and storage requirements of IEC 61131-2. The following specifications apply to modules that are transported and stored in their original packaging.

7.4

7.4

Type of condition

Permitted range

Free fall

≤1 m

Temperature

From -40°C to +70 °C

Temperature change

20 K/h

Air pressure

From 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000 to 3500 m)

Relative humidity

From 5% to 95%, without condensation

Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions

Climatic environmental conditions The following climatic environmental conditions apply: Environmental conditions

Areas of application

Remarks

Temperature

From 0°C to 60°C

For horizontal installation

From 0°C to 40°C

For all other mounting positions

From 0°C to 55°C (see restrictions below)*

For vertical installation

Temperature change

10 K/h

Relative humidity

From 15% to a maximum of 95%

Without condensation

Air pressure

From 1,080 hPa to 795 hPa

Corresponds to an altitude of -1,000 m to 2,000 m

Contaminant concentration

SO2: < 0.5 ppm; rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation H2S: < 0.1 ppm; rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation

Test: 10 ppm; 4 days 1 ppm; 4 days

* Restrictions for area of application: 0 to 55°C, vertically mounted This area of application (0°C to 55°C, vertically-mounted) is permitted for the following modules only: • IM151-1 STANDARD: 6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0 • PM-E DC24V: 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 • 2DI DC24V ST: 6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0

7-8


General technical specifications 7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions • 2DI DC24V HF: 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 • 4DI DC24V ST: 6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0 • 4DI DC24V HF: 6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0 • 2DO DC24V/0,5A ST: 6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0 • 2DO DC24V/0,5A HF: 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 • 4DO DC24V/0,5A: 6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0 • 2DO DC24V/2A ST: 6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0 • 2DO DC24V/2A HF: 6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0 • 4DO DC24V/2A ST: 6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0 • 2RO NO DC24..120V/5A AC24..230V/5A: 6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0

Note None of the supply and load voltages of the ET 200S are permitted to exceed 24 VDC. This voltage limit must be ensured.

Mechanical environmental conditions The mechanical environmental conditions are shown in the following table in the form of sinusoidal vibrations. ET 200S modules

Frequency range

All modules except motor starters 10 ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz 58 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz


Constant

Intermittent

0.15 mm amplitude

0.35 mm amplitude

2 g constant acceleration

5 g constant acceleration

7-9

General technical specifications 7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions

Testing mechanical environmental conditions The following table provides information on the type and extent of tests for mechanical environmental conditions. Test for ...

Test standard

Terminal modules and electronic modules

Vibrations

Vibration test in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6

Vibration type: Frequency sweep with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.35 mm 58 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 5 g Vibration duration: 20 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3 mutually vertical axes

Shock

Repetitive shock

7-10

Shock, tested in accordance with IEC 60068-2-27 Shock, tested in accordance with IEC 60068-29

Type of shock: Half-sine Strength of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the 3 mutually vertical axes Type of shock: Half-sine Strength of shock: 25g peak value, 6 ms duration Direction of shock: 1000 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the 3 mutually vertical axes


General technical specifications 7.5 Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S

7.5

7.5

Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S

Test voltage Insulation resistance is demonstrated during the type test with the following test voltage in accordance with IEC 61131-2: Circuits with a rated voltage of Ue relative to other circuits or ground

Test voltage

1 m: The bus length of the ET 200S is > 1 m up to a maximum of 2 m. This setting will, however, increase the response time of the ET 200S.

8.2.3

Operation at Preset Actual Configuration

Description If the parameter is enabled and: • Modules are removed and inserted during operation, this does not lead to a station failure of the ET 200S. • The actual configuration differs from the expected configuration, the ET 200S remains engaged in data transfer with the DP master.

8-4


Interface modules 8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules If the parameter is disabled and: • Modules are removed and inserted during operation, this leads to a station failure of the ET 200S. • The actual configuration differs from the expected configuration, there is no data transfer between the DP master and the ET 200S. Exception: Option handling with RESERVE modules.

8.2.4

Option handling, general

Description Using this parameter you can enable or disable the option handling for the entire ET 200S.

8.2.5

Option handling: slots 2 to 63

Description Using this parameter you can enable or disable the checking of the configuration. • Slots 2 to 63 are enabled: Instead of the configured electronic module you can also insert a RESERVE module in the relevant slot without diagnostics being reported. • Slots 2 to 63 are disabled: Only the configured module can be located on the relevant slot. RESERVE modules are treated as incorrect modules. Depending on the setting of the "Operation at Preset Actual Configuration" parameter, the ET 200S will either fail or remain in data transfer.

8.2.6

Diagnostic interrupt

Description This parameter allows you to enable or disable diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts are supported • On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode. • On PROFINET IO.


8-5

Interface modules 8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules

8.2.7

Hardware interrupt

Description This parameter allows you to enable or disable hardware interrupts. Hardware interrupts are supported • On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode. • On PROFINET IO.

8.2.8

Insert/remove-module interrupt

Description This parameter allows you to enable or disable insert/remove-module interrupts. Insert/remove-module interrupts are supported • On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode. • On PROFINET IO.

8.2.9

Analog-value format

Description Here you set the number format for all analog electronic modules.

8.2.10

Interference frequency suppression

Description The frequency of your alternating voltage system can affect measured values negatively, particularly in the case of both measurements in small voltage ranges and thermocouples. Specify here the dominant line frequency in your system (50 Hz or 60 Hz). The interference frequency suppression parameter is valid for all analog electronic modules. The integration time and conversion time of the individual modules are also set by means of this parameter. See the technical specifications of the analog electronic modules.

8-6


Interface modules 8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules

8.2.11

Reference junction slot

Description This parameter allows you to assign a slot (none, 2 to 12 or 2 to 63) where the channel for measuring the reference temperature is located (calculation of the compensation value).

See also Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-8)

8.2.12

Reference junction input

Description This parameter allows you to set the channel (0/1) for measuring the reference temperature (calculation of the compensation value) for the assigned slot.


8.2.13

Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle

Description You can use this parameter to enable or disable isochronous operation. If you enable isochronous operation, the I/O of the ET 200S are synchronized with the global control frame of the master (as an equidistance cycle).

8.2.14

Time Ti (read in process values)

Description This value can only be set provided you have enabled the "Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle" parameter. Ti is the time reserved for reading in the input data at the ET 200S. At the beginning of Ti, the input data is converted at the terminals and stored in a buffer via the backplane bus of the ET 200S. Ti ends at the beginning of the next, equidistant DP cycle (i.e. with the global control frame).


8-7

Interface modules 8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules At this point, the most recent, most up-to-date input data must be available to be read in on the PROFIBUS subnet. The time Ti must take into account the processing and delay times in the modules and in the backplane bus of the ET 200S and, in the case of modular slaves, is therefore dependent on the configuration. The time Ti can only be set in the specified increments between the minimum and maximum values. Normally, the default values should be accepted.

8.2.15

Time To (output process values)

Description This value can only be set provided you have enabled the "Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle" parameter. The end of the To time is the point at which the output data is switched to the module terminals in its converted form. The time To includes the following: • Distribution of the output data via the PROFIBUS DP bus system to the slaves (= cyclic master- slave data exchange) • Distribution of the output data to the modules via the backplane bus of the slave • Conversion and transfer of the output data to the output terminals of the module To starts with the arrival of the global control frame. Like Ti, the time can be set only in the specified increments between the minimum and maximum values displayed. Normally, you should accept the default values.

8-8


Interface modules 8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)

8.3

8.3

IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0

Features The IM151-1 BASIC interface module has the following features: • It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 interface. • It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted. • It supplies the backplane bus. • The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches. • If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 BASIC interface module is also disconnected. • The maximum address space is 88 bytes for inputs and 88 bytes for outputs. • The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 BASIC to the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an ungrounded configuration. • Operation as a DPV0 slave • A maximum of 12 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 BASIC. • The maximum bus length is not relevant.

Terminal assignment The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP: Table 8-4

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module View

Signal name

Designation

1

-

-

2

-

-

3

RxD/TxD-P

Data line B

4

RTS

Request To Send

5

M5V2

Data reference potential (station)

6

P5V2

Supply plus (station)

7

-

-

8

RxD/TxD-N

Data line A

9


8-9

Interface modules 8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0) View / / 0 0

Signal name

Designation

1L+

24 VDC

2L+

24 VDC (for loop through)

1M

Chassis ground

2M

Ground (for loop through)

Block diagram

6)

%)

21

(OHFWULFDO LVRODWLRQ

352),%86'3 FRQQHFWLRQ $ $ % %

%DFNSODQHEXV

(OHFWURQLF FRPSRQHQWV (76 EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ

352),%86 DGGUHVV ,QWHUQDOSRZHU VXSSO\

Figure 8-1

8-10

3 3 3 3

Block diagram for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module


Interface modules 8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)

Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimension W x H x D (mm)

45 x 119.5 x 75

Weight

Approx. 150 g Data for specific modules

Transmission rate

9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500 kbps, 1.5, 3; 6; 12 Mbps

Bus protocol

PROFIBUS DP

Interface

RS 485

SYNC capability

Yes

FREEZE capability

Yes

Manufacturer ID

80F3H

Direct data exchange

Yes

Isochronous operation

No

Max. output current of the PROFIBUS DP interface (5, 6)

80 mA

Voltages, currents, potentials Rated supply voltage of the electronic components (1L+)

24 VDC

•

P1

Yes

•

Power failure bypass

No

Isolation •

Between the backplane bus and electronic components

No

•

Between the PROFIBUS DP and electronic components

Yes

•

Between the supply voltage and electronic components

No

Permitted potential difference (to the rail)

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with

500 VDC

Current consumption from rated supply voltage (1L+)

Approx. 70 mA

Power dissipation of the module

Typ. 1.5 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

None

Diagnostic function

Yes

• •

Group error PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring

Red "SF" LED red "BF" LED

•

Monitoring of the power supply voltage of the electronics

Green "ON" LED


8-11

Interface modules 8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)

8.4

8.4

IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0

Features The IM151-1 STANDARD interface module has the following features: • It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 interface. • It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted. • It supplies the backplane bus. • The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches. • Switching off the DC 24 V power supply voltage also switches off the interface module IM151-1 STANDARD. • The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs. • The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 STANDARD to the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an ungrounded configuration. • Operation as a DPV0 slave • A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 STANDARD. • The maximum bus length is 2 m (can be set). • Supports option handling and status byte for power modules. Additional features as compared to the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (up to 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0): • Operation as a DPV1 slave – Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write): Class 2 services and class 1 services – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts • Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP • Identification data

8-12



Terminal assignment The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP: Table 8-5

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module View

Signal name

Designation

1

-

-

2

-

-

3

RxD/TxD-P

Data line B

4

RTS

Request To Send

5

M5V2


6

P5V2


7

-

-

8

RxD/TxD-N

Data line A

9 / / 0 0

1L+

24 VDC

2L+


1M

Chassis ground

2M


Block diagram 6)

%)

21


352),%86'3 FRQQHFWLRQ $ $ % %

%DFNSODQHEXV


352),%86 DGGUHVV

,QWHUQDOSRZHU VXSSO\

Figure 8-2

3 3 3 3

Block diagram for the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module


8-13


Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimension W x H x D (mm)

45 x 119.5 x 75

Weight


Transmission rate

9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500 kbps, 1.5, 3; 6; 12 Mbps

Bus protocol

PROFIBUS DP

Interface

RS 485

SYNC capability

Yes

FREEZE capability

Yes

Manufacturer ID

806AH


Yes


No


80 mA


24 VDC

•

P1

Yes

•


Min. 20 ms

Isolation •


No

•


Yes

•


No


75 VDC, 60 VAC


500 VDC


Approx. 200 mA



8-14

Interrupts

yes

Diagnostic function

yes

• •


Red "SF" LED

•


Green "ON" LED

Red "BF" LED



Updating the firmware of the IM151-1 STANDARD With STEP 7 V5.1, Service Pack 3 and higher, you can update the firmware of the IM151-1 STANDARD (via accessible nodes). To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: • The IM151-1 STANDARD in the station whose firmware is to be updated must be accessible online. • The files with the current firmware version must be available in the file system of your programming device (PG)/PC. You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Note We recommend that you perform the firmware update via PROFIBUS DP.


8-15

Interface modules 8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)

8.5

8.5

IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0

Features The IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module has the following features: • It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the fiber-optic cable interface • It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted. • It supplies the backplane bus. • The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches. • If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module is also disconnected. • The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs. • The reference potential M of the supply voltage of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD to the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an ungrounded configuration. • Operation as a DPV0 slave • A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 FO STANDARD. • The maximum bus length is 2 m (can be set). • Supports option handling and status byte for power modules. Additional characteristics compared to the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD (up to 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0): • Operation as a DPV1 – Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write): Class 2 services and class 1 services – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – insert/remove interrupts • Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP • Identification data

8-16



Terminal assignment In the following table you will find the terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD for the DC 24V power supply and PROFIBUS DP with fiber optic interface: Table 8-6

Terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD View

5HFHLYLQJVWDWLRQV

Signal name

Designation

5HFHLYLQJVWDWLRQV

)LEHURSWLFLQWHUIDFH

7UDQVPLWWHU

7UDQVPLWWHU

/ / 0 0

1L+

24 VDC

2L+


1M

Chassis ground

2M


Block diagram 352),%86'3 FRQQHFWLRQILEHURSWLFV 6)

%)

21

%DFNSODQHEXV


352),%86 DGGUHVV ,QWHUQDOSRZHU VXSSO\

Figure 8-3

$ % $ %

)LEHU RSWLF LQWHUIDFH

3 3 3 3

Block diagram for the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module


8-17


Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)

45 × 119.5 × 75

Weight


Transmission rate

9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps, 1.5; 12 mbps

Bus protocol

PROFIBUS DP

Interface

Fiber-optic cable

SYNC capability

Yes

FREEZE capability

Yes

Manufacturer ID

806BH


Yes


No Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage of the electronic components (1L+)1

24 VDC

•

P1

Yes

•


Min. 20 ms

Isolation •


No

•


No

Current consumption from rated supply voltage (1L+) •

Power supply for the ET 200S backplane bus


Approx. 200 mA Max. 700 mA Typ. 3.3 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics

8-18

Interrupts

yes

Diagnostic function

yes

• •


Red "SF" LED red "BF" LED

•


Green "ON" LED



Updating the firmware of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD With STEP 7 V5.1, Service Pack 3 and higher, you can update the firmware of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD (via accessible nodes). To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: • The IM151-1 FO STANDARD in the station whose firmware is to be updated must be accessible online. • The files with the current firmware version must be available in the file system of your programming device (PG)/PC. You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Note We recommend that you perform the firmware update via PROFIBUS DP.


8-19

Interface modules 8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)

8.6

8.6

Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0

Features The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module has the following features: • Links the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP. • prepares the data for the populated electronic modules and motor starters. • Supplies the backplane bus. • synchronizable with the DP cycle (cycle synchronization). • Via switch, the PROFIBUS DP address is adjustable from ET 200S. • If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module is also disconnected. • The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs. • The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE to the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting a floating configuration. • Operation as a DPV0 slave – Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write): Class 2 services • Operation as a DPV1 slave – Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write): Class 2 services and class 1 services – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts • A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE. 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 and higher: • The maximum bus length on the backplane bus amounts to 2 m. • Operation as DPV1-slave on the Y switching • Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication via PROFIBUS DP. You saw the description of this function in the manual S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and Programming. • Use of fault-secure RESERVE modules • Supports option handling and status byte for power modules • Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP with HW config possible. • Identification Data

8-20



Restrictions when operating the modules with the IM 151 HIGH FEATURE The following modules cannot be used with the IM 151 HIGH FEATURE: Module

Up to order number

Up to product version

1Count 24V/100kHz

6ES7138-4DA02-0AB0

1

1Count 5V/500kHz

6ES7138-4DE00-0AB0

1

1SSI

6ES7138-4DB00-0AB0

3

1STEP 5V/204kHz

6ES7138-4DC00-0AB0

3

1SI serial interface module

6ES7138-4DF00-0AB0

1

Modbus/USS serial interface module

6ES7138-4DF10-0AB0

1

2AI U; HIGH FEATURE

6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0

1

2AI I 2/4DMU; HIGH FEATURE

6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0

1

2AO U; HIGH FEATURE

6ES7135-4LB00-0AB0

1

Terminal assignment The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP: Table 8-7

Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module View

Signal name

Designation

1 -

-

2 -

-

3 RxD/TxD-P

Data line B

4 RTS

Request To Send

5 M5V2


6 P5V2


7 -

-

8 RxD/TxD-N

Data line A

9 / / 0 0

1L+

24 VDC

2L+


1M

Chassis ground

2M



8-21


Block diagram

6)

%)

21


352),%86'3 FRQQHFWLRQ $ $ % %

%DFNSODQHEXV


352),%86 DGGUHVV 3 3 3 3

,QWHUQDOSRZHU VXSSO\

Figure 8-4

Block diagram for the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module


45 × 119.5 × 75

Weight


Transmission rate

9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps, 1.5; 3; 6; 12 Mbps

Bus protocol

PROFIBUS DP

Interface

RS 485

SYNC capability

Yes

FREEZE capability

Yes

Manufacturer ID

80E0H


Yes


Yes1


80 mA


24 VDC

•

P1

Yes

•


Min. 20 ms

Isolation

8-22

•


No

•


Yes

•


No


Interface modules 8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0) Permitted potential difference (to the rail)

75 VDC, 60 VAC


500 VDC


Approx. 200 mA



Interrupts

Yes

Diagnostic function

Yes

• •


Red "SF" LED

•


Green "ON" LED

1

Red "BF" LED

As of 1.5 Mbps

Update of firmware for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE As of STEP 7 V5.1, ServicePack 3, you can update the firmware of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE. To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled: • The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the station whose firmware is to be updated is accessible online. • The files with the current firmware version are available in the file system of your programming device (PG)/PC. You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Note Be sure to use the correct firmware version for the interface module you are using for the update. An interface module with an older issue date can not be updated with the firmware version for an interface module with a newer issue date and vice versa.

Note We recommend you update the firmware using PROFIBUS DP.


8-23

Interface modules 8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

8.7

8.7.1

8.7

Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

Features of the IM151-3 PN interface module

Order number 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0

Features The IM151-3 PN interface module has the following features: • It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS IO • It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted. • It supplies the backplane bus. • Adoption of the device name and backup on SIMATIC Micro Memory Card • Firmware update via SIMATIC Micro Memory Card • The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-3 PN to the mounting rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting an ungrounded configuration. • Supported Ethernet services – Network diagnostics (SNMP) • Interrupts – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts • The maximum address scope amounts to 256 byte I/O data. • A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-3 PN. • The maximum bus length on the backplane bus is 2 m. • Summary of modules within a byte (packing). • Data sets for I/O devices

8-24



Compatibility of the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) Note Firmware version of the controller used In order for you to be able to operate the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) on a controller, this must be operated with one of the firmware versions listed in the tables below. You can utilize the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0) independently of the controller firmware version.

The following firmware versions are compatible to the interface module IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0): CPU Controller

CP

SOFTNET PNIO

315-2 PN/DP 317-2 PN/DP

443-1

343-1

SIMATIC NET-CD

≥ V2.3.2

≥ V2.2

≥2.0

V 6.3 Hotfix 1

Firmware version

Restrictions when operating the modules with the IM 151 PN The following modules cannot be used with the IM 151-3 PN: Module

Up to order number

Up to product version

2AO U; HIGH FEATURE

6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0

3

2AO I; HIGH FEATURE

6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0

3

1SI serial interface module

6ES7138-4DF00-0AB0

4

Modbus/USS serial interface module

6ES7138-4DF10-0AB0

4


8-25


Terminal assignment The following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFINET IO: Table 8-8

Terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module View 6KLHOG

/ / 0 0

Signal name

Designation

1 TD

Transmit Data +

2 TD_N

Transmit Data –

3 RD

Receive Data +

4 GND

Ground

5 GND

Ground

6 RD_N

Receive Data –

7 GND

Ground

8 GND

Ground

1L+

24 VDC

2L+


1M

Chassis ground

2M


Block diagram ,VRODWLRQ /,1.

5;7;

6)

%)

21

%DFNSODQHEXV

(OHFWURQLFFRPSRQHQWV

8-26

5-

P& 6,0$7,&0LFUR 0HPRU\&DUG

,QWHUQDO SRZHUVXSSO\

Figure 8-5

352),1(7 FRQQHFWLRQ

3 3 3 3

Block diagram for the IM151-3 PN interface module




45 x 119.5 x 75

Weight


Transmission rate

100 Mbps full duplex

Transmission method

100BASE-TX

Autonegotiation

Yes

Bus protocol

PROFINET IO + TCP/IP

Supported Ethernet services

PROFINET IO (device), TCP/IP Protocol Suite: • ping • arp • Network diagnostics (SNMP) / MIB-2

PROFINET interface

RJ45

Vendor ID

002AH

Device ID

0301H Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage of the electronic components (1L+)

24 VDC

•

P1

Yes

•


Min. 20 ms

Isolation •


No

•

Between Ethernet and electronic components

Yes

•


No


75 VDC, 60 VAC


500 VDC


Approx. 200 mA


Approx. 2 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts

Yes

Diagnostic function

Yes

• •

Group error PROFINET IO bus monitoring

Red "SF" LED

•


Green "ON" LED

•

Existing connection to network

Green "LINK" LED

•

Send/receive via network

Yellow "RX/TX" LED


Red "BF" LED

8-27


8.7.2

SNMP The IM151-3 PN supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported R/W objects are changeable using SNMP tools and are stored in the device. Remanent stored SNMP parameters are reset to default settings (STEP 7 V5.3 SP 3 and higher) in HW config dialog "Target system > Ethernet > Edit Ethernet nodes" "Reset" button under "Reset to default settings". After exchange with a factory-new device, the R/W objects in the IM151-3 PN are set to default settings.

8.7.3

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for IM151-3 PN

Insertion of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card A SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is used as storage medium for the IM151-3 PN. The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be used as a portable data medium.. The following data are saved on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. • Technology data (device names) • Data for a firmware update

Note On one SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, you can save either technology data or update data.

Life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card The life of an SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends substantially on the following factors: • Number of deletion or programming operations • External factors, such as ambient temperature At an ambient temperature up to 60 ° C, a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has a useful life of 10 years at maximum 100,000 write/delete operations.

Caution Possible data loss If the maximum number of write/delete operations is exceeded, data loss is possible.

8-28



Applicable SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards The following memory modules are available for use: Table 8-9

Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards Type

Order numbers

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k

6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0


6ES7953-8LG11-0AA0


6ES7953-8LJ11-0AA0

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 2M

6ES7953-8LL11-0AA0


6ES7953-8LM11-0AA0


6ES7953-8LP11-0AA0

For storage of the device name, a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k sufficient. For a firmware update the SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards with 2 MB or higher are required.

Inserting/replacing the card The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card designed so that it can also be removed and inserted under power. The beveled corner of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card prevents it from being inserted the wrong way around (reverse polarity protection). The module slot on the IM 151-3 PN is located behind the front door. The front door has a protruding edge for opening. The socket of the module slot has an ejector enabling you to remove the card. To eject the card, push in the ejector with a small screwdriver or ball-point pen. Position of the module slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card on the IM151-3 PN:

1

2 3

(6/[$$ 6,(0(16

6,0$7,&

0LFUR 0HPRU\ &DUG

(76

①

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

②

Module slot

③

Ejector


8-29


8.7.4

Updating the firmware of the IM151-3 PN

Introduction • Starting with STEP 7 V5.3, Service Pack 1, you can update the firmware of the IM151-3 PN. • You receive three files (*.upd) with the current firmware for the update of the firmware. For performing the update use the file "header.upd".

Procedure You perform the firmware update using a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with FW update. 1. Transfer the update files using STEP 7 and your programming device to an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (≥ 2 MB). 2. Switch off the power to the IM151-3 PN and insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with FW update. 3. Switch on the power. IM151-3 PN recognizes the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the FW update automatically and starts the FW update. During the FW update, the SF and BF LEDs are illuminated, and the ON LED is off. Once the FW update is complete, the BF LED flashes at 0.5 Hz. 4. Switch off the power to the IM151-3 PN and remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with FW update. 5. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the device names and switch on the power supply again. The IM 151-3 PN powers up with the new firmware and is now ready for operation.

8-30


9

Terminal modules 9.1

9.1

Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules

Assignment of the terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules The following table describes which electronic modules you can use with the different power modules: Table 9-1

Assignment of TM-P terminal modules and power modules

Power modules


Screw terminal

15S23-A1

15S23-A0

15S22-01

30S44-A0

F30S47-F1

Order number 6ES7193...

4CC20-0AA0

4CD20-0AA0

4CE00-0AA0

4CK20-0AA0

3RK1 903-3AA00

Spring terminal

15C23-A1

15C23-A0

15C22-01

30C44-A0

---


4CC30-0AA0

4CD30-0AA0

4CE10-0AA0

4CK30-0AA0 ---

Fast Connect

15N23-A1

15N23-A0

15N22-01


4CC70-0AA0

4CD70-0AA0

4CE60-0AA0

PM-E 24 VDC

●

●

●

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC

●

●

●

PM-E 24-48 VDC/ 120-230 VAC

●

●

●

PM-E F pm 24 VDC PROFIsafe*

●

PM-E F pp 24 VDC PROFIsafe*

●

PM-D F 24 VDC PROFISafe *

●


The following table describes which electronic modules you can use with the different terminal modules:


9-1

Terminal modules 9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules Table 9-2

Assignment of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules

Electronic modules Screw terminal Order number 6ES7193...

TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules 15S26-A1 4CA400AA0

15S24-A1 4CA200AA0

15S24-01 4CB200AA0

15S23-01 4CB000AA0

15S24-AT 4CL200AA0

30S44-01 4CG200AA0

30S46-A1 4CF400AA0

Spring terminal

15C26-A1

15C24-A1

15C24-01

15C23-01

15C24-AT

30C44-01

30C46-A1


4CA500AA0

4CA300AA0

4CB300AA0

4CB100AA0

4CL300AA0

4CG300AA0

4CF500AA0

Fast Connect

15N26-A1

15N24-A1

15N24-01

15N23-01

---

---

---


4CA800AA0

4CA700AA0

4CB700AA0

4CB600AA0

●

●

●

●

4DI UC24..48V HF

●

●

●

●

4DI NAMUR

●

●

●

●


●

●

●

●


●

●

●

●


●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A

●

●

●

●


●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2DI 24 VDC Standard 2DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC Standard 4DI 24 VDC High Feature 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

2RO NO/NC 24 to 48 VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A 2AI U Standard 2AI U High Feature 2AI U High Speed 2AI I 2WIRE Standard 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed

9-2


Terminal modules 9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules Electronic modules Screw terminal Order number 6ES7193...

TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules 15S26-A1 4CA400AA0

15S24-A1 4CA200AA0

15S24-01 4CB200AA0

15S23-01 4CB000AA0

15S24-AT 4CL200AA0

30S44-01 4CG200AA0

30S46-A1 4CF400AA0

Spring terminal

15C26-A1

15C24-A1

15C24-01

15C23-01

15C24-AT

30C44-01

30C46-A1


4CA500AA0

4CA300AA0

4CB300AA0

4CB100AA0

4CL300AA0

4CG300AA0

4CF500AA0

Fast Connect

15N26-A1

15N24-A1

15N24-01

15N23-01

---

---

---


4CA800AA0

4CA700AA0

4CB700AA0

4CB600AA0


●

●

2AI 2/4WIRE High Feature

●

●

2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

●

●

2AI RTD Standard

●


●

●

●

●

2AI TC Standard

●

●

●

●

●

2AI TC High Feature 2AO U Standard

● ●

●

2AO U High Feature 2AO I Standard

●

●

●

●

2AO I High Feature 4 IQ-SENSE

●

●

1COUNT 24V/100kHz

●

●

1SSI

●

●

1STEP 5V/204kHz

●

●

2PULSE

●

●

1COUNT 5V/500kHz

●

1POS INC/Digital

●

1POS SSI/Digital

●

1POS INC/Analog

●

1POS SSI/Analog

●

1SI 3964/ASCII

●

●

1SI Modbus/USS

●

●

4/8 F-DI 24 VDC PROFIsafe*

●

●

4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 A PROFIsafe*

●

●

●

●


●

●

●


●

●



9-3

Terminal modules 9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)

9.2

9.2

TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CC30-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features • Terminal module for power module • Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S23-A1 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C23-A1 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N23-A1 • 2 x 3 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules: Table 9-3

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules View

Terminal 2 L+/L

AUX1 A A 4 8

L+/L 2

6

3

7

M/N AUX1 A 4

9-4

L+/L

Designation

3 M/ N

Rated load voltage for inserted power module and associated potential group

A AUX1 4

Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module

6 L+/L 7 M/ N


A AUX1 8


M/N

A AUX1 8


Terminal modules 9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)

Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules 1 2 PM-E

2

6

3 A 4

7 A 8

3 4 5

①

Backplane bus

②

Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules

③

Terminals with connection to the power module

④

Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind

⑤

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) • Screw-type/spring terminals • Fast Connect Weight

15 × 132 × 43 15 × 162 × 43 Approx. 65 g Data for specific modules

Number of terminals


2x3

9-5

Terminal modules 9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)

9.3

9.3

TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CD30-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CD70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features • Terminal module for power module • Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S23-A0 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C23-A0 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N23-A0 • 2 x 3 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Interrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8 This table shows the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules. Table 9-4

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules View

Terminal

AUX1 A A 4 8

L+/L 2

6

M/N 3 AUX1 A 4

9-6

7

L+/L M/N

2

L+/L

3

M/ N

Designation Rated load voltage for inserted power module and associated potential group

A AUX1 4


6

L+/L

7

M/ N


A AUX1 8


A AUX1 8


Terminal modules 9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)

Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules

1 2

PM-E

2

6

3 A 4

7 A 8

3 4 5

①

Backplane bus

②


③


④


⑤

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8


15 × 132 × 43 15 × 162 × 43 Approx. 65 g Data for specific modules

Number of terminals


2x3

9-7

Terminal modules 9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)

9.4

9.4

TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CE10-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CE60-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features • Terminal module for power module • Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S22-01 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C22-01 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N22-01 • 2 x 2 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules: Table 9-5

Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules View

Signal name 2 L+/L 3 M/ N 6 L+/L 7 M/ N

Designation Rated load voltage for inserted power module and associated potential group Rated load voltage for inserted power module and associated potential group

AUX1 L+/L

L+/L 2

6

3

7

M/N

9-8

M/N


Terminal modules 9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)

Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules 1 2 PM-E

2 3

6

3

7

4

①

Backplane bus

②


③


④

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) • Screw-type/spring terminals • Fast Connect

15 x 119.5 x 43

Weight

Approx. 55 g

15 x 142 x 43 Data for specific modules

Number of terminals


2x2

9-9

Terminal modules 9.5 TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)

9.5

9.5

TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CK30-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features • Terminal module for the fail-safe PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module • Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module • Wiring of the fail-safe digital outputs of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe • Prewiring possible • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Interrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

9-10



Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module: Table 9-6

Terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module View

Terminal 2

9

1 3

2

1 60

1 4

3 A 4

1 71 A1 82

1 5 1 6

A A 4 8

24 VDC

Designation Load voltage of 24 VDC for: inserted power module, associated potential group. DO 0 and DO 1 and P1 and P2 voltage buses

3

M

Chassis ground

A 4

AUX 1


6

24 VDC

Load voltage of 24 VDC for: inserted power module, associated potential group. DO 0 and DO 1 and P1 and P2 voltage buses

7

M

Chassis ground

A 8

AUX 1


9

DO 0 P

10

DO 0 M

Connections for fail-safe digital output 0 (switching to P/M potential)

11

DO 2 P

12

DO 2 M

Connections (relay contacts) for fail-safe switching of the voltage buses P1 and P2. P1 and P2 can also be used as DO 2 M and DO 2 P (for a diagram of the wiring, see the

ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual). 13

DO 1 P

14

DO 1 M

15

DO 2 P

16

DO 2M

Connections for fail-safe digital output 0 (switching to P/M potential) Connections (relay contacts) for fail-safe switching of the voltage buses P1 and P2. P1 and P2 can also be used as DO 2 M and DO 2 P (for a diagram of the wiring, see the

ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual).

Caution If high currents occur at DO 2 P and DO 2 M, you must wire terminals 11 and 15 (DO 2 P) and 12 and 16 (DO 2 M) in parallel. Otherwise, the temperature of the terminals cannot be prevented from rising due to the current load.


9-11


Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module

1 2

(OHFWULFDO 0RGXOH (0

$

$

3

4 5

①

Backplane bus

②

Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

③

Terminals with connection to the electronic module

④


⑤

Infeed of the AUX1 bus by means of terminals A4 and A8


30 x 132 x 43

Weight

Approx. 116 g (TM-P30S44-A0) Approx. 100 g (TM-P30C44-A0) Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

14

Description of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module You can find a description of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module you can use with the above terminal modules in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual.

9-12


Terminal modules 9.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)

9.6

9.6

TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)

Order number 3RK1 903-3AA00 (screw-type terminal)

Features • Terminal module for the fail-safe PM-D F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module • Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Pin assignment The following table shows the terminal assignment of the terminal module TM-PF30S47-F1: Table 9-7

Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module View

Terminal

2 0

2 7

2 1

2 8

Designation

20

24 VDC

Rated load voltage 24 VDC: for inserted power module and voltage buses SG 1 to SG 6 and U 1

21

M

Chassis ground

27

24 VDC

Rated load voltage 24 VDC: for inserted power module and voltage buses SG 1 to SG 6 and U 1

28

M

Chassis ground


9-13

Terminal modules 9.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)

Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module

1 2 (OHFWULFDO 0RGXOH (0

3

4

①

Backplane bus

②


③


④



30 × 196,5 × 102

Weight


Number of terminals

9-14

4


Terminal modules 9.7 TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

9.7

9.7

TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features • Universal terminal module for the electronic modules • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S26-A1 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C26-A1 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N26-A1 • 2 x 6 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7


9-15


Pin assignment • Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules: Table 9-8

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules View

1

5

2

6

3

7

4 A 4 A 3

8 A 8 A 7

Terminal

Designation

1

DI0/DO0

DI: Digital input

2

DI2/DO2

DO: Digital output

3

24 VDC for DI0/ M for DO0

4


24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

5

DI1/DO1

6

DI3/DO3

7


8


A 4

AUX1 bus implemented. Connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7.

M: Ground load power supply

A 3 A 8 A 7

• Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal modules with the 2-channel electronic modules and technology modules: The terminal assignment of terminals 1 to 8 corresponds to that of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules. You will find the various terminal assignments in the technical specifications of the different electronic modules. You can obtain the terminal assignment of terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7 from the above table.

9-16



Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal modules

1

(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH (0

2

3

$ $ $ $

4

①

Backplane bus

②


③


④

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7

Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) • Screw-type/spring terminals • Fast Connect

15 × 157 × 43

Weight

Approx. 70 g (TM-E15C26-A1)

15 × 202 × 43 Approx. 83 g (TM-E15S26-A1) Approx. 95 g (TM-E15NS26-A1) Data for specific modules

Number of terminals


2x6

9-17

Terminal modules 9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

9.8

9.8

TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CA30-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features • Terminal module for electronic modules • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-A1 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-A1 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N24-A1 • 2 x 4 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules: Table 9-9

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules View

Terminal 1 2

Designation

The assignment depends on which electronic module is inserted

3

9-18

A 4

AUX1


1

5

5

2

6

6

3

7

A 4

A 8


7 A 8

AUX1



Terminal modules 9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules

1

(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH (0

2

$

$

3 4 5

①

Backplane bus

②


③


④

Use of terminals 4 and 8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind

⑤

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals 4 and 8


15 × 132 × 43 15 × 162 × 43 Approx. 65 g (TM-E15S24-A1 and TM-E15C24-A1) Approx. 72 g(TM-E15N24-A1) Data for specific modules

Number of terminals


2x4

9-19

Terminal modules 9.9 TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

9.9

9.9

TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CB70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features • Terminal module for electronic modules • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-01 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-01 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N24-01 • 2 x 4 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8

Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules: Table 9-10

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules View

Terminal

Designation

1 The assignment depends on which electronic module is inserted 2 No access to the AUX1 bus. 3 Terminals not used by the electronic module can be used for 4 unneeded connecting wires. The permitted potential 5 corresponds to the potential of the electronic module used.

9-20

1

5

2

6

3

7

4

8

6 7 8



Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules

1

(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH (0

2

3

4

①

Backplane bus

②


③


④

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8


15 × 132 × 43 15 × 162 × 43 Approx. 65 g (TM-E15S24-01 and TM-E15C24-01) Approx. 72 g (TM-E15N24-01) Data for specific modules

Number of terminals


2x4

9-21


9.10

9.10

TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CB00-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CB10-0AA0 (spring terminal) 6ES7193-4CB60-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features • Terminal module for electronic modules • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S23-01 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C23-01 • Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N23-01 • 2 x 3 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules: Table 9-11

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules View

Terminal

Designation

1


2

No access to the AUX1 bus.

3 5 6

9-22

1

5

2

6

3

7

7



Block diagram Block diagram for the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules 1 (OHFWULFDO0RGXOH (0

2

3

4

①

Backplane bus

②


③


④



15 × 120 × 43 15 × 142 × 43 Approx. 55 g (TM-E15S23-01 and TM-E15C23-01) Approx. 60 g (TM-E15N23-01) Data for specific modules

Number of terminals


2x3

9-23

Terminal modules 9.11 TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)

9.11

9.11

TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CL20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CL30-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features • Terminal module for the 2AI TC High Feature electronic module

Caution You can only insert the 2AI TC HF electronic module into the TM-E15S24-AT/TM-E15C24-AT terminal module. Inserting another electronic module can result in the destruction of the internal reference junction of the terminal module.

• Terminal module has an internal reference junction for temperature compensation. Temperature compensation is thus possible directly at the reference junction of the thermocouples. • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-AT • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-AT • 2 x 2 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8

9-24



Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of terminal module TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT: Table 9-12

Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal module View

Terminal

Designation

1 Assignment: See electronic module 2AI TC HF 2 3 Not available 4 5 Assignment: See electronic module 2AI TC HF 1

5

2

6

6 7 Not available 8

Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-P15C24-AT terminal module

1

(OHFWULFDO0RGXOH (0

2

3

4

①

Backplane bus

②


③


④



9-25


Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) Weight

15 × 132 × 43 Approx. 55 g Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

2x2

See also 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) (Page 12-91)

9-26


Terminal modules 9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)

9.12

9.12

TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CG30-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features • Terminal module for electronic modules with a width of 30 mm and fail-safe electronic modules • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E30S44-01 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E30C44-01 • 4 x 4 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to terminals 4 and 8 or 12 and 16.

Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules: Table 9-13

Terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module View

Terminal 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

59 1 60 1 71 1 82

1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6

5

Designation

The assignment depends on which electronic module is inserted No access to the AUX1 bus. Terminals not used by the electronic module can be used for unneeded connecting wires. The permitted potential corresponds to the potential of the electronic module used.

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16


9-27

Terminal modules 9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)

Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module

1 2


3

4

①

Backplane bus

②


③


④

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to terminals 4 and 8 or 12 and 16


30 × 132 × 43

Weight

Approx. 110 g (TM-E30C44-01) Approx. 125 g (TM-E30S44-01) Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

9-28

4x4


Terminal modules 9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)

9.13

9.13

TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)

Order numbers 6ES7193-4CF40-0AA0 (screw terminal) 6ES7193-4CF50-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features • Terminal module for the fail-safe electronic modules 4/8 F-DI 24 VDC PRFOFIsafe and 4 F-DO 24 VDC/2A PROFIsafe. • Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E30S46-A1 • Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E30C46-A1 • 6 x 4 terminals • Prewiring of the terminal module • Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact • Fitting of a shield contact element • Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with a connection to terminals A4, A8, A3, A7 and A12, A16, A11, A15.


9-29


Pin assignment The following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules: Table 9-14

Terminal assignment of the terminal module View

1 2 3 4 A 4 A 3

9-30

59 1 60 1 71 1 82 AA 1 82 AA 1 71

Terminal

1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 A 1 6 A 1 5

F-DI

F-DO

Designation

1

DI 0

DO 0 P

DI: Digital input

2

Vs1

DO 0 M

3

DI 2

-

4

Vs1

-

DO P and DO M: Connection for fail-safe digital output (switching to P/M potential)

5

DI 1

DO 1 P

6

Vs1

DO 1 M

7

DI 3

-

8

Vs1

-

9

DI 4

DO 2 P

10

Vs2

DO 2 M

11

DI 6

-

12

Vs2

-

13

DI 5

DO 3 P

14

Vs2

DO 3 M

15

DI 7

-

16

Vs 2

-

A4, A3, A8, A7

AUX1


A12, A11, A16, A15

AUX1


Vs1: Internal sensor supply 1 for DI 0 to DI 3 Vs2: Internal sensor supply 2 for DI 4 to DI 7



Block diagram Block diagram of the TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal module

1 2


$$ $$

$ $

$

$

3

4 5

①

Backplane bus

②


③


④

Connection of terminals A4, A8, A3, A7 and A12, A16, A11, A15 as productive conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind

⑤

Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with a connection to terminals A4, A3, A8, A7 and A12, A11, A16, A15


30 x 157 x 43

Weight

Approx. 158 g (TM-E30S46-A1) Approx. 131 g (TM-E30C46-A1) Data for specific modules

Number of terminals

6x4

Description of the electronic modules You can find a description of the 4/8 F-DI 24VDC PROFIsafe and 4 F-DO 24 VDC/2A PROFIsafe electronic modules you can use with the above terminal modules in the ET 200S Distributed I/O Module, Fail-Safe Modules manual.


9-31


9-32


10

Power modules 10.1

10.1

Parameters for power modules

Parameters The following table contains the parameters of the power modules. Table 10-1

Parameters for power modules Value range

Power module

Default setting

Applicability

PM-E24 VDC

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC

Diagnostics: No load voltage



Disable/enable

Disable

Power module

---

---

Diagnostics: Fuse blown

Disable/enable

Disable

Power module

---

---

Voltage type

DC/AC

DC

Power module

The parameters are explained below.

Diagnostics: No load voltage You use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message about missing load voltage. In the absence of load voltage, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module is forwarded to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all the modules in the affected potential group come on.

Diagnostics: Fuse blown You use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message about a blown fuse. In the event of a blown fuse, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module is forwarded to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all the modules in the affected potential group come on.

Voltage type You use this parameter to select the load voltage connected to the power module: DC voltage or AC voltage. The correct diagnosis is thus provided in the event of missing load voltage or a blown fuse.


10-1

Power modules 10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

10.2

10.2

PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

Order number 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0

Features • The PM-E 24 VDC power module monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic modules in the potential group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal module. • You can use any electronic module in the potential group of the PM-E 24 VDC power module except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC Standard and 2DO 24-230 VAC/1 A.

Caution Only connect the specified rated load voltage of 24 VDC to the TM-P terminal module of the power module. The connected rated load voltage must correspond to the supply voltage of the electronic modules in the potential group.

• The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnostic has been enabled.

Pin assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module for the different terminal modules: Table 10-2

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module View

Pin assignment

Remarks 24 VDC: Rated load voltage

7036$DQG30(9'&

M: Chassis ground AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.

$8; $ $

9'&

9'&

0

0

$8;

$

$

$8;

9'&

10-2


Power modules 10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0) View

Pin assignment

Remarks 24 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground

7036$DQG30(9'&

AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage. AUX1 is used as PE.

$8; $

9'&

$

9'&

0

$

$

$8;

9'& 0 $8;

7036DQG30(9'&

24 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground

$8;

9'&

9'&

0

0

9'&

Block diagram

3:5

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76 EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ

/RDG YROWDJH PRQLWRULQJ

9'& 3 3

0

Figure 10-1

Block diagram of the PM-E 24 VDC power module

Technical specifications


10-3

Power modules 10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)

15 × 81 × 52

Weight

Approx. 35 g Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage •

24 VDC

Overvoltage protection

No

Protection with automatic circuit breakers

Yes, type C tripping characteristics

Max. current-carrying capacity (up to 60° C)

10 A

•

Short-circuit protection

No

Isolation •

Between rated load voltage and backplane bus

Yes

•

Between the power modules

Yes


500 VDC

Current consumption •

From the load voltage L+ (no load)


Max. 4 mA Typ. 100 mW

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic function

10-4

Yes

• •

Group error Load voltage monitoring

Red "SF" LED

•

Diagnostic information readable

Yes

Green "PWR" LED


Power modules 10.3 PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)

10.3

10.3

PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)

Order number 6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0

Features • The PM-E 24-48 VDC power module monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic modules in the voltage group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal module. • You can use all the electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VAC Standard, and 2DO 24-230 VAC/1 A in the voltage group of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module. • Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) in the process image for option handling. • The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnosis has been enabled. • The PM-E 24-48 VDC power module is suitable for fail-safe modules.

Caution Only connect the specified rated load voltage of 24-48 VDC to the TM-P terminal module of the power module. The connected rated load voltage must correspond to the supply voltage of the electronic modules in the voltage group.


10-5


Pin assignment The following table shows you the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module for the different terminal modules: Table 10-3

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module View

Pin assignment 7036$DQG30(9'&

Remarks 24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.

$8; $

9'&

$

9'&

0

$

$

$8;

9'& 0 $8;

24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage 7036$DQG30(9'&

M: Chassis ground $8; $ $

9'&

9'&

0

0

$8;

$

$

$8;

9'&

7036DQG30(9'&


24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground

$8;

9'&

9'&

0

0

9'&

10-6



Block diagram

3:5

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76 EDFNSODQH EXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ


9'& 3 3

0

Figure 10-2

Block diagram of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module


15 × 81 × 52

Weight

Approx. 35 g Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage •

P1

•


VDC Yes No

Protection with automatic circuit breakers

Yes, tripping characteristic B, C

Max. current-carrying capacity (up to 60° C)

10 A

•


No

Isolation •

Between rated load voltage and backplane bus

•

Between the power modules

Yes Yes


500 VDC




Max. 12 mA Typ. 500 mW


Yes

• •


Red "SF" LED

•


Yes

Green "PWR" LED

See also Address space of the inputs and outputs (Page C-1)


10-7

Power modules 10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)

10.4

PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)

10.4

Order number 6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0

Features The PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC has the following characteristic features: • Monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic modules in the voltage group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal module. • Can be used universally and can be assigned parameters for DC and AC load voltage for use with any electronic module. • Is required at least once for the ET 200S (to the right of the interface module). • Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) in the process image for option handling (see Appendix). • The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnostic has been enabled (see Appendix). • Is additionally equipped with a replaceable fuse (5 mm x 20 mm).

1 2 Figure 10-3

10-8

Replacing the fuse

(1)

3-mm screwdriver

(2)

Fuse



Note The PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) is not a direct replacement for the device with the order number 6ES7138-4CB00-0AB0 for AC applications because you have to select either AC or DC supply voltage. In the case of DC applications, the new module is a direct replacement because the default setting of the new parameter is "DC". If you want to replace the device 6ES7138-4CB00-0AB0 in AC applications, you have to create a new hardware configuration and set the value "AC" for the load voltage type parameter. If the hardware configuration is not changed for AC applications, the SF status LED remains on all the time. If the "No load voltage" diagnostic interrupt is enabled, several interrupts are activated in each AC cycle. The electronic modules that are connected to the voltage group of this PM-E continue to function normally, however.

Pin assignment

Table 10-4

The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module for the different terminal modules:

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module View

Pin assignment

Remarks 24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage

7036$DQG30(9'&9$&

M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.

$8; $

$

9'&/

9'&/

01

01

$8;

$

$

$8;

9'&

a

$&

24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage 7036$DQG30(9'&9$&

M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.

$8; $

9'&/

$

AUX1 is used as PE.

9'&/ 9'&

01

01

$8;

$

$

$8;


a $&

10-9

Power modules 10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) View

Pin assignment

Remarks 24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage

7036DQG30(9'&9$&

M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor

$8; 9'&/ 01

9'&/

9'&

a

$&

01

%DFNSODQHEXV

Block diagram

3 3

)6*

)XVH PRQLWRULQJ

3:5


(76 EDFNSODQH EXV FLUFXLW

01

9'&/

)XVHV

Figure 10-4

10-10

Block diagram of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC




15 × 81 × 52

Weight

34 g Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage

24 to 56.7 VDC 24 to 48 VAC/120 VAC/ 230 VAC


Yes

Max. current-carrying capacity

10 A

• •

For 24-56.7 VDC

Up to 30° C Max. 10 A up to 40° C: max. 9 A up to 60° C: max. 7 A

•

For 24-48/120/230 VAC

up to 30° C: max. 8 A up to 40° C: max. 7 A up to 60° C: max. 5 A

•


Yes, IEC 127-2/1, 250 V, 10 A, fast fuse (5 x 20 mm), replaceable1

Isolation • Between rated load voltage and backplane bus • Between the power modules

Yes


1500 VAC

Current consumption from backplane bus

Max. 9.5 mA

•

From load voltage L1/L+ (no load)


Yes

Max. 9 mA Max. 5 W


Yes

• •


Red "SF" LED

•

Fuse

Green "FSG" LED

•

Diagnostic information can be displayed

Yes

Green "PWR" LED

The fuses on this module are only additional fuses. External overcurrent protection (suitable for branch circuits in accordance with the applicable national regulations for electrical engineering) is required in the supply lines of the load circuit. 1

See also Address space of the inputs and outputs (Page C-1)


10-11

Digital Electronic Modules 11.1

11.1.1

11.1

11

Parameters for digital electronic modules

Parameters for digital input modules

Introduction The range of digital electronic modules (EM) includes input and output modules for 24 VDC. Input and output modules for 120/230 VAC are also available. A relay module enables the switching of voltages for AC and DC.


11-1

Digital Electronic Modules 11.1 Parameters for digital electronic modules

Overview This table shows the parameters for digital input modules: Table 11-1

Parameters for digital input modules

2DI 24 VDC High Feature

4DI 24 VDC High Feature

4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature

2DI/ 4DI 24 VDC Standard 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard 2DI 120 VAC Standard 4DI 230 VAC Standard

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Hardware interrupt3

---

---

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

---


---

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

Input delay1

---

---

• • • •

0.1 ms 0.5 ms 3 ms 15 ms

3 ms

Module

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to M2

---

---

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

---

Diagnostics: Wire break4

---

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

---

Diagnostics: Fuse defect

---

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

---

Diagnostics: Load voltage missing

---

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

---

---

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Channel 0

Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge3

Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge3

---

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3

1

The input delay applies to "0" to "1" and to "1" to "0".

2

Short circuit of the sensor supply.

3Can

only be assigned parameters for the IM151-1 High Feature interface module and the IM151-7 CPU

If the wire break check is activated, all the unused inputs must be stabilized to prevent them from triggering a module wire break. To do this, connect a resistor between terminal 24/48 V (3, A4, 7, A8) and the free input. The resistor must provide at least 0.5 mA of input current (see "Sensor Switching" in the table of technical specifications). This ensures that sufficient current is flowing to prevent wire break detection.. 4

In the off state, a sensor must provide a minimum of 0.5 mA (otherwise a wire break is detected in the off state). Alternatively, a resistor can be connected parallel to the sensor terminals (the current must be at least. 0.5 mA).

11-2



11.1.2

Parameters for 4DI NAMUR

List of parameters This table shows the parameters for 4 DI NAMUR: Table 11-2

Parameters for 4DI NAMUR

4DI NAMUR

Value range

Default setting

Applicability


• •

Enable Disable

Disable

Module

Sensor type

• • • •

Channel disabled NAMUR sensor Open single contact Single contact, closed, with 10 kΩ NAMUR changeover contact Open changeover contact Changeover contact, closed, with 10 kΩ

Disable

Channel

• • • Pulse stretching

• • • •

None 0.5 s 1s 2s

None

Channel

Diagnostics

• •

Enable Disable

Disable

Module

Diagnostics: wire break

• •

Enable Disable

Disable

Channel


• •

Enable Disable

Disable

Channel

Chatter monitoring:

• •

0.5 s 1 s to 100 s (can be set at increments of 1 s)

0.5 s

Channel

• •

Disable 2 to 31

Disable

Channel

No sensor supply

Monitoring window* Chatter monitoring: Number of signal changes

* The parameters can only be set when the number of signal changes for chatter monitoring is activated


11-3


11.1.3

Parameters for digital output modules

Overview This table shows the parameters for digital output modules: Table 11-3

Parameters for digital output modules

2DO 24 VDC/0.50, 5 A High Feature

2RO NO NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/ 5 A

2DO 24 to 230 VAC/ 1A

Value range

Default setting Applicability

Substitute a value Keep last value

Substitute a value

Module

• •

"0" "1"

"0"

Channel

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

2DO/ 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard 2DO/ 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

2RO NO 2DO 24 24 to 120 VDC/5 A VDC/2 A High Feature 24 to 230 VAC/5 A Reaction to CPU-/master-STOP

---

• •

Substitute value 1

-----


---

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Channel

Diagnostics: Short-circuit to M

---

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Channel

If the interface module becomes deenergized, the digital output modules will not produce substitute values. The value that is output = 0. 1

2

A wire break is only detected in the switched output state.

11-4


Digital Electronic Modules 11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules

11.2

11.2

11.2.1

Parameter description for the digital electronic modules

Hardware interrupt

Description This parameter enables the hardware interrupts for the module.

11.2.2

Input delay

Description You can use this parameter to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal are detected once the set time has elapsed.

11.2.3

Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge

Description This parameter allows you to enable a hardware interrupt at a rising edge (of a signal status change) for each channel.

11.2.4

Pulse stretching

Definition Pulse stretching is a function that changes a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input is stretched to at least the assigned parameter length. If the input pulse already longer than the assigned parameter length, the pulse is not changed.


11-5


The principle of pulse stretching The following figure uses examples to illustrate how and when input pulses are changed. 3XOVHVWUHWFKLQJSDUDPHWHU 7 7IRU!HGJH

7IRU!HGJH

3URFHVVVLJQDO ರSURFHVVHGರ LQSXWVLJQDO

3XOVHLVVKRUWHUWKDQ7 DQGLVVWUHWFKHGWR7

3XOVHLVORQJHUWKDQ7DQG LVWKXVQRWFKDQJHG

3URFHVVVLJQDO

ರSURFHVVHGರ LQSXWVLJQDO

7KHVHFRQGSXOVHRXWSXWGXULQJDFWLYH SXOVHVWUHWFKLQJLVVKLIWHGXQWLOWKH FXUUHQWVWUHWFKLQJSHULRGKDVH[SLUHG

Figure 11-1

6KRUWSXOVHVRXWSXWZLWKLQD SXOVHVWUHWFKLQJF\FOHDUH LJQRUHG

Principle of pulse stretching

Note If you set pulse stretching for an input channel, this also affects the chatter monitoring enabled for this channel. The signal with a "stretched" pulse is the input signal for chatter monitoring. Make sure, therefore, that the parameter assignment for pulse stretching and chatter monitoring correspond with one another. By selecting the appropriate values for the parameters you can adapt the functions to suit your process.

11-6



11.2.5

Chatter monitoring

Definition Chatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reports signal characteristics that are unusual from a process engineering viewpoint, such as the input signal fluctuating too frequently between "0" and "1". If signal characteristics like these occur, it is a sign that the sensors are faulty or that there are instabilities from a process engineering viewpoint.

Activating chatter monitoring You activate chatter monitoring by setting the number of signal changes for chatter monitoring to a value other than zero.

Detecting unusual signal patterns Each input channel has a monitoring window that has been assigned parameters. The monitoring window is started the first time the input signal changes. If the input signal changes more often within the monitoring window than the set number of signal changes, a chatter error is detected. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, the monitoring window is started again at the next signal change.

Reporting a chatter error If a chatter error has occurred, the current signal status is entered in the process image and the value of the signal is set to "invalid". A chatter error is also entered as diagnostic information, triggering an incoming diagnostic interrupt. You must evaluate and process the status of the value and the diagnostic information in the user program.

Resetting a chatter error If no further chattering of the input signal is detected within three monitoring windows, the diagnostic entry is removed and an outgoing diagnostic interrupt is triggered. The status of the value of the current signal in the process image is set to "valid".


11-7


Principle The following figure gives you another graphic illustration of the principle of chatter monitoring. 3DUDPHWHUIRUWKHQXPEHURIVLJQDOWUDQVLWLRQV 3DUDPHWHUIRUPRQLWRULQJZLQGRZW [

[PRQLWRULQJZLQGRZW [

3URFHVV VLJQDO 'HWHFWLRQ 'LDJQRVWLFV

,QFRPLQJರIOXWWHUHUURUರ PRGXOHGLDJQRVLV PHVVDJH

Figure 11-2

11-8

0RGXOHGLDJQRVWLFV ರ)OXWWHUHUURUರJRLQJ UHVHW

The principle of chatter monitoring


Digital Electronic Modules 11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).

11.3

11.3

2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).

Order number 6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0

Features • Digital electronic module with two inputs • Rated input voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

Pin assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-4

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard View

Pin assignment

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8

70(6$DQG','&967 &+

DI: Input signal 24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage

&+ ZLUH

',

',

9'&

9'&

0

0

$8;HJ3(

$

$

$8;HJ3(

ZLUH

ZLUH

M: Chassis ground

$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG ZLWKZLUHVDW3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DI: Input signal

&+

&+ ZLUH

',

9'&

9'&

0

0

QF

ZLUH

',

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage M: Chassis ground Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

QF


11-9

Digital Electronic Modules 11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0). View

Pin assignment

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8

70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG

DI: Input signal &+ ',

&+

ZLUH


ZLUH

M: Chassis ground

',

9'&

9'&

0

0

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

&+

70(6$XQG','&967


&+


/HLWHU ',

',

'&9

'&9

0

0

QF

QF

$

$

$

$

$8; $8;

11-10

/HLWHU

DI: Input signal

/HLWHU

M: Chassis ground Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8; $8;

$8;PXVVEHL/HLWHU DXI3(JHOHJWZHUGHQ



Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

3

0

3

/

Figure 11-3

Block diagram of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard


11-11



15 × 81 × 52

Weight


Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

max. 600m

•

Shielded

max. 1000m Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage (from the power module) •

Reverse polarity protection

24 VDC Yes

Isolation •

between the channels

No

•

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Permissible potential difference •

between the different circuits


75 VDC, 60 VAC 500 VDC


From supply voltage


Dependent on the sensor Typ. 0.4 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display Diagnostic functions

Green LED per channel No Sensor supply output

Output voltage •

with load

min. L+ (-0.5 V)

Output current •

Rated value

500 mA

•

Permitted range

0 to 500 mA Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage •

Rated value

24 VDC

•

For signal "1"

15 to 30 V

•

For signal "0"

-30 to 5 V

Input current • At signal "1"

Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)

Input delay •

At "0" to "1"

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)

•

At "1" to "0"

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)

Input characteristic curve

To IEC 61131, Type 1

Connection of two-wire BEROs

Possible

•

11-12

Permitted bias current

Max. 1.5 mA


Digital Electronic Modules 11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)

11.4

11.4

4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)

Order number 6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0

Features • Digital electronic module with four inputs • Rated input voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-5

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard View

Pin assignment

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

70(6$DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3

&+ &+ ',

',

',

',

$

$

9'& $8;HJ3(

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

&+ &+

ZLUH


9'& $8;HJ3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG


&+ &+

&+ &+

',

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8 ZLUH



11-13

Digital Electronic Modules 11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0) View

Pin assignment

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7

70(6DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG


&+ &+

&+ &+ ',

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

DI: Input signal

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG


&+ &+

&+ &+

',

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

$8;HJ0

$

$

$8;HJ0

$8;HJ0

$

$

$8;HJ0

11-14


ZLUH



Digital Electronic Modules 11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

0

/

9'&RQO\ZLWK70(6

Figure 11-4

Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard


15 × 81× 52

Weight


Number of inputs

4

Length of cable •

Unshielded

max. 600m

•

Shielded

max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials



24 VDC Yes

Isolation •


No

•


Yes




75 VDC, 60 VAC

11-15

Digital Electronic Modules 11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0) Insulation tested with

500 VDC


From supply voltage


Dependent on the sensor Typ. 0.7 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display Diagnostic functions

Green LED per channel No Sensor supply output

Output voltage •

with load

min. L+ (-0.5 V)

Output current •

Rated value

500 mA

•

Permitted range

0 to 500 mA Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage •

Rated value

24 VDC

•

For signal "1"

15 to 30 V

•

For signal "0"

-30 to 5 V


Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)

Input delay •

At "0" to "1"

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)

•

At "1" to "0"

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)




Possible

•

11-16


Max. 1.5 mA


Digital Electronic Modules 11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)

11.5

4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)

11.5


Features • Digital electronic module with four inputs • Source input • Rated input voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-6

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG


&+ &+

&+ &+

',

',

',

',

0

0

$

$

$8;HJ9'&


DI: Input signal M: Sensor supply voltage

$8;HJ9'&


11-17

Digital Electronic Modules 11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0) View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG


&+ &+


&+ &+

',

',

',

',

0

0

0

0

DI: Input signal

ZLUH

M: Sensor supply voltage

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7

&+ &+

&+ &+ ',

',

',

',

0

0

DI: Input signal

ZLUH

M: Sensor supply voltage

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG',9'&65&6WDQGDUG


&+ &+

&+ &+


',

',

',

',

0

0

0

0

$8;HJ9'&

$

$

$8;HJ9'&

$8;HJ9'&

$

$

$8;HJ9'&

11-18

ZLUH

DI: Input signal M: Sensor supply voltage


Digital Electronic Modules 11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

0 /

0RQO\ZLWK70(6

Figure 11-5

Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard


15 × 81 × 52

Weight


Number of inputs

4

Length of cable •

Unshielded

max. 600 m

•

Shielded




24 VDC Yes

Isolation •


No

•


Yes






11-19

Digital Electronic Modules 11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0) Current consumption •

From supply voltage


Dependent on the sensor Typ. 0.7 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display

Green LED per channel

Diagnostic functions

No Sensor supply output

Output voltage •

With load

Max. M +0.5 V

Output current •

Rated value

•

Permitted range

500 mA 0 to 500 mA Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage •

Rated value

24 VDC

•

For signal "1"

-15 to -30 V1

•

For signal "0"

30 to -5 V1


Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)

Input delay •

At "0" to "1"

•

At "1" to "0"

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)




Possible

• 1

11-20

Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)


Max. 1.5 mA

Reference potential is L+


Digital Electronic Modules 11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)

11.6

2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)

11.6

Order number 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0

Features • Digital electronic module with two inputs • Rated input voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) • Supports isochronous operation

Pin assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 11-7

Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature View

Pin assignment

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8

70(6$DQG',9'&6WDQGDUG &+

&+ ZLUH

',

',

9'&

9'&

0

0

$

$

$8;HJ3(

DI: Input signal

ZLUH

ZLUH

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage M: Chassis ground

$8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHG ZLWKZLUHVDW3(


11-21

Digital Electronic Modules 11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0) View

Pin assignment

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH


&+

&+ ZLUH

9'&

9'&

0

0

QF

ZLUH

',

',


QF

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH


&+

&+ ZLUH

',

ZLUH

',

9'&

9'&

0

0

24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage M: Chassis ground

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7

70(6$DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH

DI: Input signal &+

&+ ZLUH

9'&

9'&

0

0

$

$

$

$

QF $8; $8;

11-22

ZLUH

ZLUH

',

',


QF $8; $8;

$8;PXVWEH RFFXSLHGZLWKZLUHVDW3(


Digital Electronic Modules 11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

6KRUWFLUFXLW SURWHFWLRQ 3

0

3

/

Figure 11-6

3RODULW\UHYHUVDO SURWHFWLRQ

Block diagram of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature


15 × 81 × 52

Weight


Supports isochronous operation

Yes

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

•

Shielded

max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials



24 VDC Yes

Isolation •


No

•


Yes






From supply voltage



Dependent on the sensor Typ. 0.4 W

11-23

Digital Electronic Modules 11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display


Interrupts •

Hardware interrupt

Parameters can be assigned

Diagnostic functions •

Group error

•


Red "SF" LED Yes

Sensor supply output Output voltage •

with load

Min.. L+ (-0.5V)

Output current •

Rated value

500 mA

•

Permitted range

0 to 500 mA


Yes, electronic1 Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage •

Rated value

24 VDC

•

For signal "1"

11 to 30 V

•

For signal "0"

-30 to 5 V


Typ. 8 mA

Input delay (parameters can be assigned) •

At "0" to "1"

0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms) 0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms) 3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms) 15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)

•

At "1" to "0"





Possible

• 1

11-24


max. 1.5 mA

Per module


Digital Electronic Modules 11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)

11.7

4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)

11.7

Order number 6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0

Features • Digital electronic module with four inputs • Rated input voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) • Supports isochronous operation

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 11-8

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH &+ &+

&+ &+

',

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

$8;HJ0

$

$

$8;HJ0


ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH


&+ &+

&+ &+

',

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&




11-25

Digital Electronic Modules 11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) View

Pin assignment

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7

70(6DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH


&+ &+

&+ &+ ',

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

DI: Input signal

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG',9'&+LJK)HDWXUH


&+ &+

11-26

&+ &+

',

',

',

',

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

$8;HJ0

$

$

$8;HJ0

$8;HJ0

$

$

$8;HJ0


ZLUH



Digital Electronic Modules 11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

6KRUWFLUFXLW SURWHFWLRQ

3 3

0


/

9'&RQO\ZLWK70(6DQG70(6$

Figure 11-7

Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature


15 × 81 × 52

Weight



Yes

Number of inputs

4

Length of cable •

Unshielded

max. 600 m

•

Shielded




24 VDC Yes

Isolation •



No

11-27

Digital Electronic Modules 11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) •


Yes



75 VDC, 60 VAC


500 VDC


From supply voltage

Dependent on the sensor



Status display


Interrupts •

Hardware interrupt

Parameters can be assigned


Group error

Red "SF" LED

•


Yes

Sensor supply output Output voltage •

with load

Min.. L+ (-0.5V)

Output current •

Rated value

500 mA

•

Permitted range

0 to 500 mA


Yes, electronic1 Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage •

Rated value

24 VDC

•

For signal "1"

11 to 30 V

•

For signal "0"

-30 to 5 V


Typ. 8 mA

Input delay (parameters can be assigned) •

At "0" to "1"


•

At "1" to "0"





Possible

• 1

11-28


max. 1.5 mA

Per module


Digital Electronic Modules 11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)

11.8

4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)

11.8

Order number 6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0

Features • Digital electronic module with four inputs • Rated input voltage 24-48 VAC/VDC • Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes • Diagnostics: Wire break • Diagnostics: Fuse blown • Diagnostics: Load voltage missing • Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs) • Supports isochronous operation

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 11-9

Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature

View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH

&+ &+

&+ &+

',

',

',

',

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

$

$

$8;3(

ZLUH

ZLUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7 DI: Input signal VDC sensor supply PE: Chassis ground

$8;3(


11-29

Digital Electronic Modules 11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH


&+ &+


&+ &+

DI: Input signal

ZLUH

VDC sensor supply

',

',

',

',

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH


&+ &+

&+ &+

',

',

',

',

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

ZLUH

ZLUH

DI: Input signal VDC sensor supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG',98&+LJK)HDWXUH

&+ &+ ',

&+ &+ ',

',

',

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

9$&9'&

$

$

9$&9'&

$

$

$8;3( $8;3(

11-30


ZLUH

ZLUH

DI: Input signal VDC sensor supply AUX: Terminals A4, A3, A8 DC/AC and A7 can be used for unused cables up to 30 VDC.

$8;3( $8;3(


Digital Electronic Modules 11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

,QSXW HOHFWURQLFV

6KRUWFLUFXLW SURWHFWLRQ 3 3

0

5HYHUVH SRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQ

/

Figure 11-8

Block diagram of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature

Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D

15 × 81 × 52 (mm)

Weight



Yes

Number of inputs

4

Length of cable •

Unshielded

Max. 600 m

•

Shielded

Max. 1000 m Voltage, currents, potentials


Horizontal installation up to 60° C

•

Vertical installation up to 40° C

•

P1

24-48 VAC/VDC

AC or DC automatically

Isolation •

Between the channels

No

•

Between channels and backplane bus

Yes


11-31

Digital Electronic Modules 11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) Permissible potential difference •

Between the different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC


2500 VDC


From the power supply L+


•

From the backplane bus

Max. 10 mA



Status display

Green LEDs per channel

Diagnostic functions • Group error display

Parameters can be assigned Red LEDs (SF) Sensor power supply outputs

Output voltage •

With load

Min. L+ (-0.5 V)

Output current •

Rated value

500 mA

•

Permitted range

0 to 500 mA


Yes (per module) Data for selecting a sensor

Input voltage • Rated value

24 to 48 VUC

•

For signal "1"

-15 VDC to -57.6 VDC 15 VDC to 57.6 VDC 15 VAC to 48 VAC

•

For signal "0"

-6 VDC to 6 VDC 0 VAC to 5 VAC

•

Frequency range

47 Hz to 63 Hz


From 4 mA to 10 mA

Input delay • At "0" to "1" • At "1" to "0"

Max. 15 ms Max. 15 ms

Input characteristic curve1 Connection of two-wire BEROs •

Possible


Max. 0.5 to 2 mA2 Sensor switching

Resistance circuit of the sensor for wire break monitoring • Nominal voltage 24 V (15 V to 35 V) • Nominal voltage 48 V (30 V to 60 V)

18 kΩ 39 kΩ

IEC 61131 does not provide technical specifications for UC modules. However, the values have been adjusted to IEC 61131 as closely as possible. 1

2

11-32

Minimum load current is required in the case of wire-break monitoring.


Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)

11.9

11.9

4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0

Features • Digital electronic module with four inputs • 8.2 VDC sensor supply • Suitable for NAMUR sensors and both closed and open mechanical contacts

Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 This table shows the terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors according to IEC 60947-5-6. Table 11-10 Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 View

Pin assignment

Remarks Sensor 1:

70(6$DQG',1$085

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Sensor 2:

&+

&+

&+

&+

',

',

',

9V

9V

$

$

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Sensor 3: Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3

RU

',

$8;3(

([DPSOHRIDFKDQQHO FRQQHFWLRQ

Sensor 4: Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7 DI: Input signal Vs: Sensor supply voltage

$8;3(


11-33


Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contacts or sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 This table shows the terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contacts or sensors according to IEC 60947-5-6. Table 11-11 Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contact or sensor to IEC 60947-5-6 View

Pin assignment

Changeover contact 1:

70(6DQG',1$085

&+

&+

&+

&+

',

',

',

',

9V

9V

9V

Changeover contact 2 terminals 2, 6 and 7 DI: Input signal

12FRQWDFW

RU

Vs: Sensor supply voltage

9V

terminals 1, 5 and 3

([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ RIFKDQQHO

Remarks

1&FRQWDFW

Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact) This table shows the terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact). Table 11-12 Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact) View

Pin assignment

Remarks Single contact 1:

70(6DQG',1$085

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Single contact 2:

&+

&+

&+

&+

',

',

',

9V

9V

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Single contact 3: Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3

Single contact 4: N

',

11-34

([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQRI FKDQQHO

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7 DI: Input signal




Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical changeover contact) This table shows the terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact). Table 11-13 Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical changeover contact) View

Pin assignment

Changeover contact 1: Terminals 1, 5 and 3

70(6DQG',1$085 &+ &+

Changeover contact 2: Terminals 2, 6 and 7

([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQRI &+ FKDQQHODQGFKDQQHO &+ N ',

',

',

',

9V

9V

9V

9V

Remarks

DI: Input signal Vs: Sensor supply voltage

Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact) This table shows the terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact). Table 11-14 Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact) View

Pin assignment

Remarks Single contact 1:

70(6DQG',1$085

&+

&+

&+

&+

',

',

',

',

9V

9V

9V

9V

([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQ RIFKDQQHO

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Single contact 2: Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Single contact 3:

Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4 Single contact 4: Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8 DI: Input signal



11-35


Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact) This table shows the terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact). Table 11-15 Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact) View

Pin assignment

Remarks Changeover contact 1: terminals 1, 5 and 3

70(6$DQG',1$085

Changeover contact 2: &+

&+

&+

&+

',

',

9V

9V 9V

$8; $8;

$

$

$

$

terminals 2, 6 and 7 DI: Input signal Vs: Sensor supply voltage

',

',

9V

([DPSOHIRUFRQQHFWLRQRI FKDQQHODQGFKDQQHO

$8; $8;

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

,QSXWZLULQJ


w&

,QSXWV

9 33

0XOWLSOH[HU FRPSDUDWRU

9

Figure 11-9

11-36

9V

Block diagram of the 4DI NAMUR




15 × 81 × 52

Weight


Number of inputs

4

Length of cable •

Shielded

Max. 200 m

Voltage, currents, potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously

4

•

Horizontal installation up to 60° C

4

•

All other mounting positions up to 40° C

4

Isolation •


No

•


Yes

•

Between channels and load voltage

Yes

•

Between load voltage and backplane bus

Yes


Between different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with: •

Channels against the backplane bus and load voltage

500 VDC

•

Load voltage against the backplane bus

500 VDC


From load voltage L+




Status display


Interrupts • •

Hardware interrupt Diagnostic interrupt

No Yes, can be set

Diagnostic functions • •

Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed

Red "SF" LED Possible

Monitoring for • •

Short circuit Wire break

I > 7 mA* I < 0.35 mA* Data for selecting a sensor

Input current for NAMUR sensors • •

At signal "1" At signal "0"

according to NAMUR or IEC 60947-5-6 2.1 mA to 7 mA 0.35 mA to 1.2 mA

Input current for a closed contact


11-37

Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0) •

At signal "1"

2.1 mA to 7 mA

•

For signal "0"

0.35 mA to 1.2 mA

Input current for an open contact •

At signal "1"

Typ. 8 mA

•


0.5 mA

Input delay •

At "0" to "1"

Max. 4.6 ms

•

At "1" to "0"

Max. 4.6 ms

Tolerated switchover time with changeover contacts

300 ms

Parallel connection of inputs

No Sensor power supply outputs

Number of outputs

1

Output voltage •

With load

Min. 8.2 V

Output current •

Rated value

45 mA

Additional (redundant) supply

Not permissible


Yes, electronic

* Only for NAMUR sensors and closed contacts.

Value status The value status provides additional binary information on a digital input signal. The value status is entered in the process input image at the same time as the signal, and it provides information on the validity of the input signal. The value status is affected by: • Wire break check/short circuit • Flutter monitoring • Pulse extension • Validity check of changeover contact sensor types Meaning of the value status: • "1": input signal is valid • "0": Input signal is invalid

11-38



Assignment in the process input image The data is transferred to the process image in two bytes (16 bits).

%\WH

,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO ,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO ,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO ,QSXWVLJQDOIRUFKDQQHO 9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO 9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO 9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO 9DOXHVWDWXVIRUFKDQQHO

%\WH

XQDVVLJQHG

0HDQLQJ 6LJQDOYDOLG 6LJQDOLQYDOLG

&KDQQHOQRWIRUHQFRGHUW\SHFKDQJHRYHUFRQWDFW

Figure 11-10 Assignment in the process input image for 4DI NAMUR

Diagnosis for changeover contact sensor types When a diagnosis is made for the changeover contact sensor type, the digital electronic module controls the switchover between two input channels. If there is no signal change in the normally closed contact after the set switchover time (see technical specifications), the module reports a diagnosis.

Purpose of changeover contact diagnostics You can use the diagnosis for the following: • A diagnosis of the sensor • To make absolutely sure that there has been a switchover between a normally open contact and normally closed contact

Principle of changeover contact diagnostics If the digital inputs of a channel group are assigned parameters as changeover contacts, the module carries out a diagnosis for changeover contact sensor types for this channel group. The tolerated switchover time between the two channels is fixed at 300 ms. If the validity check is negative, the following applies: • The module designates the value status of the normally open contact channel as invalid. • The module creates a diagnostic entry for the NO contact channel. • The module triggers a diagnostic interrupt.


11-39

Digital Electronic Modules 11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0) The digital input signal and the value status are only updated for the NO contact channel (channel 0 and 2). In the case of the NC contact channel (channel 1 and 3) the digital input signal is fixed at "zero" and the value status is "invalid" because this channel is only used for a validity check of the sensor. Note the following points when carrying out a diagnosis for a changeover contact sensor type: • If there is already an error on the NO contact channel (wire break, for example), the module will not carry out a diagnosis for changeover contact errors. The diagnosis for changeover contact errors continues to be carried out on the second channel. • You will find additional points to note in the following table: Table 11-16 Diagnosis for changeover contacts Changeover contact

A negative check means...

Changeover contact as NAMUR

• •

Short circuit or Wire break

Closed changeover contact

•

Defective sensor or short circuit

Additionally:

No distinction can be made here between a defective sensor and short circuit Open changeover contact

11-40

Changeover contact error or external fault (in the case of DP diagnosis)

Attention: No distinction possible between • Signal "0" and wire break • Signal "1" and short circuit


Digital Electronic Modules 11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)

11.10

2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)

11.10

Order number 6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0

Features • Digital electronic module with two inputs • Rated input voltage 120 VAC • Suitable for switches

Pin assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-17 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard View

Pin assignment

70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

&+

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 DI: Input signal

&+ ZLUH

',

',

/

/

1

$

$

1 $8;HJ3(

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4

ZLUH

ZLUH

L1: Sensor supply voltage N: Neutral conductor

$8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHGZLWK ZLUHVDW3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DI: Input signal L1: Sensor supply voltage

&+

&+

N: Neutral conductor ZLUH

',

',

/

/

1

1

QF

ZLUH

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 120 VAC.

QF


11-41

Digital Electronic Modules 11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0) View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG


&+

&+


',

',

/

/

1

1

ZLUH

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 DI: Input signal L1: Sensor supply voltage

&+

&+ ZLUH

',

',

/

/

1

1

QF

$

$

QF $8; $8;

11-42

$

$

ZLUH

ZLUH

N: Neutral conductor Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 120 VAC.

$8; $8;

$8;PXVWEHRFFXSLHGZLWK ZLUHVDW3(


Digital Electronic Modules 11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(76 EDFNSODQH EXVFLUFXLW

1

/

3 3

Figure 11-11 Block diagram of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard


15 × 81 × 52

Weight



No

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

•

Shielded

Max. 600 m Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials

Supply voltage (from the power module) •

Frequency

120 VAC 47 to 63 Hz

Isolation •


No

•


Yes


between Minternal and the inputs

1500 VAC


2500 VDC



Status display



No


11-43

Digital Electronic Modules 11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0) Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage •

Rated value

120 VAC

•

For signal "1"

79 to 132 VAC

•

For signal "0"

0 to 20 VAC


3 to 9 mA

Input delay •

At "0" to "1"

15 ms

•

At "1" to "0"

25 ms




No

•

11-44


Max. 1 mA


Digital Electronic Modules 11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)

11.11

2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)

11.11

Order number 6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0

Features • Digital electronic module with two inputs • Rated input voltage 230 VAC • Suitable for switches

Pin assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-18 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard View

Pin assignment

70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

&+

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 DI: Input signal

&+ ZLUH

',

',

/

/

1

$

$

1 $8;HJ3(


ZLUH

ZLUH

L1: Sensor supply voltage N: Neutral conductor


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG


&+

&+


',

',

/

/

1

1

QF

QF

ZLUH



11-45

Digital Electronic Modules 11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0) View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG


&+

&+


',

',

/

/

1

1

ZLUH

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG',9$&6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 DI: Input signal L1: Sensor supply voltage

&+

&+ ZLUH

',

',

/

/

1

1

QF

$

$

QF $8; $8;

11-46

$

$

ZLUH

ZLUH

N: Neutral conductor Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 230 VAC.

$8; $8;

$8;PXVWEH RFFXSLHGZLWKZLUHVDW3(


Digital Electronic Modules 11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


1

/

3 3

Figure 11-12 Block diagram of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard


15 × 81× 52

Weight



No

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

•

Shielded


Supply voltage (from the power module) •

Frequency

230 VAC 47 to 63 Hz

Isolation •


No

•


Yes


between Minternal and the inputs

1500 VAC


4000 VDC


Typ. 0.7 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display



No


11-47

Digital Electronic Modules 11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0) Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage •

Rated value

230 VAC

•

For signal "1"

164 to 264 VAC

•

For signal "0"

0 to 40 VAC


5 to 30 mA

Input delay •

At "0" to "1"

15 ms

•

At "1" to "0"

45 ms




No

•

11-48


Max. 2 mA


Digital Electronic Modules 11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)

11.12

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)

11.12


Features • Digital electronic module with two outputs • Output current 0.5 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights • Supports isochronous operation

Peculiarity When you supply the 24 VDC rated load voltage at the power module by means of a mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for approximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast counters.

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-19 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG'29'&R$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)

&+ '2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

$

$

$8;HJ3(


&+ ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH




11-49

Digital Electronic Modules 11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0) View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)

&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

QF

QF

ZLUH

M: Ground load power supply Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG


&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG


&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

QF

$

$

$

$

QF $8;HJ0 $8;HJ0

11-50

ZLUH


$8;HJ0 $8;HJ0



Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

0 /

5HYHUVHSRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQ LQWHUQDO SRZHUVXSSO\

Figure 11-13 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard


11-51



15 × 81 × 52

Weight



Yes

Number of outputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

•

Shielded


Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •

P1

24 VDC Yes1

Total current of the outputs (per module)

1A

Isolation •


No

•


Yes



75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC




Max. 5 mA per channel Typ. 0.4 W




No Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage •

At signal "1"

Min.. L+ (-1V)

Output current •

•

At signal "1" – Rated value – Permitted range

0.5 A 7 mA up to 0.6 A

With signal "0" (leakage current)

Max. 0.3 mA

Output delay (for resistive load) •

At "0" to "1"

Max. 200 µs

•

At "1" to "0"

Max. 1.3 ms

Load resistor range

48 Ω to 3.4 kΩ

Lamp load

Max. 5 W

Connecting two outputs in parallel •

For redundant triggering of a load

Yes (per module)

•

To increase performance

No

Control of a digital input

11-52

Yes


Digital Electronic Modules 11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0) Switch rate •

For resistive load

100 Hz

•

With inductive load

2 Hz

•

For lamp load

10 Hz

Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on circuit interruption

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

Reverse-voltage proof

Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the power module

Short-circuit protection of the output

Yes2

•

Threshold on

Typ. 0.7 to 1.8 A

1

Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through

2

Per channel


11-53

Digital Electronic Modules 11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)

11.13

4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)

11.13


Features • Digital electronic module with four outputs • Output current 0.5 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights


Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-20 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG


&+ &+


&+ &+ ZLUH

'2 '2 0 $8;HJ3(

11-54

'2

'2 0

$

$

DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel) M: Ground load power supply

$8;HJ3(


Digital Electronic Modules 11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) View

Pin assignment


Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7 Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

&+ &+


&+ &+

'2

'2

'2

'2

0

0

0

0

DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG


&+ &+ '2


&+ &+

'2

'2

'2

0

0

DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel)

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG

&+ &+

&+ &+

'2

'2

'2

'2

0

0

0

0

$

$

$8;HJ3( $8;HJ3(

$

$


ZLUH

DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5 A per channel) M: Ground load power supply

$8;HJ3( $8;HJ3(


11-55


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


0 3 3

/

5HYHUVHSRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQDQG LQWHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\

0RQO\ZLWK70(6

Figure 11-14 Block diagram of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard

11-56




15 × 81 × 52

Weight



No

Number of outputs

4

Length of cable •

Unshielded

•

Shielded



P1

24 VDC Yes1


2A

Isolation •


No

•


Yes



75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC









Output voltage •

At signal "1"

Min.. L+ (-1V)

Output current •

•


0.5 A 7 mA up to 0.6A


Max. 0.3 mA


At "0" to "1"

Max. 100 µs

•

At "1" to "0"

Max. 300 µs

Load resistor range

48 Ω to 3.4 kΩ

Lamp load

Max. 5 W



Yes (per module)

•


No



Yes

11-57

Digital Electronic Modules 11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) Switch rate •

For resistive load

100 Hz

•

With inductive load

2 Hz

•

For lamp load

10 Hz


Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)


Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the power module2


Yes3

• 1

11-58

Threshold on

Typ. 0.7 to 1.5 A


2

The module must be supplied with voltage.

3

Per channel


Digital Electronic Modules 11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)

11.14

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)

11.14


Features • Digital electronic module with two outputs • Output current 0.5 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights • Supports isochronous operation

Peculiarity When you connect the 24 VDC rated load voltage to the power module by means of a mechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal for approximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fast counters.

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 11-21 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH


&+ '2

'2

9'&

9'& 0

0 $8;HJ3(


&+

$

$

ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH




11-59

Digital Electronic Modules 11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0) View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH


&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

QF

QF

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH


&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A7 70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH


&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

QF

$

$

$

$

QF $8; $8;

11-60

ZLUH


$8; $8;



Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

0 /

5HYHUVHSRODULW\ SURWHFWLRQDQGLQWHUQDO SRZHUVXSSO\

Figure 11-15 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature


11-61



15 × 81 × 52

Weight



Yes

Number of outputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

•

Shielded



P1

24 VDC Yes1


1A

Isolation •


No

•


Yes



75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC








Group error

•

Diagnostic functions readable

Red "SF" LED Yes Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage •

At signal "1"

Min. L+ (-1V)

Output current •

•


0.5 A 7 mA up to 0.6A


Max. 0.3 mA


At "0" to "1"

•

At "1" to "0"

Max. 100 µs Max. 400 µs

Load resistor range

48Ω to 3.4 kΩ

Lamp load

Max. 2.5 W


11-62


Yes (per module)


Digital Electronic Modules 11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0) •



No Yes

Switch rate •

For resistive load

100 Hz

•

With inductive load

2 Hz

•

For lamp load

10 Hz


Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)




Yes2

•

Threshold on

Typ. 1.5 A

1


2

Per channel


11-63

Digital Electronic Modules 11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)

11.15

2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)

11.15


Features • Digital electronic module with two outputs • Output current 2 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights


Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 2 A Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-22 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard View

Pin assignment



Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)

&+ '2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

$

$

$8;HJ3(


&+ ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH



11-64


Digital Electronic Modules 11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0) View

Pin assignment



Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)

&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

QF

QF

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG


&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG


&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

QF

$

$

$

$

QF $8; $8;

ZLUH


$8; $8;


11-65


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

0 /


Figure 11-16 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

11-66




15 × 81 × 52

Weight


Supports clocked operation

No

Number of outputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

•

Shielded



Polarity reversal

24 VDC Yes1


4A

Isolation •


No

•


Yes



75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC


From rated load voltage L+ (no load)







Output voltage •

At signal "1"

Min. L+ (-1V)

Output current •

•


2A 7 mA to 2.4 A


Max. 0.5 mA


At "0" to "1"

Max. 200 µs

•

At "1" to "0"

Max. 1.3 ms

Load resistor range

12 Ω to 3.4 kΩ

Lamp load

Max. 10 W



Yes (per module)

•


No



Yes

11-67

Digital Electronic Modules 11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0) Switch rate •

For resistive load

100 Hz

•

With inductive load

2 Hz (0.5 H)

•

For lamp load

10 Hz


Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)




Yes2

•

11-68

Threshold on

Typ. 2.8 to 7.2 A

1


2

Per channel


Digital Electronic Modules 11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)

11.16

4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)

11.16


Features • Digital electronic module with four outputs • Output current 2 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights


Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC, 2 A Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 11-23 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard View

Pin assignment




ZLUH

DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel) M: Ground load power supply

$8;HJ3(

$8;HJ3(


11-69

Digital Electronic Modules 11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0) View

Pin assignment




&+ &+


&+ &+

'2

'2

'2

'2

0

0

0

0

DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)

ZLUH




Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3 &+ &+ '2


&+ &+

'2

'2

'2

0

0

DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3 70(6$DQG'29'&$6WDQGDUG


&+ &+ '2

'2

'2

'2

0

0

0

0

$

$

$

$

$8;HJ3( $8;HJ3(

11-70

&+ &+

ZLUH

DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel) M: Ground load power supply

$8;HJ3( $8;HJ3(



Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

0 /


0RQO\ZLWK70(6

Figure 11-17 Block diagram of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard


11-71



15 × 81 × 52

Weight



No

Number of outputs

4

Length of cable •

Unshielded

•

Shielded



Polarity reversal

24 VDC Yes1


4A

Isolation •


No

•


Yes



75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC









Output voltage •

At signal "1"

Min. L+ (-1V)

Output current •

•


2A 7 mA to 2.4 A


Max. 0.5 mA


At "0" to "1"

Max. 200 µs

•

At "1" to "0"

Max. 1.3 ms

Load resistor range

12 Ω to 3.4 kΩ

Lamp load

Max. 10 W



Yes (per module)

•


No


11-72

Yes


Digital Electronic Modules 11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0) Switch rate •

For resistive load

100 Hz

•

With inductive load

2 Hz (0.5 H)

•

For lamp load

10 Hz


Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)




Yes2

•

Threshold on

Typ. 2.8 to 7.2 A

1


2

Per channel


11-73

Digital Electronic Modules 11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)

11.17

2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)

11.17


Features • Digital electronic module with two outputs • Output current 2 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights • Supports clocked operation


Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 2 A High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 11-24 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH


&+ '2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

$

$

$8;HJ3(


&+ ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH



11-74


Digital Electronic Modules 11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0) View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH


&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

QF

QF

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH


&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

ZLUH


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG'29'&$+LJK)HDWXUH


&+


&+ ZLUH

'2

'2

9'&

9'&

0

0

QF

$

$

QF $8; $8;

$

$

ZLUH


$8; $8;


11-75


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


0 3 3

/


Figure 11-18 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature

11-76




15 × 81 × 52

Weight



Yes

Number of outputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

•

Shielded



Polarity reversal

24 VDC Yes1


4A

Isolation •


No

•

Between the channels and backplane bus

Yes


Between the different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC








Group error

•


Red "SF" LED Yes Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage •

At signal "1"

Min. L+ (-1V)

Output current •

•


2A 7 mA to 2.4 A


Max. 0.5 mA


At "0" to "1"

•

At "1" to "0"

Max. 100 µs Max. 400 µs

Load resistor range

12 Ω to 3.4 kΩ

Lamp load

Max. 5 W




Yes (per module)

11-77

Digital Electronic Modules 11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0) •


No


Yes

Switch rate •

For resistive load

100 Hz

•

With inductive load

2 Hz (0.5 H)

•

For lamp load

10 Hz


Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)




Yes2

•

11-78

Threshold on

Typ. 4 A

1


2

Per channel


Digital Electronic Modules 11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)

11.18

11.18

Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)


Features • Digital electronic module with two outputs • Output current 2 A per output • Rated load voltage 24-48/120/230 VAC • Substitute value • Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes • Suitable for solenoid valves, AC contactors, and indicator lights

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 to 230 VAC for the different terminal modules: Table 11-25 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24-230 VAC View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG'29$&


&+ '2

1 $8;HJ3(

N: Neutral conductor

&+

$

$

'2

1 $8;HJ3( $8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHGWR3(


11-79

Digital Electronic Modules 11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0) View

Pin assignment

70(6DQG'29$&

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 DO: Output signal (maximum 2 A per channel)

&+ '2

1


&+


'2

1

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG'29$&


&+ '2

1


&+

'2

1

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6$DQG'29$&


&+ '2 QF 1 QF $8; $8;

11-80

&+


'2


1 QF

$

$

$

$

QF

$8; $8;



Block diagram

=&

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

=&

1 /

Figure 11-19 Block diagram of the 2DO 24-230 VAC


15 × 81 × 52

Weight



No

Number of outputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

Max. 600 m

•

Shielded

Max. 1000 m Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage L1 (from the power module) •

Frequency

24-230 VAC 47 to 63 Hz

Total current of the outputs (per module) •

Up to 40° C

Max. 2 A*

•

Up to 60° C

Max. 1 A*

Isolation •


•


Insulation tested

No Yes 2500 VDC



Max. 18 mA

•

From rated load voltage L1 (no load)

Max. 15 mA per channel


11-81

Digital Electronic Modules 11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0) Power dissipation of the module

Max. 4 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics

Status display




Output voltage •

At signal "1"

Min. L (-1.5 V)

Output current (per channel) •

•


2A 0.1 mA to 2.2 A


Max. 3 mA


At "0" to "1"

•

At "1" to "0"

Zero cross inhibit voltage

Max. 15 ms Max. 15 ms Max. 25 V

Motor starter size •

Up to 40° C

Max. size in accordance with NEMA: 5

•

Up to 60° C

Max. size in accordance with NEMA: 4

Lamp load

Max. 100 W



•



Yes (per module) No Possible

Switch rate •

For resistive load

Max. 10 Hz

•

With inductive load

Max. 0.5 Hz

•

For lamp load

Max. 1 Hz


Yes, by means of fuse in the power module

* Total current of the outputs (per module), see figure below

11-82



Total current of the outputs 7HPSHUDWXUH

r&

r&

r&

7RWDOFXUUHQWSHUPRGXOH $

$

$

Figure 11-20 Total current of the outputs for 2DO 24 to 230 VAC


11-83

Digital Electronic Modules 11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)

11.19

2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)

11.19

Order number 6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0

Note If you connect an extra-low voltage system (SELV/PELF) on one channel of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A, you can only use an extra-low voltage system (SELV/PELF) on the other channel. As of version 2 of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A there is no longer an internal jumper between terminals 2 and 6. If you need this jumper, you can replace it with an external jumper between terminals 3 and 7 (see block diagram below).

Features • Digital electronic module with two relay outputs • Output current 5 A per output • Rated load voltage up to 120 VDC and up to 230 VAC • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights • Isolated from the supply voltage

Caution The rated supply voltage of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A is 24 VDC. The 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A can only be located in a potential group with 24 VDC (from the power module).

11-84



Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of version 2) for the different terminal modules: Table 11-26 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of Version 2) View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG5212 9'&$9$&$

&+

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 13, 14: Normally open contact channel 0:

&+

23, 24: Normally open contact channel 1: Internal jumper between terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7

$8;HJ3(

$

$

$8;HJ3( $8;UDLOPXVWEH DVVLJQHGWR3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6DQG5212 9'&$9$&$

&+

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 13, 14: Normally open contact channel 0:

&+

23, 24: Normally open contact channel 1:

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires up to the load voltage used.

Internal jumper between terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7

QF

QF

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3

&+

70(6DQG5212 9'&$9$&$


&+

23, 24: Normally open contact channel 1: Internal jumper between terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7



11-85

Digital Electronic Modules 11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0) View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG5212 9'&$9$&$

&+

23, 24: Normally open contact channel 1: Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires up to the load voltage used.

QF

$

$

$8; $8;

$

$


&+

QF


Internal jumper between terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7

$8; $8;

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

0 /


)URPSURGXFWOHYHORIWKH52129'&9$&$WKHLQWHUQDO EULGJHEHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVDQGLVQRWLQVWDOOHG,I\RXUHTXLUHWKLVEULGJHLWFDQEH UHSODFHGE\DQH[WHUQDOEULGJHEHWZHHQWHUPLQDOVDQG

Figure 11-21 Block diagram of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 230 VAC/5 A

11-86




15 × 81 × 52

Weight



No

Number of outputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

•

Shielded


Rated supply voltage L+ (from the power module)

24 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Current per channel Yes •

Up to 50° C

Max. 5 A

•

Up to 60° C

Max. 4 A

Isolation •


Yes

•


Yes

•

Between the channels and supply voltage

Yes

•

Between the supply voltage and backplane bus

Yes



75 VDC, 60 VAC

•


240 VAC

•


Insulation tested

240 VAC Yes

•


500 VDC

•


1500 VAC

•


1500 VAC

Current consumption From the power supply L+

Max. 30 mA


Typ. 0.6 W

•





Output current •

Continuous thermal current

Max. 5 A

•

Min. load current

8 mA

•

Min. voltage

17 V


11-87

Digital Electronic Modules 11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0) Connecting two outputs in parallel •


No

•


No


Yes

Switch rate •

For resistive load

2 Hz

•

With inductive load

0.5 Hz

•

For lamp load

2 Hz


No

Short-circuit protection of the output 1

No

1

11-88

The relay outputs must be fused externally with 6A.



Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table. This table shows the switching capacity and endurance of the relay contacts: Table 11-27 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts Resistive load For resistive load

Voltage 24 VDC

For inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC 15

Operating cycles (typical)

5.0 A

0.1 million

4.0 A

0.2 million

2.0 A

0.5 million

1.0 A

1.6 million

0.5 A

4 million

0.1 A

7 million

60 VDC

0.5 A

1.6 million

120 VDC

0.2 A

1.6 million

48 VAC

2.0 A

1.6 million

60 VAC

2.0 A

1.2 million

120 VAC

5.0 A

0.1 million

3.0 A

0.2 million

2.0 A

0.4 million

1.0 A

0.8 million

0.5 A

1.5 million

5.0 A

0.1 million

3.0 A

0.2 million

2.0 A

0.4 million

1.0 A

0.8 million

0.5 A

1.5 million

2.0 A

0.1 million

1.0 A

0.2 million

0.5 A

0.5 million

60 VDC

0.5 A

0.2 million

120 VDC

0.2 A

0.5 million

48 VAC

1.0 A

0.7 million

60 VAC

1.0 A

0.5 million

120 VAC

2.0 A

0.1 million

230 VAC

For inductive load in accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC 15

Current

24 VDC

230 VAC


1.0 A

0.3 million

0.5 A

1 million

0.1 A

2 million

2.0 A

0.1 million

1.0 A

0.3 million

0.5 A

1 million

11-89

Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)

11.20

2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)

11.20

Features • Digital electronic module with two relay outputs • Output current 5 A per output • Substitute value • Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes • Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights • Isolated from the supply voltage • Normally open contact and normally closed contact

Note If you connect an extra-low voltage system (SELV/ PELV) on one channel of the relay module, you can only use an extra-low voltage system (SELV/ PELV) on the other channel.

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A for the different terminal modules: Table 11-28 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG52121& 9'&$9$&$

&+

&RPPRQ

12FRQWDFW

12FRQWDFW

1&FRQWDFW

1&FRQWDFW

$8;HJ3(

$

$

$8;HJ3(

1, 2: normally open contact channel 0 1, 3: normally closed contact channel 0

&+

&RPPRQ



$8;UDLOPXVWEH DVVLJQHGWR3(

11-90


Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0) View

Pin assignment 70(6DQG52121& 9'&$9$&$

&+

&+

&RPPRQ

12FRQWDFW 1&FRQWDFW

&RPPRQ

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 1, 2: normally open contact channel 0 1, 3: normally closed contact channel 0

12FRQWDFW

5, 6: normally open contact channel 1

1&FRQWDFW

5, 7: normally closed contact channel 1


&+ &RPPRQ

12FRQWDFW

1&FRQWDFW

70(6DQG52121& 9'&$9$&$


&+


&RPPRQ 12FRQWDFW


1&FRQWDFW



Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 70(6$DQG52121& 9'&$9$&$

&+ &RPPRQ

&+

12FRQWDFW

1&FRQWDFW

$8; $8;

&RPPRQ

$

$

$

$


12FRQWDFW


1&FRQWDFW



$8; $8;


11-91


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

0 /

3RODULW\ UHYHUVDO SURWHFWLRQ

Figure 11-22 Block diagram of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A

Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D

15 × 81 × 52 (mm)

Weight



No

Number of outputs

2

Length of cable •

Unshielded

Max. 600 m

•

Shielded


Rated supply voltage L+ (from the power module)

24 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Current per channel Yes •

Up to 50° C

Max. 5 A

•

Up to 60° C

Max. 4 A

Isolation

11-92

•


Yes

•


Yes

•


Yes

•


Yes


Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0) Permissible potential difference •


75 VDC, 60 VAC

•


240 VAC

•


240 VAC

Insulation tested •


500 VDC

•


2500 VDC

•


2500 VDC


From the power supply L+

Max. 30 mA

•


Max. 10 mA



Status display

Green LEDs per channel



Output current •

Continuous thermal current

Max. 5 A

•

Min. load current

8 mA



•



No No Yes

Switch rate •

For resistive load

2 Hz

•

With inductive load

0.5 Hz

•

For lamp load

2 Hz


No

Short-circuit protection of the output 1

No

The relay outputs must be protected externally with a 6 A fuse. For installation in a hazardous area in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC), only remove the fuse using a suitable tool if the module is not in a potentially explosive area. 1


11-93


Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts With an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the following table. The normally open and normally closed contacts of the relay vary in their length of service life. This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts. Table 11-29 Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts Resistive load

For resistive load

Voltage

24 VDC

Operating cycles (typ.) Normally open contact

Operating cycles (typ.) Normally closed contact

5,0 A

0.1 million

0.15 million

4.0 A

0.2 million

0.175 million

2.0 A

0.45 million

0.3 million

0.5 A

1.4 million

1.1 million

0.1 A

1.5 million

1.5 million

2.0 A

0.15 million

0.11 million

1.0 A

0.3 million

0.2 million

0.5 A

0.6 million

0.6 million

0.1 A

0.8 million

0.6 million

48 VAC

2.0 A

0.45 million

0.35 million

60 VAC

2.0 A

0.45 million

0.35 million

120 VAC

5.0 A

0.1 million

0.1 million

3.0 A

0.2 million

0.2 million

2.0 A

0.4 million

0.3 million

1.0 A

0.8 million

0.6 million

0.5 A

1.5 million

1.0 million

5.0 A

0.1 million

0.1 million

3.0 A

0.2 million

0.2 million

2.0 A

0.4 million

0.3 million

1.0 A

0.8 million

0.6 million

0.5 A

1.5 million

1.0 million

48 VDC

230 VAC

11-94

Current


Digital Electronic Modules 11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0) Resistive load

Voltage

Current

Operating cycles (typ.) Normally open contact

Operating cycles (typ.) Normally closed contact

For inductive load in 24 VDC accordance with IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/ AC15

2.0 A

0.1 million

0.1 million

1.0 A

0.2 million

0.2 million

0.5 A

0.5 million

0.5 million

48 VDC

2.0 A

0.07 million

0.05 million

1.0 A

0.15 million

0.1 million

0.5 A

0.4 million

0.25 million

48 VAC

1.0 A

0.5 million

0.3 million

60 VAC

1.0 A

0.5 million

0.3 million

120 VAC

2.0 A

0.1 million

0.1 million

1.0 A

0.3 million

0.1 million

0.5 A

0.9 million

0.6 million

0.1 A

1.5 million

1.0 million

2.0 A

0.1 million

0.1 million

1.0 A

0.5 million

0.3 million

0.5 A

0.9 million

0.6 million

0.1 A

1.0 million

1.0 million

230 VAC


11-95


11-96


Analog electronic modules 12.1

12.1

12

Introduction

Analog electronic module range The range of analog electronic modules (EM) includes modules for measuring voltages and currents. For time-critical measuring of voltage and current, you can use the HIGH SPEED modules. The HIGH FEATURE modules provide a higher resolution and greater accuracy. There are also modules available for connecting thermocouples and resistance thermometers or resistors. Modules for connecting loads/actuators to current and voltage outputs complete the range.

12.2

12.2.1

12.2

Analog value representation

Overview

Electronic modules with analog inputs You can use electronic modules with analog inputs to record, evaluate, and convert continuously changing signals to digital values that you can process further. Examples of such continuously changing signals are those that occur when measuring temperature or pressure.

Electronic modules with analog outputs The electronic modules with analog outputs allow digitized values that are input by means of a controller to be converted in an analog output module to a corresponding analog signal (current or voltage) to control actuators (setpoint input for speed controllers, temperature controllers, etc.).


12-1

Analog electronic modules 12.2 Analog value representation

Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled The rules and additions outlined below apply to the following measuring ranges: • V to 5 V, 4 mA to 20 mA • Temperature sensor Pt xxx Standard and Climatic, Ni xx Standard and Climatic, Cu 10 Standard and Climatic • Thermocouple type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, C, T The following additions and rules apply: Table 12-1 Format

Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled Parameter assignment

Measured values Decimal

S7

Explanation

Hexadecimal

•

Enable "Wire break" diagnostics (at 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1

32767

7FFFH

•

"Open circuit" diagnostic message

•

"Wire break check" enabled (in the case of TC)

32767

7FFFH

•

"Open circuit" diagnostic message

•

"Wire break" diagnostics disabled (at 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1 "Overflow/underflow" enabled

-32767

8000H

•

Measured value after leaving the underrange "Lower limit value violated" diagnostic message

"Wire break" diagnostics disabled (at 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1 "Overflow/underflow" disabled

-32767

8000H

•

Measured value after leaving the underrange

"Wire break check" disabled (in the case of TC)

---

---

•

Open input: undefined measured value

• • • •

•

Measuring range limits for detection of wire break/underrange: 1 to 5 V: for 0, 296 V 4 to 20 mA: for 1,185 mA

1

12.2.2

Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7

Analog value representation The digitized analog value for input and output values is the same in the same rated range. Analog values are represented in twos complement. The following table shows the analog value representation of the analog electronic modules. Table 12-2

Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format)

Resolution

Analog value

Bit number

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

Significance of the bits

S

214

213

212

211

210

29

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

12-2



Sign The sign (S, +/-) of the analog value is always in bit number 15: • "0" → + • "1" → –

Measured-value resolution In the table below, you will find the representation of the binary analog values and the associated decimal and hexadecimal representation of the units of the analog values. The following table shows the resolutions 11, 12, 13, and 15 bits + sign. Each analog value is entered in the accumulator with left justification. The bits marked "x" are set to "0". Table 12-3

Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format)

Resolution in bits

Units

Analog value

Decimal

Hexadecimal

High byte

Low byte

11+ sign (S)

16

10H

S0000000

001xxxx

12 + sign (S)

8

8H

S0000000

0001xxx

13 + sign (S)

4

4H

S0000000

00001xx

15 + sign (S)

1

1H

S0000000

0000001

Note This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values are the result of a conversion in the analog electronic module.

Note The following applies to temperature measurements: In the overrange and underrange, the gradient of the characteristic curve at the point where the linearized rated range is left is retained.


12-3


12.2.3

Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage, current, and resistance-type sensors

Introduction The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The binary representation of the analog values is always the same, so these tables only compare the measuring ranges and the units.

Measuring ranges for voltage: ± 80 mV, ± 2.5 V, ± 5 V, ± 10 V Table 12-4

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges ±80 mV, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, and ±10 V

Measuring range ± 80 mV

Measuring range ± 2.5 V

Measuring range ± 5 V

> 94,071 94,071 : 80,003 80,000 60,000 : - 60,000 - 80,000 - 80,003 : - 94,074 < - 94,074

> 2,9397 2,9397 : 2,5001 2,5 1,86 : - 1,86 - 2,50 - 2,5001 : - 2,9397 < - 2,9397

> 5,8794 5,8794 : 5,0002 5,00 3,75 : - 3,75 - 5,00 - 5,0002 : - 5,8796 < - 5,8796

Measuring range ± 10 V > 11,7589 11,7589 : 10,0004 10,00 7,50 : - 7,50 - 10,00 - 10,0004 : - 11,759 < - 11,759

Decimal

Units Hexadecimal

32767 32511 : 27649 27648 20736 : -20736 -27648 -27649 : -32512 -32768

7FFF H 7EFFH : 6C01H 6C00H 5100H : AF00H 9400H 93FFH : 8100H 8000H

Range

Overflow Overrange

Rated range

Underrange Underflow

Measuring ranges for voltage and current: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA Table 12-5

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

Measuring range 1 to 5 V > 5,704 5,704 : 5,000145 5,000 4,000 : 1,000 0,999855 : 0,296 < 0,296

12-4

Measuring range 0 to 20 mA > 23,5178 23,5178 : 20,0007 20,0000 15,0000 : 0,0000 Negative values not possible

Measuring range 4 to 20 mA > 22,8142 22,8142 : 20,0005 20,0000 16,0000 : 4,0000 3,9995 . 1,1852 < 1,1852

Decimal 32767 32511 : 27649 27648 20736 : 0 -1 : -4864 -32768

Units

Hexadecimal 7FFFH 7EFFH : 6C01H 6C00H 5100H : 0H FFFFH : ED00H 8000H

Range Overflow Overrange

Rated range




Measuring range for current: ± 20 mA Table 12-6

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range ± 20 mA

Measuring range ± 20 mA

Range

Units Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 23,5150

32767

7FFFH

23,5150

32511

7EFFH

:

:

:

20,0007

27649

6C01H

20,0000

27648

6C00H

14,9980

20736

5100H

:

:

:

- 14,9980

-20736

AF00H

- 20,0000

-27648

9400H

- 20,0007

-27649

93FFH

:

:

:

- 23,5160

-32512

8100H

< - 23,5160

-32768

8000H

Overflow Overrange

Rated range


Measuring ranges for resistance-type sensors: 150 Ω, 300 Ω, 600 Ω, 3000 Ω Table 12-7

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 150 Ω, 300 Ω, 600 Ω, 3000 Ω

Measuring range 150 Ω




Range

Decimal

> 176.38

> 352,77

> 705,53

> 3527,67

32767

7FFFH

176,38

352,77

705,53

3527,67

32511

7EFFH

Units Hexadecimal

:

:

:

:

:

:

150,005

300,01

600,02

3000,11

27649

6C01H

150,00

300,00

600,00

3000,00

27648

6C00H

112,50

225,00

450,00

2250,00

20736

5100H

:

:

:

:

:

:

0,00

0,00

0,00

0,00

(Negative values not physically possible)

0

0H

-1

FFFFH

:

:

-4864

ED00H

-32768

8000H

Overflow Overrange

Rated range

Underrange* Underflow*

* If the resistors are connected incorrectly


12-5


12.2.4

Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for resistance thermometer

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Standard Table 12-8

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F

Pt x00 Standard in °C (1 digit = 0.1°C)

Pt x00 Standard in °F (1 digit = 0.1 °F)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 1000,0

32767

7FFFH

> 1832,0

32767

7FFFH

1000,0 :

10000

2710H

1832,0

18320

4790H

:

:

:

:

:

850,1

8501

2135H

1562,1

15621

3D05H

850,0

8500

2134H

1562,0

15620

3D04H

Units

Range

Units

:

:

:

:

:

:

-200,0

-2000

F830H

-328,0

-3280

F330H

-200,1

-2001

F82FH

-328,1

-3281

F32FH

:

:

:

:

:

:

-243,0

-2430

F682H

-405,4

-4054

F02AH

< - 243,0

-32768

8000H

< - 405,4

-32768

8000H

Overflow Overrange

Rated range


Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Climatic Table 12-9

SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F

Pt x00 Climatic in °C (1 digit = 0.01°C)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 155,00

32767

155,00 :

12-6

Pt x00 Climatic in °F (1 digit = 0.01 °F)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

7FFFH

> 311,00

32767

7FFFH

15500

3C8CH

311,00

31100

797CH

:

:

:

:

:

130,01

13001

32C9H

266,01

26601

67E9H

130,00

13000

32C8H

266,00

26600

67E8H

Units

Range

Units

:

:

:

:

:

:

-120,00

-12000

D120H

-184,00

-18400

B820H

-120,01

-12001

D11FH

-184,01

-18401

B81FH

:

:

:

:

:

:

-145,00

-14500

C75CH

-229,00

-22900

A68CH

< - 145,00

-32768

8000H

< - 229,00

-32768

8000H

Overflow Overrange

Rated range




Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Standard Table 12-10 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F Ni x00 Standard in °C (1 digit = 0.1°C)

Ni x00 Standard in °F (1 digit = 0.1 °F)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 295,0

32767

7FFFH

> 563,0

32767

7FFFH

295,0 :

2950

B86H

563,0

5630

15FEH

:

:

:

:

:

250,1

2501

9C5H

482,1

4821

12D5H

250,0

2500

9C4H

482,0

4820

12D4H

Units

Range

Units

:

:

:

:

:

:

-60,0

-600

FDA8H

-76,0

-760

FD08H

-60,1

-601

FDA7H

-76,1

-761

FD07H

:

:

:

:

:

:

-105,0

-1050

FBE6H

-157,0

-1570

F9DEH

< -105,0

-32768

8000H

< -157,0

-32768

8000H

Overflow Overrange

Rated range


Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Climatic Table 12-11 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F Ni x00 Climatic in °C (1 digit = 0,01°C)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Ni x00 Climatic in °F (1 digit = 0.01 °F)

Decimal

Hexa decimal

> 295,00

32767

7FFFH

> 325,11

32767

7FFFH

295,00 :

29500

733CH

327,66

32766

7FFEH

:

:

:

:

:

250,01

25001

61A9H

280,01

28001

6D61H

250,00

25000

61A8H

280,00

28000

6D60H

Units

Range

Units

:

:

:

:

:

:

-60,00

-6000

E890H

-76,00

-7600

E250H

-60,01

-6001

E88FH

-76,01

-7601

E24FH

:

:

:

:

:

:

-105,00

-10500

D6FCH

-157,00

-15700

C2ACH

< - 105,00

-32768

8000H

< - 157,00

-32768

8000H


Overflow Overrange

Rated range


12-7


Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Standard Table 12-12 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Standard in °C und °F Cu 10 Standard in °C (1 digit = 0.1°C)

Cu 10 Standard in °F (1 digit = 0.1 °F)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 312,0

32767

7FFFH

> 593,6

32767

7FFFH

312,0 :

3120

C30H

593,6

5936

1730H

:

:

:

:

:

260,1

2601

A29H

500,1

5001

12D5H

260,0

2600

A28H

500,0

5000

1389H

Units

Range

Units

:

:

:

:

:

:

-200,0

-2000

F830H

-328,0

-3280

F330H

-200,1

-2001

F82FH

-328,1

-3281

F32FH

:

:

:

:

:

:

-240,0

-2400

F6A0H

-400,0

-4000

F060H

< - 240,0

-32768

8000H

< - 400,0

-32768

8000H

Overflow Overrange

Rated range


Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic Table 12-13 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Climatic in °C und °F Cu 10 Climatic in °C (1 digit = 0.01°C)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 180,00

32767

180,00

18000

12-8

Cu 10 Climatic in °F (1 digit = 0.01° F)

Decimal

Hexadecimal

7FFFH

> 325,11

32767

7FFFH

4650H

327,66

32766

7FFEH

Units

Range

Units

:

:

:

:

:

:

150,01

15001

3A99H

280,01

28001

6D61AH

150,00

15000

3A98H

280,00

28000

6D60H

:

:

:

:

:

:

-50,00

-5000

EC78H

-58,00

-5800

E958H

-50,01

-5001

EC77H

-58,01

-5801

E957H

:

:

:

:

:

:

-60,00

-6000

E890H

-76,00

-7600

E250H

< - 60,00

-32768

8000H

< - 76,00

-32768

8000H

Overflow Overrange

Rated range




12.2.5

Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for thermocouples

Measuring range for thermocouple: Type B Table 12-14 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type B in °C and °F Type B in °C

Type B in °F

Units Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 2070,0

32767

7FFFH

2070,0

20700

:

:

1820,1 1820,0

Range

Units Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 3276,6

32767

7FFFH

50DCH

3276,6

32766

7FFEH

:

:

:

:

18201

4719H

2786,6

27866

6CDAH

18200

4718H

2786,5

27865

6CD9H

:

:

:

:

:

:

0,0

0

0000H

32

320

0140H

-0,1

-1

FFFFH

31,9

319

013FH

:

:

:

:

:

:

-120,0

-1200

FB50H

-184,0

-1840

F8D0H

< -120,0

-32768

8000H

< -184,0

-32768

8000H

Overflow Overrange

Rated range


Measuring range for thermocouple: Type C Table 12-15 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type C in °C and °F Type C in °C

Type C in °F

Units Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 2500,0

32767

7FFFH

2500,0

25000

:

:

2315,1

23151

5A6FH

2315,0

23150

5A6EH

Range

Units Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 3276,6

32767

7FFFH

61A8H

3276,6

32766

7FFEH

:

:

:

:

2786,6

27866

6CDAH

2786,5

27865

6CD9H

:

:

:

:

:

:

0,0

0

0000H

32,0

320

0140H

0,1

-1

FFFFH

31,9

319

013FH

:

:

:

:

:

:

-120,0

-1200

FB50H

-184,0

-1840

F8D0H

< -120,0

-32768

8000H

< -184,0

-32768

8000H


Overflow Overrange

Rated range


12-9


Measuring range for thermocouple type E Table 12-16 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type E in °C and °F Type E in °C

> 1200,0 1200,0 : 1000,1 1000,0 : -270,0 < -270,0

Decimal 32767 12000 : 10001 10000 : -2700 - 32768

Units

Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2EE0H : 2711H 2710H : F574H 8000H

Type E in °F

> 2192,0 2192,0 : 1832,1 1832,0 : -454,0 < -454,0

Units Decimal Hexadecimal 32767 7FFFH 21920 55A0H : : 18321 4791H 18320 4790H : : -4540 EE44H - 32768 8000H

Range

Overflow Overrange

Rated range Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple type J Table 12-17 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type J in °C and °F Type J in °C

> 1450,0 1450,0 : 1200,1 1200,0 : -210,0 < -210,0

Decimal 32767 14500 : 12010 12000 : -2100 - 32768

Units

Hexadecimal 7FFFH 38A4H : 2EEAH 2EE0H : F7CCH 8000H

Type J in °F

> 2642,0 2642,0 : 2192,1 2192,0 : -346,0 < -346,0

Units Decimal Hexadecimal 32767 7FFFH 26420 6734H : : 21921 55A1H 21920 55A0H : : -3460 F27CH - 32768 8000H

Range

Overflow Overrange


Measuring range for thermocouple type K Table 12-18 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type K in °C and °F Type K in °C

> 1622,0 1622,0 : 1372,1 1372,0 : -270,0 < -270,0

12-10

Decimal 32767 16220 : 13721 13720 : -2700 - 32768

Units Hexa-decim al 7FFFH 3F5CH : 3599H 3589H : F574H 8000H

Type K in °F

> 2951,6 2951,6 : 2501,7 2501,6 : -454,0 < -454,0

Units Decimal Hexa-deci mal 32767 7FFFH 29516 734CH : : 25062 61B9H 61B8H 25061 : : -4540 EE44H - 32768 8000H

Range

Overflow Overrange




Measuring range for thermocouple type L Table 12-19 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type L in °C and °F Type L in °C

> 1150,0 1150,0 : 900,1 900,0 : -200,0 < -200,0

Decimal 32767 11500 : 9001 9000 : -2000 -32768

Type L in °F

Units

Hexadecimal 7FFFH 2CECH : 2329H 2328H : F830H 8000H

> 2102,0 2102,0 : 1652,1 1652,0 : -328,0 < -328,0

Units Decimal Hexadecimal 32767 7FFFH 21020 521CH : : 16521 4089H 16520 4088H : : -3280 F330H -32768 8000H

Range

Overflow Overrange


Measuring range for thermocouple type N Table 12-20 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type N in °C and °F Type N in °C

> 1550,0 1550,0 : 1300,1 1300,0 : -270,0 < -270,0

Decimal 32767 15500 : 13001 13000 : -2700 -32768

Type N in °F

Units

Hexadecimal 7FFFH 3C8CH : 32C9H 32C8H : F574H 8000H

> 2822,0 2822,0 : 2372,1 2372,0 : -454,0 < -454,0

Units Decimal Hexadecimal 32767 7FFFH 28220 6E3CH : : 23721 5CA9H 23720 5CA8H : : -4540 EE44H -32768 8000H

Range

Overflow Overrange


Measuring range for thermocouple types R, S Table 12-21 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type R, S in °C and °F Types R, S in °C

> 2019,0 2019,0 : 1769,1 1769,0 : -50,0 -50,1 : -170,0 < -170,0

Decimal 32767 20190 : 17691 17690 : -500 -510 : -1700 -32768

Units

Hexadecimal 7FFFH 4EDEH : 451BH 451AH : FE0CH FE0BH : F95CH 8000H

Types R, S in °F


> 3276,6 3276,6 : 3216,3 3216,2 : -58,0 -58,1 : -274,0 < -274,0

Units Decimal Hexadecimal 32767 7FFFH 32766 7FFEH : : 32163 7DA3H 7DA2H 32162 : : -580 FDBCH -581 FDBBH : : -2740 F54CH -32768 8000H

Range

Overflow Overrange

Rated range


12-11


Measuring range for thermocouple type T Table 12-22 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type T in °C and °F Type T in °C

Type T in °F

Units Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 540,0

32767

7FFFH

540,0

5400

:

:

400,1

4001

0FA1H

400,0

4000

0FA0H

Range

Units Decimal

Hexadecimal

> 1004,0

32767

7FFFH

1518H

1004,0

10040

2738H

:

:

:

:

752,1

7521

1DC1H

752,0

7520

1D60H

:

:

:

:

:

:

-270,0

-2700

F574H

-454,0

-4540

EE44H

< -270,0

-32768

8000H

< -454,0

-32768

8000H

12.2.6

Overflow Overrange


Output ranges of the analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage and current

Output modules for voltage and current: ± 5V; ± 10V; ± 20mA Table 12-23 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges ± 5 V; ± 10 V; ± 20 mA Output range ± 5 V

12-12

Output range ± 10 V

Output range ± 20 mA

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Range

Units

0

0

0

> 32511

> 7EFFH

5,8800

11,7589

23,5150

32511

7EFFH

:

:

:

:

:

5,0002

10,0004

20,0007

27649

6C01H

5,0000

10,0000

20,0000

27648

6C00H

3,7500

7,5000

14,9980

20736

5100H

:

:

:

:

:

- 3,7500

- 7,5000

- 14,9980

-20736

AF00H

- 5,0000

- 10,0000

- 20,0000

-27648

9400H

- 5,0002

- 10,0004

- 20,0007

-27649

93FFH

:

:

:

:

:

- 5,8800

- 11,7589

- 23,5160

-32512

8100H

0

0

< - 23,5160

< -32512

< 8100H

Overflow Overrange Rated range



Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing

Output modules for voltage and current: 1 to 5 V; 4 to 20 mA Table 12-24 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 1 to 5V; 4 to 20mA

12.3

12.3.1

12.3

Output range Up to 5 V

Output range Up to 20 mA

Range

Decimal

Hexadecimal

0

0

> 32511

> 7EFFH

5,7000

22,8100

32511

7EFFH

:

:

:

:

5,0002

20,0005

27649

6C01H

5,0000

20,0000

27648

6C00H

Units

:

:

:

:

1,0000

4,0000

0

0H

0,9998

3,9995

-1

FFFFH

:

:

:

:

0

0

-6912

E500H

0

0

< -6913

< E4FFH

Overflow Overrange

Rated range


Fundamentals of analog value processing

Connecting measuring sensors

Introduction You can connect different measuring sensors to the analog input modules, depending on the type of module involved: • Voltage sensor • Current sensors as: – 2-wire measuring transducer – 4-wire measuring transducer • Resistance-type sensor In this chapter you will find out how to connect the measuring sensors and what to watch for when doing so.


12-13


Lines for analog signals You should use shielded and twisted-pair lines for the analog signals. This reduces the effect of interference. You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends of the line. If there are differences in potential between the ends of the line, a compensating current flows via the shield that can interfere with the analog signals. If this is the case, you should only ground the shield at one end of the line.

Analog input modules In the case of the analog input modules there is electrical isolation: • Between the logic circuitry and backplane bus • Between the load voltage and the channels. The following differences exist: – No isolation: Link between MANA and central grounding point – Isolation: No link between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO)

Analog output modules In the case of the analog output modules there is generally electrical isolation: • Between the logic circuitry and backplane bus • Between the load voltage and MANA.

Note Ensure that this potential difference UISO does not exceed the permitted value. If there is a possibility of exceeding the permitted value, make a connection between terminal MANA and the central grounding point.

Connecting measuring sensors to analog inputs Between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA there can be only a limited potential difference UCM (common-mode voltage). To ensure that the permitted value is not exceeded, you must take different steps depending on the whether the sensors are isolated or non-isolated. The steps you have to take are described in this chapter. Generally speaking, however, when connecting two-wire measuring transducers for current measurement and when connecting resistance-type sensors, you should not make a connection from M- to MANA. This also applies to inputs that have been assigned parameters correspondingly but unused.

Note For the analog input modules 2AI U, 2AI RTD, and 2AI TC, you must short-circuit unused analog inputs.

12-14



Abbreviations used The meanings of the abbreviations in the figures below are as follows: M+

Measuring line (positive)

M-

Measuring line (negative)

MANA

Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit

M

Frame connection

L+

Rated load voltage 24 VDC

UCM

Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the measuring circuit MANA

UISO

Potential difference between MANA and central grounding point

Isolated measuring sensors The isolated measuring sensors are not connected to the local ground potential. They can be floating. Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA. To ensure that the permitted value for UCM is not exceeded in environments with strong EMC interference, the following applies: • In the case of the analog input modules 2AI U, 2AI I 4WIRE, and 2AI TC: Connect Mwith MANA! • When connecting two-wire measuring transducers for current measurement and when connecting resistance-type sensors, you must not connect M- to MANA.


12-15

Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing The following figure illustrates the connection of isolated measuring sensors to the floating analog input modules. Connection of isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module: / 0 0 0 0 0

6

8&0

1 $'8

2

0$1$

5 8,62

3

4

①

Logic

②

Backplane bus

③

Ground bus

④

Central grounding point

⑤

Recommended connection

⑥

Isolated measuring sensors

Non-isolated measuring sensors The non-isolated measuring sensors are connected to the local ground potential. You must connect MANA to the ground potential. Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed measuring points. If the permitted value for UCM is exceeded, there must be equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points. The following figure illustrates the connection of non-isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module.

12-16


Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing Connection of non-isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module: / 0 0 0

5

0 0 8&0

1 $'8

2

0$1$

4 8,62

3

①

Logic

②

Backplane bus

③

Ground bus

④

Equipotential bonding conductor

⑤

Non-isolated measuring sensors

Operating four-wire measuring transducers on an external voltage supply If there is isolation between the output and the supply of the measuring transducer, you can connect it to the 2AI I 4WIRE without additional connections. If there is no isolation between the output and the supply of the measuring transducer, you can connect it to the 2AI I 4WIRE only if the reference potential of the power supply voltages (24 VDC) is the same. If there is an increase in interference radiation, a connection between M- and MANA on the terminal module of the 2AI I 4WIRE is recommended.


12-17


12.3.2

Connecting thermocouples

Introduction This section contains additional information on connecting thermocouples.

Compensation of the reference junction temperature There are various ways of obtaining the reference junction temperature in order to get an absolute temperature value from the temperature difference between the reference junction and the measuring point. Table 12-25 Compensation of the reference junction temperature Option

Explanation

Reference junction parameters

No compensation

You record not only the temperature of the measurement point. The temperature of the reference junction (transition from Cu line to thermocouple line) also affects the thermo-electromotive force. The measured value is thus errored.

None

Use of a compensating box on the incoming lines of a single thermocouple

You compensate using a compensating box. The compensating box is the transition point from the Cu line to the thermocouple line. No further processing is necessary through the 2AI TC Standard.

None

Use of a Pt100 Climatic Range resistance thermometer to record the reference junction temperature (best method)

You can record the reference junction temperature using a resistance thermometer (Pt100 Climatic Range). Given appropriate parameter assignment, this temperature value in the ET 200S is distributed to the 2AI TC Standard modules and calculated in the modules together with the temperature value obtained for the measurement point.

The parameter assignment of the IM151-1 and the 2AI TC must be coordinated: • AI RTD Standard assigned parameters to the Pt100 climatic range at the correct slot; • AI TC ST: Reference junction : RTD; select reference junction number 1 • IM : Assignment of the reference junction to a slot with the 2AI RTD Standard; selection of a channel;

Number of reference junctions: 1 1 Internal compensation in the case of the 2AI TC High Feature

There is a temperature sensor in the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules. The temperature sensor reports the temperature of the terminals to the 2AI TC High Feature. This value is then calculated together with the measured value from the channel of the electronic module.

•

AI TC High Feature: Reference junction: yes

Extension to a reference junction The thermocouples can be extended from their connection point by means of equalizing lines to the reference junction (transition to Cu line) or the compensating box. The reference junction can also be an ET 200S terminal module. The equalization lines are made of the same material as the wires of the thermocouple. The incoming lines are made of copper. Ensure correct polarity when connecting.

12-18



Use of a compensating box The influence of the temperature on the reference junction of a thermocouple (for example, terminal boxes) can be adjusted with a compensating box. The compensating box contains a bridge circuit that is adjusted for a certain reference junction temperature (compensating temperature). You connect the thermocouples or their adjustment lines to the compensating box. The compensating box then forms the reference junction. If the actual reference temperature differs from the compensating temperature, the temperature-dependent bridge resistance changes. A positive or negative compensation voltage occurs that is added to the thermo-electromotive force. Compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0° C must be used for the compensation of the analog input modules. Please note: • The compensating box must be supplied on an isolated basis. • The power supply unit must have adequate interference filtering (by means of a grounded shielding winding, for example).


12-19


Compensation by means of a resistance thermometer at the 2AI RTD If thermocouples that are connected to the inputs of the 2AI TC have the same reference junction, compensate by means of a 2AI RTD. For both channels of the 2AI TC module, you can select "RTD" or "None" as the reference junction. If you select "RTD," the same reference junction (RTD channel) is always used for both channels. $,57'

$,7&

$EEUHYLDWLRQVXVHG 00HDVXULQJFDEOHSRVLWLYH 00HDVXULQJFDEOHQHJDWLYH ,&&RQVWDQWFXUUHQWFDEOHSRVLWLYH ,&&RQVWDQWFXUUHQWFDEOHQHJDWLYH

$,57'FRQILJXUHGIRU PHDVXULQJUDQJH3WFOLPDWH UDQJH

0 ,QVXODWHG WKHUPRFRXSOHVZLWK H[WHUQDOFRPSHQVDWLRQ E\PHDQVRIUHVLVWLYH WKHUPRPHWHU FRQQHFWHGWR$,57' FKDQQHO

Figure 12-1

12-20

0

0 0

,& ,&

Compensation by means of the 2AI RTD



Parameter assignment of the reference junction for the 2AI TC and the interface module You set the reference junctions for the 2AI TC electronic modules by means of the following parameters: Table 12-26 Reference junction parameters Parameters

Module


Value range

IM 151

Explanation This parameter allows you to assign a slot (none, 2 to 12 or 2 to 63) where the channel for measuring the reference temperature is located (calculation of the compensation value).

None, 2 to 12 (IM151-1 BASIC) None, 2 to 63 (IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE IM 151-1 STANDARD IM 151-1FO STANDARD)


IM 151

RTD at channel 0

This parameter allows you to set the channel (0/1) for measuring the reference temperature (calculation of the compensation value) for the assigned slot.

RTD at channel 1

Reference junction E0 and reference junction E1

AI TC

None, RTD

This parameter allows you to enable the use of the reference junction.

Reference junction number

AI TC

1

This parameter allows you to assign the reference junction (1) that contains the reference temperature (compensation value).

Example of assigning parameters of reference junctions Setup: For simplification, only RTD and TC modules are shown in the following figure: 5HIHUHQFH MXQFWLRQ 6ORW

$,7&

(

(

$,7&

(

(

(

(

(

(

$,7&

$,57'

&RPSHQVDWLRQYLD$,57'PRGXOHV

Figure 12-2

Example of assigning parameters of reference junctions


12-21

Analog electronic modules 12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing Relevant parameters to be set for the interface module: Parameters

Value


3


RTD at channel 0

(Relevant) parameters for 2AI RTD and 2AI TC: Slot

Parameters

Value

3 (2AI RTD)

Type/range of measurement E0

RTD-4L Pt100 Climatic

5 (2AI TC)

Reference junction E0

RTD


None


1


TC-EL Type...


(any)


RTD


RTD


1


TC-EL Type...

8 (2AI TC)

11 (2AI TC)


TC-EL Type...


None


RTD


1


(any)


TC-EL Type...

Non-isolated thermocouples When you use non-isolated thermocouples, you must comply with the permitted common-mode voltage.

12-22



12.3.3

Connecting unused channels of analog input modules

Rules Note the following when connecting unused channels: • Deactivate unused input channels during parameter assignment. • A deactivated channel always returns a value of 7FFFH. • In the case of the standard modules 2AI U, 2AI I 2WIRE, 2AI I 4WIRE, 2AI RTD Standard, 2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC Standard, and 2AI TC High Feature, the cycle time of the module is halved. • The cycle time remains unchanged for the 4AI I 2WIRE standard module. • In the case of the HIGH SPEED modules 2AI U, 2AI I 2WIRE, and 2AI I 4WIRE, the cycle time remains unchanged at 1 ms. • To adhere to the permissible potential differences (UCM), you must wire jumpers on the terminal module for the unused channels. This is necessary in the case of the following modules: Analog input module

TM terminal Channel 0 1

2

3

Channel 1 4

5

6

7

8

2AI U Standard

2AI RTD Standard, 2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC High Feature 2AI TC Standard

2AI U High Speed


12-23

Analog electronic modules 12.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems

12.4

12.4.1

Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems

12.4

Influence of supply voltage and operating state on analog input and output values

Principle The input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply voltage for electronic components/sensors and on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master). Table 12-27 How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) and the supply voltage L + Operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) Power on

Power on

Power off

12-24

RUN

STOP

-

Input value of the electronic module with analog inputs (evaluation possible in the CPU of the DP master)

Supply voltage L + to ET 200S (power module) L + applied

Output value of the electronic module with analog outputs

Process values

PLC values

7FFFH until the first conversion after switching on or after assigning parameters to the module

Until the first value output: • After switching on, a signal of 0 mA or 0 V is output • Dependent on the "Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP" parameter

L + not applied

7FFFH

-

L + applied

Process value

Dependent on the "Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP" parameter

L + not applied

7FFFH

-

L + applied

-

Dependent on the "Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP" parameter

L + not applied

-

-


Analog electronic modules 12.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems

12.4.2

Effect of the value range for the analog input

Principle The behavior of the electronic modules with analog inputs depends on where the input values are in the value range. Table 12-28 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog input value in the value range Measured value in

Input value in SIMATIC S7 format

Input value in SIMATIC S5 format

Rated range

Measured value

Measured value

Overrange/underrange

Measured value

Measured value

Overflow

7FFFH

End of the overrange +1 plus overflow bit

Underflow

8000H

End of the underrange -1 plus overflow bit

Before assigning parameters or in the case of incorrect parameter assignment1

7FFFH

7FFFH

1 The following applies to 2AI U Standard, 2AI I 2WIRE Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI RTD Standard, and 2AI TC Standard with product version 1: If you assign a parameter incorrectly and trigger the diagnostic message for a parameter assignment error (for example, wire break for measuring range ± 20 mA), the SF LED lights up on the module and you can evaluate the diagnostics. In this state, correct input values are delivered to the DP master.

12.4.3

Effect of the value range for the analog output

Principle The behavior of the electronic modules with analog outputs depends on where the output values are in the value range. The following table indicates this: Table 12-29 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output value in the value range Output value in

Output value in SIMATIC S5/S7 format

Rated range

Value from DP master

Overrange/underrange

Value from DP master

Overflow

0 signal

Underflow

0 signal

Before assigning parameters or in the case of incorrect parameter assignment1

0 signal

The following applies to 2AO U Standard, 2AO I Standard with product version 1: If the assigned substitute value is outside the nominal range, a diagnostic message for parameter error is entered and the SF LED lights up. In this state, the output values transmitted by the DP master are output at the analog output modules. 1


12-25

Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules

12.4.4

Use of the shield connection

Rules

12.5 12.5.1

To avoid interference with analog electronic modules, we recommend the following: • Use shielded cables for the sensors/actuators. • Apply the cable shields on the shield connection element. • Connect the shield connection to the ground bus.

12.5

Parameters for analog electronic modules

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST, 4AI I 2WIRE ST, and 2AI I 4WIRE ST

Overview Table 12-30 Parameters for analog input modules U, I Standard 2AI U Standard

2AI I 2WIRE 2AI I 4WIRE Standard Standard 4AI I 2WIRE Standard Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internal error) Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow Diagnostics: wire break2 Smoothing


Type/range of measurement

---

---

---

Type/range of measurement ---

---

---

1 2

Diagnostics: wire break1


Value range

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable None Weak Medium Strong Deactivated ± 5V Up to 5 V ± 10V Deactivated 2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA Deactivated 4 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA 4 WIRE: ±20 mA

Default setting

Applicability

Disable

Module

Disable

Module

Disable

Channel

None

Channel

± 10V

Channel

2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA

Channel

2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA

Channel

Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA Only in the measuring range 1 to 5 V


12-26



12.5.2

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF

Overview Table 12-31 Parameters for analog electronic modules U, I High Feature 2AI U High Feature


Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internal error)

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

---

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Channel

• • • •

None Weak Medium Strong

None

Channel


Smoothing


---

• • • •

Deactivated ± 5V 1 to 5 V ± 10V

± 10V

Channel

---


• • •

Deactivated 4 to 20 mA ± 20mA

4 to 20 mA

Channel

Interference frequency suppression

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

Run-time calibration

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

1

Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA



12-27


12.5.3

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, and 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

Parameters Table 12-32 Parameters for analog input modules U, I High Speed 2AI U High Speed



Value range

Default setting

Applicability


• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module


• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Channel

• • • •


None

Channel

---

Diagnostics: Wire break


Smoothing


---

---

• • • • •

Deactivated ±10 V ±5 V ±2,5 V Up to 5 V

± 10V

Channel

---


---

• • •

Deactivated 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA

Channel

---

---


• • • •

Deactivated 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA ± 20mA

4 to 20 mA

Channel

Note If you deactivate a channel of the HIGH SPEED module, you do not achieve any speed advantage on account of the measuring procedure used.


12-28



12.5.4

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST, and 2AI TC HF

Parameters Table 12-33 Parameters for analog input modules RTD, TC 2AI RTD Standard

2AI TC Standard

2AI TC High Feature

Value range

Default setting

Applicability


• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module


• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module


• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Channel

• • • •


None

Channel

• •

Celsius Fahrenheit

Celsius

Module

• •

None RTD

None

Channel

• •

None Yes (i.e. internal)

None

Channel

• •

None 1 to 8 (in the case of the IM151-1 STANDARD and IM151-1 FO STANDARD) 1 (in the case of the IM151-1 BASIC and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE)

None

Module

Deactivated 150 ohms 300 ohms 600 ohms Pt100 Climatic Ni100 Climatic Range Pt100 Standard Ni100 Standard

Pt100 Standard

Channel

Diagnostics: Wire break check1

Smoothing

Temperature unit ---

Reference junction ---

-----

Reference junction Reference junction --number

•


---

• • • • • • • •


12-29


---

2AI RTD Standard

2AI TC Standard Type/range of measurement

2AI TC High Feature

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

---

• • • • • • • • • • •

Deactivated Voltage ± 80 mV TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi) TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni) TC-EL type B (PtRh-PtRh) TC-EL type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) TC-EL type E (NiCr-CuNi) TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt) TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt) TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni) TC-EL type L (Fe-Cu-Ni)

TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)

Channel

Type/range of measuremen t

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Deactivated Voltage ± 80 mV TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi) TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni) TC-EL type B (PtRh-PtRh) TC-EL type C (WRe-WRe) TC-EL type N (NiCrSi-NiSi) TC-EL type E (NiCr-CuNi) TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt) TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt) TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni) TC-EL type L (Fe-Cu-Ni)

TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)

Channel

Only with thermocouples. A parameter assignment error occurs when the wire break diagnosis is enabled in the voltage measuring range. The module does not start up.

1

2

The wire break is only detected with constant-current lines.


12-30



12.5.5

Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module

Parameters Table 12-34 Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module Parameters

Value range

Default setting

Applicability

Group diagnosis

• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module


• •

Disable Enable

Disable

Module


• •

Disable1 Enable

Disable

Channel

Smoothing

• • • •


None

Channel

Temperature unit

• •

Celsius Fahrenheit

Celsius

Module

Type of measurement

• • • • •

Deactivated Four-conductor resistor Three-conductor resistor Two-conductor resistor Four-conductor thermal resistor Three-conductor thermal resistor Two-conductor thermal resistor

Four-conductor thermal resistor

Channel

Pt 0,003850 Pt 0,003916 Pt 0,003902 Pt 0,003920 Pt 0.003851 Ni 0,006180 Ni 0,006720 Ni 0.005000 Cu 0,00427)

Pt 0.003851

Channel

• • Temperature coefficient

• • • • • • • • •


12-31

Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules Parameters Measuring range

1

Value range • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 3000 Ω PTC Pt100 Climatic Ni100 Climatic Range Pt100 Standard Ni100 Standard Pt500 standard range Pt1000 standard range Ni1000 standard range Pt200 climatic range Pt500 climatic range Pt1000 climatic range Ni1000 climatic range Pt200 standard range Ni120 standard range Ni120 climatic range Cu10 climatic range Cu10 standard range Ni200 standard range Ni200 climatic range Ni500 standard range Ni500 climatic range

Default setting Pt100 Standard

Applicability Channel

Wire break diagnostic is disabled if - Type of measurement = "deactivated" or Measuring Range = "PTC" was assigned.

12-32



Type of measurement - temperature coefficient - measuring range The following table lists the temperature coefficients and measuring ranges you can set for each measurement type: Type of measurement Deactivated Four-conductor resistor Three-conductor resistor Two-conductor resistor Three-conductor thermal resistor

Temperature coefficient – –

– 150 Ω / 300 Ω / 600 Ω / 3000 Ω

– Pt 0.003850/ Pt 0.003916 / Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.003920 / Pt 0.0038511

150 Ω / 300 Ω / 600 Ω / 3000 Ω / PTC

Ni 0.0061801 / Ni 0.006720

Ni100 climatic range / NI100 standard range / Ni120 climatic range / Ni120 standard range / Ni200 climatic range / Ni200 standard range / Ni500 climatic range / Ni500 standard range / Ni1000 climatic range / Ni1000 standard range

Ni 0.005000

Ni 1000 climatic range2 Ni 1000 standard range2 Cu10 climatic range / Cu10 standard range

Cu 0.004271 Two-conductor thermal resistor Four-conductor thermal resistor

Measuring range

Pt100 climatic range / Pt100 standard range / Pt200 climatic range / Pt200 standard range / Pt500 climatic range / Pt500 standard range / Pt1000 climatic range / Pt1000 standard range

Pt 0.003850 / Pt 0.003916 / Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.003920 / Pt 0.003851

Pt100 climatic range / Pt100 standard range / Pt200 climatic range / Pt200 standard range / Pt500 climatic range / Pt500 standard range / Pt1000 climatic range / Pt1000 standard range

Ni 0.006180) / Ni 0.006720

Ni100 climatic range / Ni100 standard range / Ni120 climatic range / Ni120 standard range / Ni200 climatic range / Ni200 standard range / Ni500 climatic range / Ni500 standard range / Ni1000 climatic range / Ni1000 standard range

Ni 0.005000

Ni 1000 climatic range2 Ni 1000 standard range2 1 The default settings for the temperature coefficients are valid for Europe. 2 For LG-Ni 1000 sensors from Siemens Building Ltd (Landis & Stäfa)


12-33


Temperature coefficient

The correction factor for the temperature coefficient (α-value) specifies how much the resistance of a certain material changes when the temperature is raised by 1° C. The temperature coefficient depends on the chemical composition of the material. Only one value is used in Europe for each type of sensor (default value). Additional values enable you to make a sensor-specific setting for the temperature coefficient, therefore ensuring more accuracy.

See also

12.5.6

Connecting thermocouples (Page 12-18)

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST, 2AO I HF

Overview Table 12-35 Parameters for analog output modules U, I 2AO U Standard, 2AO I Standard, 2AO U High 2AO I High Feature Feature Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internal error) Diagnostics: --Short-circuit to M --Diagnostics: Wire break Reaction to CPU-/master-STOP Type/range of output

---

---

Type/range of output

Substitute value 1

Value range

Default setting

• Disable • Enable • Disable • Enable • Disable • Enable • Output de-energized • Substitute a value • Keep last value • Deactivated • 1 to 5 V • ± 10V • Deactivated • 4 to 20 mA • ± 20mA To 65535 (value range must be within the nominal range)

Applicability

Disable

Module

Disable

Channel

Disable

Channel

Output de-energized

Module

± 10V

Channel

4 to 20mA

Channel

±10V/ ±20V: 0 V Channel 4 to 20mA: 4 mA 1 to 5V: 1V 1 If there is no voltage going to the IM but the supply to the analog output modules continues, the substitute values that have been assigned parameters are output. Substitute values must be within the nominal range. You can assign as parameters values from -27648 to +27648 (in the case of parameter assignment by means of the device database file).


12-34



12.5.7

Parameter description for the analog electronic modules

Smoothing The individual measured values are smoothed by means of digital filtering. The smoothing can be adjusted in 4 steps, where the smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of the electronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. The greater the smoothing, the greater the time constant of the filter. The figures below show the step response for the different smoothing factors depending on the number of module cycles. ZHDNN

1RQHN

PHGLXPN

VWURQJN

6WHSUHVSRQVH

[ [

[

[

0RGXOHF\FOHV

Figure 12-3

Smoothing in the case of the 2AI U Standard, 2AI U High Feature, 2AI I 2WIRE Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature, 2AI RTD Standard, 2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC Standard, 2AI TC High Feature


12-35

Analog electronic modules 12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules ZHDNN

1RQHN

PHGLXPN

VWURQJN

6WHSUHVSRQVH

[ [

[

[

0RGXOHF\FOHV

Figure 12-4

Smoothing with 4AI I 2WIRE ST

ZHDNN

1RQHN

PHGLXPN

VWURQJN

6WHSUHVSRQVH

[

[

[

[

0RGXOHF\FOHV

Figure 12-5

Smoothing in the case of the 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

Interference frequency suppression The 2AI U High Feature and 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog input modules support the interference frequency suppression setting (50 Hz or 60 Hz) for the interface module. These HIGH FEATURE analog input modules also allow you to disable interference frequency suppression, thus enabling you to forego the setting on the interface module. If you disable interference frequency suppression, the conversion and cycle times become faster for these modules.

12-36


Analog electronic modules 12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)

Run-time calibration • 2AI U High Feature Run-time calibration can be enabled at module parameter assignment for the 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module to adjust for component drift due to changes in ambient temperature. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 250 ms. Calibration takes place each time the ambient temperature changes by 5 °C. • 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature Run-time calibration can be enabled at module parameter assignment for the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module to periodically adjust for the offset voltage drift of the A/D converter. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 200 ms. The accuracy limits of the module will be met without run-time calibration.

Reference junction, reference junction number See "Connecting thermocouples."


12.6

12.6

2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)


Features • 2 inputs for measuring voltage • Input ranges: ± 10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign ± 10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign 1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VSS AC


12-37

Analog electronic modules 12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 12-36 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG'$86WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 M+: Input signal "+"

&+

M-: Input signal "-"

&+

0

0

0

0

Mana: Ground of the module 9

0 DQD

0 DQD

$8;HJ3(

$

$

$8;HJ3(

9

$8;PXVWEH DVVLJQHGWR3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG$,86WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+"

&+

&+

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

M-: Input signal "-" Mana: Ground of the module 9

QF

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

QF

70(6DQG$,86WDQGDUG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 M+: Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"

&+

Mana: Ground of the module

&+

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

9

12-38


Analog electronic modules 12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG$,86WDQGDUG


&+

&+

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

$

$

QF $8; $8;

$

$

M-: Input signal "-" Mana: Ground of the module Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

9

$8; $8;

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


Figure 12-6

/ 3 3

$'8

9

0 $1$

0

Block diagram of the 2AI U Standard

Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight

15 x 81 x 52 Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules


No

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Shielded


Max. 200 m

12-39

Analog electronic modules 12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •

P1

24 VDC Yes

Isolation •


Yes

•

Between the channels and load voltage L+

Yes

•


No


Between the inputs and MANA (UCM)

2 VACSS

•

Between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO)

75 VDC/60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC



Max. 30 mA




Group error

Red "SF" LED

•


Yes Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel: •

Integration time can be assigned parameters

Yes

•

Interference frequency suppression in Hz

60

50

•

Integration time in milliseconds

16,7

20

•

Conversion time in ms

55

65

•

Cycle time in ms

Number of active channels per module x conversion time

•

Resolution (including overrange)

± 10 V/13 bits + sign ± 5 V/13 bits + sign 1 to 5 V/13 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 1%), (f1 = interference frequency)

12-40

• •

Common-mode interference (USS) Series-mode interference

min. 90 dB min. 70 dB

•

(peak interference value < nominal value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs

min. -50dB

Operational limit (over the entire temperature range, relative to the input range)

± 0,6%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C relative to input range)

±0,4%


Analog electronic modules 12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) Temperature error (with reference to the input range)

± 0.01%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input range)

±0,01%

Repeatability (in steady state at 25° C with reference to input range)

±0,05 %

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance •

Voltage

±5V/min. 100 kΩ 1 to 5 V/min.100 kΩ ±10V/min. 100 kΩ

Permitted input voltage (destruction limit)

35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 ms (pulse duty factor 1:20)

Smoothing of the measured values

Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time

12.7

12.7

2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0

Features • 2 inputs for measuring voltage • Input ranges: – ± 10 V, resolution 15 bits + sign – ± 10 V, resolution 15 bits + sign – 1 to 5 V, resolution 15 bits • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Permitted common-mode voltage between the channels 100 VAC


12-41

Analog electronic modules 12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 12-37 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH


&+


&+

0

0

0

0

QF

QF

$

$

$8;HJ3(

9

$8;HJ3(

9

$8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHG WR3(

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+"

&+


&+

0

0

0

0

QF

QF

QF

QF

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC. 9

70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH


&+

&+

0

0

0

0

QF

QF

9

12-42


Analog electronic modules 12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) View

Pin assignment

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"


Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC. &+ 0

&+ 0

0

0

QF

QF

QF

$

$

QF $8; $8;

$

$

9

$8; $8;

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


3 3

$'8

/

9

0 $1$

0

Figure 12-7

Block diagram of the 2AI U High Feature

Technical specifications Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight Supports isochronous operation Number of inputs Length of cable •

Shielded


Dimensions and weight 15 x 81 x 52 Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules No 2 Max. 200 m

12-43

Analog electronic modules 12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •

VDC

P1

Yes

Isolation •


Yes

•


Yes

•

Between the channels and PE

Yes

•


No



140 VDC/100 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC



Max. 53 mA




Group error

Red "SF" LED

•

Diagnostic functions readable (wire break diagnosis is not supported on the module.)

Yes

Analog value generation Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel •


Yes

•


60

50

No

•


16,67

20

7,5

•

Conversion time in ms – 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module

25 58,3

30 70

10 26

•

Cycle time in ms – 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module

75 175

90 210

30 78

•


± 10 V/15 bits + sign ± 5 V/15 bits + sign 1 to 5 V/15 bits

12-44


Analog electronic modules 12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 0.5%), (f1 = interference frequency) • •


Min. 100dB min. 90dB

•

peak interference value < rated value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs

min. -100dB

Operational limit (entire temperature range with reference to input range; calibration enabled1)

±0,1%

Operational limit (entire temperature range with reference to input range; calibration disabled)

±0,5%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range; calibration enabled1)

±0,05%

Temperature error (with reference to input range; calibration enabled1)

± 0.003%/K

Temperature error (with reference to input range; calibration disabled)

± 0.015%/K


±0,03%

Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range)

±0,01%


Voltage

± 10 V/min. 1 MΩ ± 5 V/min. 1 MΩ 1 to 5 V/min.1 MΩ


35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 ms



1Run-time

calibration can be enabled during module parameter assignment to adjust for component drift due to changes in ambient temperature. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 250 ms. Calibration takes place each time the ambient temperature changes by 5° C.


12-45

Analog electronic modules 12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)

12.8

12.8

2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)


Features • 2 inputs for measuring voltage • Input ranges: ± 10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign ± 5 V, resolution 13 bits + sign ± 2,5 V, resolution 13 bits + sign 1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Permitted common-mode voltage 100 VSS AC • Supports isochronous operation – Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms – Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed for the different terminal modules: Table 12-38 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed View

Pin assignment




&+


&+

0

0

0

0

QF

QF

$

$

$8;HJ3(

Mana: Ground of the module 9

$8;HJ3(

9

$8;PXVWEHDVVLJQHG WR3(

12-46


Analog electronic modules 12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0) View

Pin assignment 70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+"

&+


&+

0


0

9 0

0

QF

QF

QF

QF

70(6DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH



&+


&+

0

0

0

0

QF

QF

9

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Input signal "+" 70(6$DQG$,8+LJK)HDWXUH

M-: Input signal "-" Mana: Ground of the module

&+ 0

&+ 0

0

0

QF

QF

QF

$

$

QF $8; $8;


$

$

9

$8; $8;


12-47

Analog electronic modules 12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


3 3

$'8

/

0 $1$

9

0

Figure 12-8

Block diagram of the 2AI U High Speed

Technical specifications Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight



Yes

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Shielded



24 VDC

P1

Yes

Isolation •


Yes

•


Yes

•


No



100 VSS AC

•

Between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO)

75 VDC/60 VAC

Insulation tested

500 VDC


Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load)


12-48

Max. 35 mA Typ. 0.8 W


Analog electronic modules 12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts • Process interrupt Can be assigned parameters1 Diagnostic functions • Group error display Red "SF" LED • Diagnostic information can be displayed Possible2 Analog value generation Measuring principle Instantaneous value encoding Cycle time/resolution: • Conversion time in ms (per channel) 0,1 • Cycle time in ms (per module) 1 • Resolution (including overrange) ± 10 V/13 bits + sign ± 5 V/13 bits + sign ± 2,5 V/13 bits + sign 1 to 5 V/13 bits Suppression of interference, limits of error • Common mode interference (Ucm) < 100 > 70 dB VSS) Crosstalk between the inputs > 50 dB Operational limit ± 0,3% (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C ±0,2% with reference to input range) Temperature error (with reference to the ± 0.01%/K input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input ±0,01% range) Repeatability ±0,05% (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range) Data for selecting a sensor Input ranges (rated value)/input resistance • Voltage ± 10 V/min. 100kΩ ±5 V/min. 100 kΩ ±2.5 V/min. 100 kΩ 1 - 5 V/min. 100 kΩ Maximum input voltage for voltage input 50 V continuous, 100 V for max. 1 ms (pulse duty (destruction limit) factor 1:20) Connection of the sensors • For measuring voltage Possible Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 64 x cycle time Medium 128 x cycle time Strong 512 x cycle time 1 DPV1 only 2 Parameter assignment error Violation of lower limit value Violation of upper limit value Open circuit (only with 1 to 5 V) Process interrupt lost


12-49

Analog electronic modules 12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)

12.9

2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)

12.9

Order number 6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0

Features • 2 inputs for measuring current • Input range: 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 12-39 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG$,,6WDQGDUG


&+ 0


&+

Mana: Ground (of power module)

0 P$

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

$8;HJ3(

$

$

$8;HJ3(

P$

2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits.


12-50


Analog electronic modules 12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0) View

Pin assignment 70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG


&+

&+

0

0

M-: Input signal "-" Mana: Ground (of power module) P$

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF

2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits. Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 M+: Input signal "+"

&+ 0


&+


0 P$

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG$,,6WDQGDUG


&+

&+

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD QF

QF $8; $8;

$

$

$

$



$8; $8;


12-51


Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


3 3

/

$'&

9

0 $1$

0 &XUUHQW OLPLWLQJ

Figure 12-9

Block diagram of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard


15 x 81 x 52

Weight



No

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Shielded



24 VDC

P1

Yes

Power supply of the transmitters •

Yes


Yes, (destruction limit 35 mA per channel)

Isolation •


Yes

•


No

•


Insulation tested

No 500 VDC




12-52



Analog electronic modules 12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions •

Group error

Red "SF" LED

•



Measuring principle

Integrative



Yes

•


60

50

•


16,7

20

•


55

65

•

Cycle time in ms


•


4 to 20 mA/13 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) •

Series-mode interference (peak interference value < rated value of input range)

Min. 70 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs

Min. -50 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)

±0,6%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)

±0,4%

Temperature error (with reference to the input ± 0,005%/K range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range)

±0,01%


±0,05%


Current

4 to 20 mA/50 Ω

Permitted input current (destruction limit)

40 mA

Load of the two-wire measuring transducer

Max. 750 Ω




12-53

Analog electronic modules 12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)

12.10

12.10

Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0

Features • 4 inputs for measuring current • Input range: 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST for the different terminal modules: Table 12-40 Terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST View

Pin assignment 70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 2 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 6 Channel 2: Terminals 3 and 4 Channel 3: Terminals 7 and 8 M+: Input signal "+"

0 &+

&+

&+

0

0

0

0

0

0

M-: Input signal "–"

0


P$

&+

70(6$DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 2 Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 6 Channel 2: Terminals 3 and 4 Channel 3: Terminals 7 and 8 M+: Input signal "+"

0

&+

&+

&+ 0

0

0

0

P$


&+

0

0

$8;

$

$

$8;

$

$

$8;

12-54

M-: Input signal "–"

0

$8;


Analog electronic modules 12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)

%DFNSODQHEXV

Block diagram


(OHFWULFDO LVRODWLRQ $'&

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

, , , , 3 3

/

'&'&FRQYHUWHU 0 $1$

0

,QSXWFXUUHQW OLPLW

6KRUWFLUFXLW SURWHFWLRQ

Figure 12-10 Block diagram of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST


15 × 81 × 52

Weight



No

Number of inputs

4

Length of cable •

Shielded



P1



24 VDC Yes Yes Yes (approx. 200 mA for module)

Isolation •


•

Between the channels and load voltage L+ No

•


Insulation tested


Yes No 500 VDC

12-55

Analog electronic modules 12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0) Current consumption of the module • From the load voltage L+ (with sensor Max. 125 mA supply) Power dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions • Group error Red "SF" LED • Diagnostic functions readable Yes Analog value generation Measuring principle Integrative Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel: • Integration time can be assigned Yes parameters • Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60 50 • Integration time in milliseconds 16,7 20 • Cycle time per module in ms 33 40 • Resolution (including overrange) 4 to 20 mA/13 bits Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) • Series-mode interference Min. 70 dB (peak interference value < rated value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dB Operational limit ±0,4 % (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with ±0,3 % reference to input range) Temperature error (with reference to the input ± 0,003 %/K range) Linearity error (with reference to the input ±0,01 % range) Repeatability ±0,05 % (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range) Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance • Current 4 to 20 mA/25 Ω Permitted input current (destruction limit) Approx. 30 mA (limited electronically) Load of the two-wire measuring transducer Max. 750 Ω Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 16 x cycle time Strong 32 x cycle time

12-56


Analog electronic modules 12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)

12.11

2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)

12.11


Features • 2 inputs for measuring current • Current-limited sensor supply (90 mA) • Input ranges: 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits 0 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits • Supports isochronous operation – Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms – Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed for the different terminal modules: Table 12-41 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG


&+


&+

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

$8;HJ3(

$

$

$8;HJ3(

Mana: Ground (of power module) P$

P$




12-57

Analog electronic modules 12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0) View

Pin assignment 70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG


&+


&+

0

Mana: Ground (of power module) 2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits.

0 P$

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF


70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG


&+

&+

Mana: Ground (of power module) 2-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the measuring circuits.

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

P$

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG


&+

&+

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF

$

$

$8; $8;

12-58

$

$



$8; $8;



Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08; (76 EDFNSODQHEXV LQWHUIDFH FRQQHFWLRQ

3 3

/

$'&

9

0 $1$

0 &XUUHQWOLPLW

Figure 12-11 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed


15 x 81 x 52

Weight



Yes

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Shielded


Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)

24 VDC

•

P1

Yes

•


Yes, (destruction limit 35 mA per channel)

Isolation •


Yes

•

Between channels and load voltage L+

No

•


No


Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)







Max. 35 mA1 Typ. 0.8 W

12-59

Analog electronic modules 12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts •

Process interrupt

Parmeterizable2


Group error display

Red "SF" LED

•


Possible3 Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Instantaneous value encoding

Cycle time/resolution: •

Conversion time in ms (per channel)

0,1

•

Cycle time in ms (per module)

1

•


4 to 20 mA/13 bits 0 to 20 mA/13 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error Crosstalk between the inputs

> 50 dB


±0,3%


±0,2%

Temperature error (with reference to the input range)

± 0,01%/K


±0,01%


±0,05%

Sensor power supply outputs Number of outputs

2

Output voltage • With load

L+ (-2.5 V)

Output current • Rated value • Permitted range

90 mA (both channels) 0 mA to 90 mA


Yes, electronic Data for selecting a sensor

Input range (rated value/input resistance) •

Current

To 20 mA/50 Ω To 20 mA/50 Ω

Connection of the sensors •

12-60

For current measurement as two-wire transmitter

Possible


Max. 670 Ω

Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit)

60 mA


Analog electronic modules 12.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0) Smoothing of the measured values


1

Without sensor supply voltage

2

DPV only

Parameter assignment error Violation of lower limit value Violation of upper limit value Open circuit (only with 4 to 20 mA) Process interrupt lost

3

12.12

2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)

12.12


Features • 2 inputs for measuring current • Input ranges: – ± 20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign – to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits • Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VACSS


12-61


Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard for the different terminal modules: Table 12-42 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"

&+ 0

&+

0 0

0

9'&

0 DQD

ZLUH

DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer Mana: Ground (of power module)

P$

4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the module.

9'& 0 DQD

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG$,,:,5(6WDQGDUG


&+

&+

0

0

0

0

9'&

9'&

0 DQD

0 DQD

$

$

ZLUH

P$

$8; $8;

12-62

$

$

M-: Input signal "-" DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer Mana: Ground (of power module) 4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the module.

$8; $8;



Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


3 3

/

$'&

9

0 $1$

0 &XUUHQW OLPLWLQJ

Figure 12-12 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard


15 x 81 x 52

Weight



No

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Shielded



P1



24 VDC Yes Yes Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)

Isolation •


Yes

•


No

•


No

Insulation tested

500 VDC






12-63

Analog electronic modules 12.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions •

Group error

Red "SF" LED

•



Measuring principle

Integrative



•

Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60

50

•


16,7

20

•


55

65

•

Cycle time in ms


•


± 20 mA/13 bits + sign

Yes

4 to 20 mA/13 bits Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) •

Series-mode interference (peak interference value < rated value of input range)

Min. 70 dB


Min. -50 dB


±0,6%


±0,4%


± 0.005%/K


±0,01%

Repeatability ±0,05% (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range) Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance • Current ± 20 mA/50 Ω 4 to 20 mA/50 Ω Permitted input current (destruction limit) 40 mA Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time

12-64


Analog electronic modules 12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)

12.13

2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)

12.13

Order number 6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0

Features • 2 inputs for measuring current • Input ranges: – ± 20 mA, resolution 15 bits + sign – 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Permitted common-mode voltage between the channels 100 VAC • Supports two-wire or four-wire measuring transducers

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature for the different terminal modules: Table 12-43 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature View

Pin assignment 70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH

Remarks Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+ : Input signal "+" M-: Input signal "-"

ZLUH &+ 0

&+

ZLUHPHDVXULQJWUDQVGXFHU

0 P$

DC+ 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer DC -24V: Return circuit for measuring transducer supply

0

0

It is possible to supply four-wire measuring transducers by means of the module.

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

To support isolation between the channels, use an external supply to feed one of the measuring transducers.


12-65

Analog electronic modules 12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0) View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH $OWHUQDWLYHWHUPLQDODVVLJQPHQWIRU:,5(

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+ : Input signal "-" M- : Connect to 24 VDC

ZLUH &+

&+

DC+ 24V: Input signal "+"


0

0

0

0

9'&

9'&

9'&

9'&

2-wire measuring transducers are supplied by means of the measuring circuits. Mixing two-wire and four-wire measuring transducers is permitted.

P$

To support isolation between the channels, use an external supply to feed one of the measuring transducers. Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+ : Input signal "+"

&+

&+

0

0

0

0

$

$

$

$

9'& 9'& $8; $8;

ZLUH

M- : Input signal "-"


DC+ 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer DC -24V: Return circuit for measuring transducer supply

P$

It is possible to supply four-wire measuring transducers by means of the module.

9'&

To support isolation between the channels, use an external supply to feed one of the measuring transducers.

9'& $8; $8;

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK)HDWXUH $OWHUQDWLYHWHUPLQDODVVLJQPHQWIRU:,5(

&+

&+

0

0

0

0

9'&

9'& 9'&

9'& $8; $8;

12-66

$

$

$

$

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+ : Input signal "-"

ZLUH

M- : Connect to 24 VDC


DC+ 24V: Input signal "+"

P$

2-wire measuring transducers are supplied by means of the measuring circuits. Mixing two-wire and four-wire measuring transducers is permitted. To support isolation between the channels, use an external supply to feed one of the measuring transducers.

$8; $8;


Analog electronic modules 12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


3 3

/

$'&

0 $1$

9

0 &XUUHQW OLPLWLQJ

Figure 12-13 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature


15 x 81 x 52

Weight



No

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Shielded



P1



24 VDC Yes Yes Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)

Isolation •


Yes

•


Yes

•

Between the channels and PE

Yes

•


No




140 VDC/100 VAC (with isolated power supply of measuring transducers)

12-67

Analog electronic modules 12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0) Insulation tested

500 VDC



Max. 53 mA




Group error

Red "SF" LED

•



Measuring principle

Integrative



Yes

•


60

50

No

•


16,67

20

7,5

•

Conversion time in ms – 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module

25 58,3

30 70

10 26

•

Cycle time in ms – 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module

75 175

90 210

30 78

•


± 20 mA/15 bits + sign 4 to 20 mA/15 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±0.5%), (f1 = interference frequency) • •


Min. 100dB

peak interference value < rated value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs limit1

12-68

min. 90dB Min. -100 dB

Operational (over the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)

±0,1%

Basic error limit1 operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range

±0,05%


± 0,003%/K


±0,03%


±0,01%


Analog electronic modules 12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0) Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance •

Current

± 20 mA/50 Ω 4 to 20 mA/50 Ω

Permitted input current (destruction limit)

40 mA (on a single channel)


Max. 750 Ω



Run-time calibration can be enabled during module parameter assignment to periodically adjust for the offset voltage drift of the A/D converter. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 200 ms. The accuracy limits of the module will be met without run-time calibration. 1

12.14

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)

12.14


Features • 2 inputs for measuring current • Current-limited sensor supply (90 mA) • Input ranges: – 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits – 0 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits – ± 20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign • Supports isochronous operation – Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms – Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms


12-69


Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed for the terminal module. Table 12-44 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed View

Pin assignment

Remarks

70(6DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Input signal "+"

&+ 0

&+

M- : Input signal "-"

ZLUH

DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer

0


P$ 0

0

9'&

9'&

0 DQD

0 DQD

4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the module.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3 70(6$DQG$,,:,5(+LJK6SHHG


&+ 0

&+

0 0

0

9'&

0 DQD $8; $8;

12-70

$

$

$

$

ZLUH

P$

9'&

M- : Input signal "-" DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer Mana: Ground (of power module) 4-wire measuring transducer is supplied by means of the module.

0 DQD $8; $8;



Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

/

$'&

9

0 $1$

0 &XUUHQWOLPLW

Figure 12-14 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed


15 x 81 x 52

Weight



Yes

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Shielded



P1

24 VDC Yes

Isolation •


Yes

•

Between channels and load voltage L+

No

•


No


Between MANA and Minternal (UISO)







Max. 35 mA1 Typ. 0.8 W

12-71

Analog electronic modules 12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts •

Process interrupt

Can be assigned parameters2


Group error display

Red "SF" LED

•


Possible3 Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Instantaneous value encoding

Cycle time/resolution: •

Conversion time in ms (per channel)

0,1

•

Cycle time in ms (per module)

1

•


4 to 20 mA/13 bit 0 to 20 mA/13 bit ± 20 mA/13 bits + sign

Suppression of interference, limits of error Crosstalk between the inputs

> 50 dB


±0,3%


±0,2%


± 0,01%/K


±0,01%


±0,05%

Sensor power supply outputs Number of outputs

2

Output voltage • With load

L+ (-2.5 V)

Output current • Rated value • Permitted range

90 mA (both channels) 0 mA to 90 mA


Yes, electronic Data for selecting a sensor

Input range (rated value)/input resistance •

Current

4 to 20 mA/50 Ω 0 to 20 mA/50 Ω ±20 mA/50 Ω


For current measurement as two-wire transmitter

Possible


12-72

Max. 670 Ω


Analog electronic modules 12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit)

60 mA



1

Without encoder supply voltage

2

DPV1 only

Parameter assignment error Violation of lower limit value Violation of upper limit value Open circuit (only with 4 to 20 mA) Process interrupt lost

3

12.15

12.15

2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0

Features • 2 inputs for resistance thermometers or resistance measurement • Input ranges: – Resistance thermometers: Pt100, Ni100; resolution 15 bits + sign – Resistance measurement: 150 Ω; 300 Ω ; 600 Ω, resolution max. 15 bits + sign • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves

Pin assignment The resistance thermometers/resistors are measured in a four-conductor connection. Constant current is fed to the resistance thermometers/resistors by means of connections IC + and IC -. The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer/resistor is measured by means of the connections M + and M -. This ensures highly accurate measurement results with the four-conductor connection. With the two/three-conductor connection, you must apply corresponding jumpers to the module between M+ and Ic+ or M- and Ic- . However, you have to expect a loss of accuracy in the measurement results.


12-73

Analog electronic modules 12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0) The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard on the terminal module. Table 12-45 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG$,57'6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8 M+: Measuring line positive

&+

&+

0

0

0

0

, &

, &

, &

, &

IC-: Constant-current line negative ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH

M- : Measuring line negative IC+: Constant-current line positive


70(6$DQG$,57'6WDQGDUG

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7 M+: Measuring line positive IC-: Constant-current line negative

&+

&+

0

0

0

, &

, &

, &

, &

$

$

$

$

$8; $8;

ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH

M-: Measuring line negative IC+: Constant-current line positive

0

$8; $8;

Note A wire break in the measuring lines of the temperature sensors for three- or four-conductor connections (connections 1 and 2, or 5 and 6) is not detected. Undefined values can be reported.

12-74


Analog electronic modules 12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV


3 3

/

$'&

0 $1$

9

08; 0

Figure 12-15 Block diagram of the 2AI RTD Standard


15 x 81 x 52

Weight



No

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Shielded



P1

Power supply of the transmitters

24 VDC Yes Yes

•

Constant-current supply for resistance-type sensors

Approx. 1.5 mA

•


Yes

Isolation •


Yes

•


Yes

• between the channels Permissible potential difference • Between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO) Insulation tested Current consumption • From load voltage L+ Power dissipation of the module


No 75 VDC/60 VAC 500 VDC max. 30mA Typ. 0.6 W

12-75

Analog electronic modules 12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0) Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions •

Group error

•


Red "SF" LED Yes Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Integrative



Yes

•


60

50

•


16,7

20

•


110

130

•

Cycle time in ms


•


Pt100, Ni100/ 15 bits + sign 150 Ω/14 bits/ 300 Ω, 600 Ω/15 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) • •


Min. 90dB min. 70dB


Min. -50 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperature ±0,6% range, with reference to the input range) Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)

±0,4%


± 0.005%/K


±0,01%

Repeatability (in steady state at 25° C with ±0,05% reference to input range) Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance •

Resistance-type sensor

150 Ω/min. 2 MΩ 300 Ω/min. 2 MΩ 600 Ω/min. 2 MΩ

•

Resistance thermometers

Pt100/min. 2 MΩ Ni100/min. 2 MΩ


12-76

Max. 9 V


Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) Connection of the sensors •

For measuring resistance – Two and three-conductor connection –

Yes, line resistances are also measured, jumpers at TR Yes

Four-conductor connection

Characteristic curve linearization

Yes, parameters can be assigned for Pt100, Ni100


Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time

Medium 64 x cycle time Strong 128 x cycle time

12.16

2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)

12.16

Order number 6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0

Features • 2 inputs for resistance thermometers or resistance measurement • Input ranges – Resistance thermometers: Pt100; Ni100; Ni120; Pt200; Ni200; Pt500; Ni500; Pt1000; Ni1000; Cu10;resolution max. 15 bits + sign – Resistance measurement: 150 Ω; 300 Ω; 600 Ω; 3000 Ω; PTC; resolution max. 15 bits • Automatic compensation of line resistances in the case of a three-conductor connection • Temperature coefficient can be assigned parameters for resistance-type sensors • High degree of accuracy • Isolated from the load voltage • Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves • Parameter length 7 bytes • Permitted common-mode voltage 5 VACss • Recording of reference junction temperature (together with the 2AI TC Standard electronic module) • Compatible with the 2AI RTD Standard (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB50)


12-77

Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)

Note The EM 2AI RTD High Feature can replace a 2AI RTD Standard in an existing system. • The wiring does not have to be changed. The additional bridges on the terminal module of the 2AI RTD Standard do not have to be removed. • The configuration (in HW Config or the GSD file) does not have to be changed. Only the new functions of the 2AI RTD High Feature cannot be assigned parameters in this instance.

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature on the terminal modules. Table 12-46 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH


&+

&+

0

0

0

0

, &

, &

M-: Measuring line negative ZLUH

IC+: Constant-current line positive

ZLUH

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4 70(6$DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8 M+: Measuring line positive

&+

&+

0

0

0

0

, &

, &

$

$

$8;HJ3(

12-78

M-: Measuring line negative ZLUH

ZLUH


$8;HJ3(


Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) View

Pin assignment


70(6DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH


&+

&+

0

0

0

0

, &

, &

, &

, &

IC-: Constant-current line negative ZLUH

ZLUH

ZLUH

M-: Measuring line negative IC+: Constant-current line positive


70(6$DQG$,57'+LJK)HDWXUH


&+ 0 0 , & , & $8; $8;

IC-: Constant-current line negative

&+

$

$

$

$

ZLUH

ZLUH

M-: Measuring line negative

ZLUH


0 0 , & , & $8; $8;

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08;

3 3


/

$'&

9

0 $1$ 08;

0

Figure 12-16 Block diagram of the 2AI RTD High Feature


12-79


Technical specifications Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight Supports isochronous operation Number of inputs Length of cable • Shielded

Dimensions and weight 15 x 81 x 52 Approx. 40 g Data for specific modules No 2

Max. 200 m Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power 24 VDC module) • P1 Yes Power supply of the transmitters Yes • Constant-current supply for Approx. 1.25 mA resistance-type sensors • Short-circuit protection Yes Isolation • between the channels and backplane Yes bus • Between the channels and load Yes voltage L+ • between the channels No Permissible potential difference • Between MANA and the central 75 VDC/60 VAC grounding point (UISO) Insulation tested 500 VDC Current consumption • From load voltage L+ max. 30mA Power dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 W Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions • Group error Red "SF" LED • Diagnostic functions readable Yes Analog value generation Measuring principle Integrating (sigma-delta) Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel: • Integration time can be assigned Yes parameters • Interference frequency suppression in 60 50 Hz • Integration time in milliseconds 16,7 20 • Basic conversion time including 50 60 Integration time in milliseconds • Additional conversion time for wire 5 5 break check diagnosis in ms • Additional conversion time in ms for 50 60 line compensation in three-conductor connections • Cycle time in ms Number of active channels per module x conversion time • Resolution (including overrange) Pt 100; Ni 100; Ni120; Pt 200; Ni 200; Pt 500; Ni 500; Pt 1000; Ni 1000; Cu 10 / 15 bits + sign 150Ω; 300Ω; 600Ω; 3000Ω; / 15 bits PTC1 / 1 bit

12-80


Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) • Common-mode interference (USS) Min. 90dB • Series-mode interference min. 70dB peak interference value < rated value of input range) Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dB Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) • Resistance-type sensor ±0,1% • Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Standard ± 1.0K • Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Climatic ± 0.25K • Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000 ± 0.4K Standard and Climatic • Cu10 ± 1.5K Basic error limit for resistance-type sensors (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range) • Resistance-type sensor ±0,05% • Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Standard ± 0.6K • Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Climatic ± 0.13K • Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000 ± 0.2K Standard and Climatic • Cu10 ± 1.0K Temperature error (with reference to the ± 0.0009%/K input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input ±0,01% range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25° C with ±0,05% reference to input range) Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance • Resistance-type sensor 150 Ω/min. 10 MΩ 300 Ω/min. 10 MΩ 600 Ω/min. 10 MΩ 3000 Ω/min. 10 MΩ PTC min 10 MΩ • Resistance thermometers Pt100/min. 10 MΩ Ni100/min. 10 MΩ Ni120/min. 10 MΩ Pt200/min. 10 MΩ Ni200/min. 10 MΩ Pt500/min. 10 MΩ Ni500/min. 10 MΩ Pt1000/min. 10 MΩ Ni1000/min. 10 MΩ Cu10/min. 10 MΩ Permitted input voltage (destruction limit) Max. 9 V


12-81

Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) Connection of the sensors • For measuring resistance – 2-conductor connection – 3-conductor connection – 4-conductor connection Characteristic curve linearization Smoothing of the measured values

Yes, Yes, internal compensation of line resistances Yes Yes, can be assigned parameters for Ptxxx, Nixxx Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time 1In accordance with VDE 0660 Part 302/303, Type A

Use of Cu10 sensors • Select "Three-conductor thermal resistor" and "Cu10" at parameter assignment. • Wire the Cu10 sensor in accordance with the three-conductor connection method. • Automatic, internal compensation of line resistance for the missing measuring line occurs during operation.

Note Please note the following to ensure optimum line compensation in the case of Cu10: • The sum of the cable resistance and measurement resistance must not exceed 31 Ω. • The cable must have a resistance of no more than 8 Ω if you want to use the temperature range up to and above 312° C. Example: A 200 m Cu cable with a 0.5 mm2 conductor cross-section has approximately 7 Ω. A smaller cross-section shortens the permissible cable length accordingly.

12-82



Using PTC resistors PTCs are suitable for temperature monitoring and as thermal protective devices for complex drives and transformer windings. • Select "Two-conductor resistor" and "PTC" at parameter assignment: • Connect the PTC in accordance with the two-conductor connection method. • Apply PTC resistors of type A (PTC thermistors) in accordance with DIN / VDE 0660, Part 302. • Sensor data for the PTC resistor: Feature Switching points

Technical specifications

Remarks

Behavior with rising temperature < 550Ω

Normal range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

550Ω to 1650Ω

Prewarning range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "1" (in the PII)

> 1650Ω

Addressable range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "1", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

Behavior with rising temperature > 750Ω

Addressable range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "1", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

750Ω to 540Ω

Prewarning range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "1" (in the PII)

< 540Ω

Normal range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII) • SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

(TNF-5) °C

Max. 550 Ω

TNF= rated operating temperature

(TNF+5) °C

Min. 1330 Ω

(TNF+15) °C

Min. 4000 Ω

Measuring voltage

Max. 7.5 V

Voltage on the PTC

• Assignment in the process input image (PII) in the case of SIMATIC S7


12-83

Analog electronic modules 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) 7 6 0

IB x

5 4 3

0 0 0

2 1

0

between prewarning threshold: 1 and response threshold

IB x + 1

7 6

5 4 3

2 1

0

0 0 0

0 0

0

0

0

0: Measured resistance < response threshold 1: Measured resistance > response threshold 0 0

• Assignment in the process input image (PII) in the case of SIMATIC S5

,%[

between prewarning threshold: 1 and response threshold

,%[

0HDVXUHGUHVLVWDQFHUHVSRQVHWKUHVKROG 0HDVXUHGUHVLVWDQFH!UHVSRQVHWKUHVKROG

• Notes on programming

Notice Only the bits 0+2 or 3+5 are relevant for the purposes of evaluation in the process input image. You can use bits 0+2 or 3+5 to monitor the temperature of a motor, for example. Bits 0+2 or 3+5 in the process input image does not have a retentive function. Make sure at parameter assignment that motor start-up is controlled (by means of an acknowledgment), for example. Bits 0+2 or 3+5 cannot be set at the same time, but set one after the other. For security reasons, always evaluate the diagnostic inputs of the 2AI RTD High Feature because measurement is not possible when the EM is removed, when the power supply to the EM has failed, or in the event of a wire break or short-circuit of the measuring lines.

12-84


Analog electronic modules 12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)

Example The diagram below shows the temperature pattern and the switching points belonging to it.

7>r&@

1RUPDO UDQJH

12.17

12.17

3UHZDUQLQJ UDQJH

$GGUHVVDEOHUDQJH

3UHZDUQLQJ UDQJH

1RUPDO UDQJH

2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)

Order number 6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0

Features • 2 inputs for thermocouple or voltage measurement • Input ranges: – Voltage measurement: ± 80 mV, resolution 15 bits + sign – Thermocouples: Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, resolution 15 bits + sign • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves • Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VACSS


12-85


Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard for the different terminal modules: Voltage measurement as for 2AI U ST. Table 12-47 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG'$7&6WDQGDUG


&+

&+

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

$8;HJ3(

$

$

$8;HJ3(

M-: Measuring line negative Mana: Ground of the module


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4 70(6DQG$,7&6WDQGDUG


&+

&+

Mana: Ground of the module Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

QF

M-: Measuring line negative

70(6DQG$,7&6WDQGDUG

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3 Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7 M+: Measuring line positive M-: Measuring line negative

&+

12-86

&+

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD



Analog electronic modules 12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG'$7&6WDQGDUG


&+

&+

0

0

0

0

0 DQD

0 DQD

QF

$

$

QF $8; $8;

$

$

M-: Measuring line negative Mana: Ground of the module Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

$8; $8;

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


3 3

/

$'&

9

0 $1$

0

Figure 12-17 Block diagram of the 2AI TC Standard


15 x 81 x 52

Weight



No

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Shielded


Max. 50 m

12-87

Analog electronic modules 12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) •

24 VDC

P1

Yes

Isolation •


Yes

•


Yes

•


No

•

Between the channels and 24 V supply Yes voltage


Between MANA and the central grounding point (Uiso)

75 VDC/60 VAC

•


2 VACSS

Insulation tested

500 VDC



max. 30mA




Group error

Red "SF" LED

•



Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration time/conversion time/resolution per channel:

12-88

•


Yes

•


60

50

•


16,7

20

•

Basic conversion time including Integration time in milliseconds

55

65

•

Additional conversion time for wire break check diagnosis in ms

20

20

•

Cycle time in ms


•


15 bits plus sign


Analog electronic modules 12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) • •

Common-mode interference (USS) Series-mode interference (peak interference value < rated value of input range)

Min. 90 dB Min. 70 dB


Min. -50 dB

Operational limit (over the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range)1

±0,6%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)1

±0,4%


± 0,005%/K


±0,01%


±0,05%


Voltage

± 80 mV/min. 1 MΩ

•

Thermocouple

Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T/min. 1 MΩ


±10 V, continuous


For measuring voltage

Possible

Characteristic curve linearization

Yes, can be assigned parameters for type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T to IEC 584

Temperature compensation •

Internal temperature compensation

•

External temperature compensation by Possible, one external compensating box per channel looping a compensating box into the measuring circuit

•

External compensation by means of temperature value obtained at an analog module of the same ET 200S station


Not possible

Yes

Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of digital filtering Step Time constant None 1 x cycle time Weak 4 x cycle time

Medium 32 x cycle time Strong 64 x cycle time 1

for Type N: from -150°C, Typ B: from 200°C, Typ T: from -230°C


12-89


Compensation of thermocouples with a compensating box As well as the error limits of the 2AI TC Standard electronic module (see Table "Technical specifications" in this chapter) you must also take the accuracy of the compensating box into account.

Compensation of thermocouples with a Pt100 on the 2AI RTD Standard Factors affecting the accuracy of the temperature measurement Wiring rules

Ensure there is good thermal contact between the reference junction and the Pt100 used for compensation. We recommend that you wire the Pt100 with a four-conductor connection.

Additional technical specifications The accuracy of the thermal resistor (Pt100) used for on the error limits of the 2AI TC compensation must be taken into account.* The error of the measurement input (2AI RTD Standard) used for compensation must be taken into account.* * In the case of thermocouples with a characteristic curve with a very shallow gradient, these errors can lead to a major measurement discrepancy. For the following thermocouples, this causes a limitation of the input range of the thermocouples in which the accuracy information in the manual applies: • Type N: -100°C • Type K: -230°C • Type E: -230°C

See also 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) (Page 12-37)

12-90


Analog electronic modules 12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)

12.18

2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)

12.18

Order number 6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0

Features • 2 inputs for thermocouple or voltage measurement • Input ranges: – Voltage measurement: ± 80 mV, resolution 15 bits + sign – Thermocouples: Types E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C, resolution 15 bits + sign • 2AI TC High-Feature is inserted on the TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT • Isolated from the load voltage L+ • Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves • Permitted common-mode voltage 140 VDC/100 VAC • Internal reference junction in connection with TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT

Pin assignment The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature for the TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules Voltage measurement as for 2AI U ST. Table 12-48 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature View

Pin assignment


70(6$DQG$,7&+LJK)HDWXUH

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 6 M+: Measuring line positive M-: Measuring line negative

&+

&+

0

0

0

0


12-91

Analog electronic modules 12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)

Block diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

08;


3 3

/

$'&

9

0

0 $1$

,QWHUQDO UHIHU HQFH MXQFWLRQ

9

70(6$7

Figure 12-18 Block diagram of the 2AI TC High Feature


15 x 81 x 52

Weight



No

Number of inputs

2

Length of cable •

Shielded



24 VDC

P1

Yes

Isolation •


Yes

•


Yes

•


No

•

Between the channels and 24 V supply voltage

Yes


Between MANA and the central grounding 75 VDC/60 VAC point (Uiso)

•


Insulation tested

12-92

140 VDC/100 VAC 500 VDC


Analog electronic modules 12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) Current consumption •


Max. 30 mA




Group error

•


Red "SF" LED Yes Analog value generation

Measuring principle

Integrative

Integration time/conversion time/resolution per channel: •


Yes

•


60

50

•


16,7

20

•

Basic conversion time including Integration time in milliseconds

66

80

•

Additional conversion time for wire break 5 check diagnosis in ms

•

Cycle time in ms

•


5

Number of active channels per module x conversion time 15 bits plus sign

Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency) • •


Min. 90dB min. 70dB


Min. -50 dB

Operational limit for ±80 mV (over the entire temperature range with reference to the input range)

±0,1%

Operational limit for thermocouples (over the entire temperature range with reference to the input range)1

± 1.5 K

Operational limit for thermocouple type C (in ± 7 K the entire temperature range with reference to the input range)1 Basic error limit for ±80 mV (operational limit at 25° C with reference to the input range)

±0,05%

Basic error limit for thermocouples (operational limit at 25° C with reference to input range)1

±1K


12-93

Analog electronic modules 12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) Basic error limit for thermocouples of type C ± 5 K (operational limit at 25° C with reference to the input range)1 Temperature error (with reference to the ± 0,005%/K input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input ±0,01% range) Repeatability ±0,05% (in steady state at 25°C with reference to input range) Overall error limits using internal compensation • Operational limit (in the entire ± 2.5 K temperature range with a static, thermal state, ambient temperature change 70 °C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of this housing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 °C can be reached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, the temperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to the temperatures actually measured. 3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protection and Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021). 4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs and outputs of SIMATIC systems must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC explosion protection. 5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannot be exceeded by more than 40 %. 6. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to 60° C 7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an easily visible position when the housing is opened:

!

Warning The housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). If you do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections). You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not hazardous (i.e. there is no risk of explosion).

List of Approved Subassemblies/Modules You will find the list of approved subassemblies/modules under the ID 13702947 on the Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.

6

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02

Français

Utilisation des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à risque d'explosion 2 Zone 2 Les environnements à risque d'explosion sont répartis en zones. Les zones se distinguent par la probabilité de présence d'une atmosphère explosive. Zone

Risque d'explosion

Exemple

2

Formation rare et brève d'une atmosphère gazeuse explosive

Environnement de raccords à joints plats dans le cas de conduites dans des locaux fermés

Zone sûre

Non

x A l'extérieur de la zone 2 x Utilisation standard de périphérie décentralisée

Vous trouverez ci-après des remarques importantes pour l'installation de la station de périphérie décentralisée des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à risque d'explosion.

Informations complémentaires Des informations complémentaires sur les modules / cartouches se trouvent dans le manuel correspondant.

Lieu de fabrication / Homologation II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

Numéro de contrôle :

selon EN 50021 : 1999

voir tableau

Lieu de fabrication

Modules / coupleurs

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 Modules à sécurité intrinsèque 92224 Amberg ET 200S Germany S7-300 ET 200M Couplage de bus DP/PA Répéteur de diagnostic Modules à sécurité intrinsèque S7-300 Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany

Numéro de contrôle KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X

S7-300 CP TS Adapter II

KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


7

Français

Nota Les modules / coupleurs homologués II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuvent être utilisés que dans des systèmes SIMATIC de catégorie 3.

Entretien Si une réparation est nécessaire, le module / coupleur concerné doit être expédié au lieu de production. La réparation ne doit être effectuée qu'en ce lieu.

Conditions particulières 1. Les modules / coupleurs doivent être installés dans une armoire ou un boîtier métallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il faut alors tenir compte des conditions d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil est installé. Le boîtier doit faire l’objet d’une déclaration de conformité du fabricant pour la zone 2 (selon EN 50021). 2. Si dans les conditions d’exploitation, une température > 70 °C est atteinte au niveau du câble ou de l’entrée du câble dans ce boîtier, ou bien si la température au niveau de la dérivation des conducteurs peut être > 80 °C, les capacités de résistance thermique des câbles doivent corespondre aux températures effectivement mesurées. 3. Les entrées de câbles utilisées doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exigé et être conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021). 4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccordés aux entrées et sorties de systèmes SIMATIC doivent être homologués pour la protection antidéflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC. 5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas être dépassée de plus de 40% sous l’influence de transitoires. 6. Plage de température ambiante : 0° C à 60° C 7. A l’intérieur du boîtier, il faut placer, à un endroit bien visible après ouverture, une plaquette comportant l’avertissement suivant :

!

Avertissement Ouvir le boîtier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer un diagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, n’actionnez aucun commutateur, ne déconnectez aucun module et ne débanchez pas de câbles électriques (connexions). Le respect de cet avertissement n’est pas impératif s’il est certain que l’environnement ne présente pas de risque d’explosion. Liste des modules / coupleurs homologués Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules / coupleurs homologués : http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ référence ID 13702947.

8


Español

Aplicación de los módulos / tarjetas en áreas con peligro de explosión, zona 2 Zona 2 Las áreas con peligro de explosión se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas se diferencian según la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmósfera capaz de sufrir una explosión. Zona 2

Peligro de explosión

Ejemplo

La atmósfera explosiva de gas Áreas alrededor de uniones abridadas con juntas sólo se presenta rara vez y muy planas en tuberías en locales cerrados brevemente x fuera de la zona 2

Área segura no

x Aplicaciones estándar de la periferia descentralizada

A continuación encontrará importantes informaciones para la instalación de los módulos / tarjetas en áreas con peligro de explosión.

Otras informaciones Encontrará otras informaciones relativas a los módulos / tarjetas en el Manual correspondiente.

Lugar de fabricación / Homologación II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

Número de comprobación:

según norma EN 50021 : 1999

véase tabla

Lugar de fabricación

Módulos / tarjetas

Número de comprobación

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-SiemensStraße 50 92224 Amberg Germany

ET 200S Grupos ET 200S a prueba de fallos

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238 X

S7-300 ET 200M Acoplamiento de bus DP/PA Repetidor de diagnóstico Grupos S7-300 a prueba de fallos

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096 X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125 X

S7-300 CP TS Adapter

KEMA 03 ATEX 1228 X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226 X


9

Español

Nota Los módulos / tarjetas con la homologación II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pueden utilizarse únicamente en los sistemas SIMATIC de la categoría de equipo 3.

Mantenimiento Para una reparación se ha de remitir el módulo / tarjeta afectado al lugar de fabricación. Sólo allí se puede realizar la reparación.

Condiciones especiales 1. Los módulos / tarjetas se han de montar en un armario eléctrico de distribución o en una carcasa metálica. Éstos deben garantizar como mínimo el grado de protección IP 54 (conforme a EN 60529). Para ello se han de tener en cuenta las condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el equipo. La caja deberá contar con una declaración del fabricante para la zona 2 (conforme a EN 50021). 2. Si durante la operación se alcanzara una temperatura > 70° C en el cable o la entrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80° C en la bifurcación de hilos, deberán adaptarse las propiedades térmicas de los cables a las temperaturas medidas efectivamente. 3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de protección IP exigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021). 4. Todos los dispositivos –inclusive interruptores, etc.– conectados a las entradas y salidas de sistemas SIMATIC deben estar homologados para la protección contra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC. 5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensión nominal pueda rebasar en más del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios. 6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0° C hasta 60° C 7. Dentro de la caja deberá colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su apertura un rótulo con la siguiente advertencia:

!

Precaución Abrir la caja sólo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnóstico visual. Durante este tiempo Ud. no deberá activar ningún interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar módulos ni separar conductores eléctricos (conexiones enchufables). Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmósfera existente no hay peligro de explosión.

Lista de los módulos / tarjetas homologados En la internet hallará Ud. una lista con los módulos / tarjetas homologados: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ bajo el ID de asignación 13702947.

10


tIaliano

Impiego delle unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2 Zona 2 Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengono distinte secondo la probabilità della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva. Zona

Pericolo di esplosione

Esempio

2

L'atmosfera esplosiva si presente solo raramente e brevemente

Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange con guarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in ambienti chiusi

Area sicura

No

x Al di fuori della zona 2 x Applicazioni standard di periferia decentrata

Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione delle unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione.

Ulteriori informazioni Ulteriori informazioni sulle unità/moduli si trovano nel corrispondente manuale.

Luogo di produzione / Omologazione II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

secondo EN 50021 : 1999

Numero di controllo: ve di tabella Luogo di produzione

Unità/moduli

Numero di controllo

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany

ET 200S Unità ad elevata sicurezza ET 200S

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M Accoppiamento di bus DP/PA Repeater di diagnostica Unità ad elevata sicurezza S7-300

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X


S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


11

tIaliano

Avvertenza Le unità/moduli con l'omologazione II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essere impiegati solo nei sistemi SIMATIC della categoria di apparecchiature 3.

Manutenzione Per una riparazione, le unità/i moduli interessati devono essere inviati al luogo di produzione. La riparazione può essere effettuata solo lì.

Condizioni particolari 1. Le unità/i moduli devono essere montati in un armadio elettrico o in un contenitore metallico. Questi devono assicurare almeno il tipo di protezione IP 54. In questo caso bisogna tenere conto delle condizioni ambientali nelle quali l'apparecchiatura viene installata. Per il contenitore deve essere presente una dichiarazione del costruttore per la zona 2 (secondo EN 50021). 2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta in condizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 °C o se in condizioni di esercizio la temperatura nella derivazione dei fili può essere > 80 °C, le caratteristiche di temperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamente misurata. 3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione richiesto e alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021). 4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati agli ingressi/uscite di sistemi SIMATIC, devono essere stati omologati per la protezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC. 5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possa essere superata per più del 40% da parte di transienti. 6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0° C a 60° C 7. All’interno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo l’apertura, una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento:

!

Attenzione Il contenitore può rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per una diagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare o innestare unità e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori). Non è necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se è noto che non c’è un’atmosfera a rischio di esplosione

Elenco delle unità/moduli omologati L'elenco con le unità/moduli omologati si trova in Internet al sito: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ all’ID di voce 13702947.

12


Nederlands

Gebruik van de componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied zone 2 Zone 2 Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordt onderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van een explosieve atmosfeer. Zone

Explosiegevaar

Voorbeeld

2

Een explosieve gasatmosfeer treedt maar zelden op en voor korte duur

Gebieden rond flensverbindingen met pakkingen bij buisleidingen in gesloten vertrekken

Veilig gebied

neen

x Buiten de zone 2 x Standaardtoepassingen van decentrale periferie

Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van de componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied.

Verdere informatie In het bijhorende handboek vindt u verdere informatie over de componenten/modulen

Productieplaats / Vergunning II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

conform EN 50021 : 1999

Keuringsnummer: zie tabel

Productieplaats Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-SiemensStrasse 50 92224 Amberg Germany


Componenten/modulen

Keuringsnummer

ET 200S ET 200S tegen fouten beveiligde componenten

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200 M Buskoppeling DP/PA Diagnoserepeater S7-300 tegen fouten beveiligde componenten

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


13

Nederlands

Opmerking Componenten/modulen met de vergunning II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogen slechts worden gebruikt in SIMATIC-systemen van de apparaatcategorie 3.

Instandhouding Voor een reparatie moeten de betreffende componenten/modulen naar de plaats van vervaardiging worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie worden uitgevoerd.

Speciale voorwaarden 1. Componenten/modulen moeten worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in een behuizing van metaal. Deze moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54 waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening te worden gehouden met de omgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt geïnstalleerd. Voor de behuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor zone 2 te worden ingediend (volgens EN 50021). 2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 °C of als onder bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 °C kan zijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen met de werkelijk gemeten temperaturen. 3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraad hebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021). 4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de inen uitgangen van SIMATIC-systemen, moeten zijn goedgekeurd voor de explosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC. 5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door transiënten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden. 6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0° C tot 60° C 7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing:

!

Waarschuwing De behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuele diagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen). Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat er geen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.

Lijst van de toegelaten componenten/modulen De lijst met de toegelaten componenten/modulen vindt u in het internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947.

14


Dansk

Brug af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige område zone 2 Zone 2 Eksplosionsfarlige områder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efter hvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfære. Zone

Eksplosionsfare

Eksempel

2

Eksplosiv gasatmosfære optræder kun sjældent og varer kort

Områder rundt om flangeforbindelser med flade pakninger ved rørledninger i lukkede rum

Sikkert område

Nej

x Uden for zone 2 x Standardanvendelser decentral periferi

I det følgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige område.

Yderligere informationer Yderligere informationer om komponenterne/modulerne findes i den pågældende manual.

Produktionssted / Godkendelse II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

efter EN 50021 : 1999

Kontrolnummer: se tabel Produktionssted Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany


Komponenter/moduler

Kontrolnummer

ET 200S ET 200S fejlsikre komponenter

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M Buskobling DP/PA Diagnoserepeater S7-300 fejlsikre komponenter

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X

Bemærk Komponenter/moduler med godkendelsen II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 må kun monteres i SIMATIC-systemer for udstyrskategori 3.


15

Dansk

Vedligeholdelse Hvis de pågældende komponenter/moduler skal repareres, bedes De sende dem til produktionsstedet. Reparation må kun udføres der.

Særlige betingelser 1. Komponenterne/modulerne skal monteres i et kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet. Disse skal mindst kunne sikre beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelse skal der tages højde for de omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret er installeret. Der skal være udarbejdet en erklæring fra fabrikanten for kabinettet for zone 2 (iht. EN 50021). 2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindføringen på dette hus når op på en temperatur på > 70 °C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen på åreforegreningen kan være > 80 °C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk måles. 3. De benyttede kabelindføringer skal være i overensstemmelse med den krævede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021). 4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene til SIMATIC-systemerne, skal være godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse af type EEx nA eller EEx nC. 5. Der skal træffes foranstaltninger, der sørger for, at den nominelle spænding via transienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %. 6. Omgivelsestemperaturområde: 0° C til 60° C 7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, når kabinettet åbnes. Dette skilt skal have følgende advarsel:

!

Advarsel Kabinettet må kun åbnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denne forbindelse ikke på kontakter, træk eller isæt ikke komponenter og afbryd ikke elektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser). Der skal ikke tages højde for denne advarsel, hvis man ved, at der ikke er nogen eksplosionsfarlig atmosfære.

Liste over godkendte komponenter/moduler Listen med de godkendte komponenter/moduler findes på internettet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ under bidrags-ID 13702947.

16


Suomi

Rakenneryhmien/moduulien käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2 Vyöhyke 2 Räjähdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyöhykkeisiin. Vyöhykkeet erotellaan räjähdyskelpoisen ilmakehän olemassa olon todennäköisyyden mukaan. Vyöhyke

Räjähdysvaara

Esimerkki

2

Räjähtävä kaasuilmakehä ilmaantuu vain harvoin ja lyhytaikaisesti

Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteillä varustuilla laippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa

turvallinen alue

ei

x vyöhykkeen 2 ulkopuolella x Hajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset

Seuraavasta löydätte tärkeitä ohjeita rakenneryhmien/moduulien asennukseen räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.

Lisätietoja Lisätietoja rakenneryhmiin/moduuleihin löydätte niihin kuuluvista ohjekirjasta.

Valmistuspaikka / Hyväksyntä II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

EN 50021 mukaan: 1999

Tarkastusnumero: katso taulukko Valmistuspaikka

Rakenneryhmät/moduulit

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S läpi-iskuvarmat 92224 Amberg rakenneryhmät Germany S7-300 ET 200M Väyläkytkin DP/PA Dignoositoistin S7-300 läpi-iskuvarmat rakenneryhmät Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Germany

Tarkastusnumero KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X

Ohje Rakenneryhmät/moduulit hyväksynnän II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssa saadaan käyttää ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 SIMATIC-järjestelmissä. Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02

17

Suomi

Kunnossapito Korjausta varten täytyy kyseinen rakenneryhmä/moduuli lähettää valmistuspaikkaan. Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siellä.

Erityiset vaatimukset 1. Rakenneryhmät/moduulit täytyy asentaa kytkentäkaappiin tai metalliseen koteloon. Näiden täytyy olla vähintään kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tällöin on huomioitava ympäristöolosuhteet, johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle täytyy olla valmistajaselvitys vyöhykettä 2 varten (EN 50021 mukaan). 2. Kun johdolla tai tämän kotelon johdon sisäänviennillä saavutetaan > 70 °C lämpötila tai kun käyttöolosuhteissa lämpötila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 °C, täytyy johdon lämpötilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lämpötiloja. 3. Käytettyjen johtojen sisäänohjauksien täytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan ja kohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia. 4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetään SIMATICjärjestelmien tuloille ja lähdöille, täytyy olla hyväksyttyjä tyypin EEx nA tai EEx nC räjähdyssuojausta varten. 5. Toimenpiteet täytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjännite voi transienttien kautta ylittyä enemmän kuin 40 %. 6. Ympäristölämpötila-alue: 0° C ... 60° C 7. Kotelon sisälle, avauksen jälkeen näkyvälle paikalle, on kiinnitettävä kilpi, jossa on seuraava varoitus:

!

Varoitus Kotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosia varten. Älä tällöin käytä mitään kytkimiä, vedä tai liitä mitään rakenneryhmiä, äläkä erota mitään sähköjohtoja (pistoliittimiä). Tätä varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, että minkäänlaista räjähdysvaarannettua ilmakehää ei ole olemassa.

Hyväksyttyjen rakenneryhmien/moduulien lista Lista hyväksytyistä rakennesarjoista/moduuleista löytyy internetistä osoitteesta: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ käyttäjätunnuksella 13702947.

18


Svenska

Användning av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i explosionsriskområde zon 2 Zon 2 Explosionsriskområden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten att en atmosfär med explosionsfara föreligger. Zon

Explosionsfara

Exempel

2

Explosiv gasatmosfär uppstår endast sällan eller kortvarigt

Områden kring flänsförbindelser med packningar vid rörledningar i slutna utrymmen

Säkert område

Nej

x Utanför zon 2 x Standardanvändning av decentral periferi

Nedan följer viktiga anvisningar om installationen av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i ett explosionsriskområde.

Ytterligare information Ytterligare information om komponentgrupperna/modulerna finner du i tillhörande handbok.

Tillverkningsort / Godkännande II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

enligt EN 50021 : 1999

Kontrollnummer: se tabell Tillverkningsort Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany


Komponentgrupper/ moduler

Kontrollnummer

ET 200S ET 200S Felsäkra komponentgrupper

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M Busskoppling DP/PA Diagnosrepeater S7-300 Felsäkra komponentgrupper

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


19

Svenska

Anvisning Komponentgrupper/moduler med godkännande II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 får endast användas i SIMATIC-system i apparatgrupp 3.

Underhåll Vid reparation måste den aktuella komponentgrupperna/modulerna insändas till tillverkaren. Reparationer får endast genomföras där.

Särskilda villkor 1. Komponentgrupperna/modulerna måste monteras i ett kopplingsskåp eller metallhus. Dessa måste minst vara av skyddsklass IP 54. Därvid ska omgivningsvillkoren där enheten installeras beaktas. För kåpan måste en tillverkardeklaration för zon 2 föreligga (enligt EN 50021). 2. Om en temperatur på > 70°C uppnås vid husets kabel resp kabelinföring under driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trådförgreningen kan vara > 80°C under driftvillkor, måste kabelns temperaturegenskaper överensstämma med den verkligen uppmätta temperaturen. 3. De använda kabelinföringarna måste uppfylla kraven i det krävda IPskyddsutförandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021). 4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts till in- och utgångarna på SIMATIC-system, måste vara godkända för explosionsskydd av typ EEx nA eller EEx nC. 5. Åtgärder måste vidtas så, att märkspänningen ej kan överskridas med mer än 40 % genom transienter. 6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0° C till 60° C 7. När huset öppnats ska en skylt med följande varning monteras på ett tydligt synligt ställe huset:

!

Varning Huset får endast öppnas under kort tid, t ex för visuell diagnos. Använd därvid inga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frånskilj inga elektriska ledningar (insticksanslutningar). Ingen hänsyn måste tas till denna varning om det är säkert att det inte råder någon explosionsfarlig atmosfär.

Lista över godkända komponentgrupper/moduler Lista över godkända komponentgrupper/moduler finns på Internetadressen: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ under bidrags-ID 13702947.

20


Português

Uso de grupos construtivos/módulos em área exposta ao perigo de explosão 2 Zona 2 As áreas expostas ao perigo de explosão são divididas em zonas. As zonas são diferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existência de uma atmosfera explosiva. Zona 2

Perigo de explosão Só raramente e por um breve período de tempo surgem atmosferas explosivas

Exemplo Áreas em torno de ligações flangeadas com vedações chatas em tubulações em recintos fechados x fora da zona 2

Área segura não

x Aplicações descentralizadas de periferia descentralizada

A seguir, o encontrará avisos importantes para a instalação de grupos construtivos/ módulos em área exposta ao perigo de explosão.

Mais informações Para obter mais informações sobre grupos construtivos/módulos, consulte o respectivo manual.

Local de produção / Licença II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

seg. EN 50021 : 1999

Número de ensaio: veja a tabela

Local de produção Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Alemanha

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Alemanha

Grupos construtivos/módulos

N° de ensaio

ET 200S ET 200S Grupos construtivos protegidos contra erro

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M Acoplador bus DP/PA Repetidor de diagnóstico S7-300 Grupos construtivos protegidos contra erro

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


21

Português

Aviso Os grupos construtivos/módulos com a licença II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 só podem ser aplicados em sistemas SIMATIC da categoria de aparelho 3.

Reparo Os grupos construtivos/módulos em questão devem ser remetidos para o local de produção a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas lá deve ser efetuado o reparo.

Condições especiais 1. Os grupos construtivos/módulos devem ser montados em um armário de distribuição ou em uma caixa metálica. Estes devem garantir no mínimo o tipo de protecção IP 54. Durante este trabalho deverão ser levados em consideração as condições locais, nas quais o aparelho será instalado. Para a caixa deverá ser apresentada uma declaração do fabricante para a zona 2 (de acordo com EN 50021). 2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta carcaça sob as condições operacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 °C, ou caso sob condições operacionais a temperatura na ramificação do fio poderá atingir > 80 °C, as caraterísticas de temperatura deverão corresponder às temperaturas realmente medidas. 3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido de protecção IP e à seção 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021). 4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas em entradas e saídas dos sistemas SIMATIC devem possuir a licença para a protecção de explosão do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC. 5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tensão nominal através de transitórios não possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %. 6. Área de temperatura ambiente: 0° C até 60° C 7. No âmbito da carcaça deve ser colocada, após a abertura, em um ponto bem visível uma placa com a seguinte advertência:

!

Advertência A carcaça deve ser aberta apenas por um breve período de tempo, por ex. para diagnóstico visual. Não acione nenhum interruptor, não retire ou conecte nenhum módulo e não separe nenhum fio elétrico (ligações de tomada). Esta advertência poderá ser ignorada caso se saiba que não há nenhuma atmosfera sujeita ao perigo de explosão.

Lista dos grupos construtivos/módulos autorizados A lista com os grupos construtivos/módulos autorizados encontram-se na Internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ sob o número de ID 13702947.

22


ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ

ȋȡȒıȘ ĲȦȞ įȠµȚțȫȞ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȘµȐĲȦȞ/µȠȞȐįȦȞ ıİ İʌȚțȓȞįȣȞȘ ȖȚĮ ȑțȡȘȟȘ ʌİȡȚȠȤȒ, ȗȫȞȘ 2 ǽȫȞȘ 2 ȅȚ İʌȚțȓȞįȣȞİȢ ȖȚĮ ȑțȡȘȟȘ ʌİȡȚȠȤȑȢ ȤȦȡȓȗȠȞĲĮȚ ıİ ȗȫȞİȢ. ȅȚ ȗȫȞİȢ įȚĮĳȑȡȠȣȞ ıȪµĳȦȞĮ µİ ĲȘȞ ʌȚșĮȞȩĲȘĲĮ ȪʌĮȡȟȘȢ İȞȩȢ ȚțĮȞȠȪ ȖȚĮ ȑțȡȘȟȘ ʌİȡȚȕȐȜȜȠȞĲȠȢ. ǽȫȞȘ

ȀȓȞįȣȞȠȢ ȑțȡȘȟȘȢ

ȆĮȡȐįİȚȖµĮ

2

ǼțȡȘțĲȚțȩ ʌİȡȚȕȐȜȜȠȞ ĮİȡȓȠȣ ʌĮȡȠȣıȚȐȗİĲĮȚ µȩȞȠ ıʌȐȞȚĮ țĮȚ ȖȚĮ ıȪȞĲȠµȠ ȤȡȠȞȚțȩ įȚȐıĲȘµĮ

ȆİȡȚȠȤȑȢ ȖȪȡȦ Įʌȩ ĳȜĮȞĲȗȦĲȑȢ ıȣȞįȑıİȚȢ µİ ĲıȚµȠȪȤİȢ ıİ ıȦȜȘȞȫıİȚȢ ıİ țȜİȚıĲȠȪȢ ȤȫȡȠȣȢ

ǹıĳĮȜȒȢ ʌİȡȚȠȤȒ

ȩȤȚ

x ǼțĲȩȢ ĲȘȢ ȗȫȞȘȢ 2 x ȉȣʌȚțȑȢ İĳĮȡµȠȖȑȢ ĮʌȠțİȞĲȡȦµȑȞȘȢ ʌİȡȚĳȑȡİȚĮȢ

ȈĲȘ ıȣȞȑȤİȚĮ șĮ ȕȡİȓĲİ ıȘµĮȞĲȚțȑȢ ȣʌȠįİȓȟİȚȢ ȖȚĮ ĲȘȞ İȖțĮĲȐıĲĮıȘ ĲȦȞ įȠµȚțȫȞ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȘµȐĲȦȞ/µȠȞȐįȦȞ ıİ İʌȚțȓȞįȣȞȘ ȖȚĮ ȑțȡȘȟȘ ʌİȡȚȠȤȒ.

ǼʌȚʌȜȑȠȞ ʌȜȘȡȠĳȠȡȓİȢ ǼʌȚʌȜȑȠȞ ʌȜȘȡȠĳȠȡȓİȢ ȖȚĮ ĲĮ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȒµĮĲĮ/µȠȞȐįİȢ șĮ ȕȡİȓĲİ ıĲȠ ĮȞĲȓıĲȠȚȤȠ İȖȤİȚȡȓįȚȠ.

ȉȩʌȠȢ țĮĲĮıțİȣȒȢ / ǱįİȚĮ II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 : 1999

ıȪµĳȦȞĮ µİ ĲȠ ʌȡȩĲȣʌȠ

ǹȡȚșµȩȢ İȜȑȖȤȠȣ: ȕȜȑʌİ ʌȓȞĮțĮ

ȉȩʌȠȢ țĮĲĮıțİȣȒȢ

ǻȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȒµĮĲĮ/µȠȞȐįİȢ

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D ET 200S Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 ET 200S ǹıĳĮȜȒ ıİ ʌİȡȓʌĲȦıȘ 92224 Amberg ȕȜȐȕȘȢ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȒµĮĲĮ Germany


ǹȚșµ. İȜȑȖȤȠȣ KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M ȈȪȗİȣȟȘ įȚĮȪȜȠȣ DP/PA ǼʌĮȞĮȜȒʌĲȘȢ įȚȐȖȞȦıȘȢ S7-300 ǹıĳĮȜȒ ıİ ʌİȡȓʌĲȦıȘ ȕȜȐȕȘȢ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȒµĮĲĮ

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


23

ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ

ȊʌȩįİȚȟȘ ȉĮ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȒµĮĲĮ/ȠȚ µȠȞȐįİȢ µİ ĲȘȞ ȐįİȚĮ II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 İʌȚĲȡȑʌİĲĮȚ ȞĮ ĲȠʌȠșİĲȘșȠȪȞ µȩȞȠ ıİ ıȣıĲȒµĮĲĮ ĮȣĲȠµĮĲȚıµȠȪ SIMATIC ĲȘȢ țĮĲȘȖȠȡȓĮȢ ıȣıțİȣȒȢ 3.

ȈȣȞĲȒȡȘıȘ īȚĮ µȚĮ İʌȚıțİȣȒ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ıĲĮȜșȠȪȞ ĲĮ ĮȞĲȓıĲȠȚȤĮ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȒµĮĲĮ/µȠȞȐįİȢ ıĲȠȞ ĲȩʌȠ țĮĲĮıțİȣȒȢ. ȂȩȞȠ İțİȓ İʌȚĲȡȑʌİĲĮȚ ȞĮ ȖȓȞİȚ Ș İʌȚıțİȣȒ.

ǿįȚĮȓĲİȡİȢ ʌȡȠȨʌȠșȑıİȚȢ 1. ȉĮ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȒµĮĲĮ/µȠȞȐįİȢ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ İȞıȦµĮĲȦșȠȪȞ ıİ ȑȞĮ İȡµȐȡȚȠ ȗİȪȟȘȢ Ȓ ıİ ȑȞĮ µİĲĮȜȜȚțȩ ʌİȡȓȕȜȘµĮ. ǹȣĲȐ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ İȟĮıĳĮȜȓȗȠȣȞ ĲȠ ȜȚȖȩĲİȡȠ ĲȠ ȕĮșµȩ ʌȡȠıĲĮıȓĮȢ IP 54 (țĮĲȐ EN 60529). Ȉİ ĮȣĲȒȞ ĲȘȞ ʌİȡȓʌĲȦıȘ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ȜȘĳșȠȪȞ ȣʌȩȥȘ ȠȚ ʌİȡȚȕĮȜȜȠȞĲȚțȑȢ ıȣȞșȒțİȢ, ıĲȚȢ ȠʌȠȓİȢ șĮ İȖțĮĲĮıĲĮșİȓ Ș ıȣıțİȣȒ. īȚĮ ĲȠ ʌİȡȓȕȜȘµĮ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ʌȡȠȕȜȑʌİĲĮȚ įȒȜȦıȘ ĲȠȣ țĮĲĮıțİȣĮıĲȒ ȖȚĮ ĲȘ ȗȫȞȘ 2 (ıȪµĳȦȞĮ µİ ĲȠ ʌȡȩĲȣʌȠ EN 50021). 2. ǼȐȞ ıĲȠ țĮȜȫįȚȠ Ȓ ıĲȘȞ İȓıȠįȠ ĲȠȣ țĮȜȦįȓȠȣ ĮȣĲȠȪ ĲȠȣ ʌİȡȚȕȜȒµĮĲȠȢ țȐĲȦ Įʌȩ ıȣȞșȒțİȢ ȜİȚĲȠȣȡȖȓĮȢ Ș șİȡµȠțȡĮıȓĮ ȟİʌİȡȐıİȚ ĲȠȣȢ 70 °C Ȓ ȩĲĮȞ țȐĲȦ Įʌȩ ıȣȞșȒțİȢ ȜİȚĲȠȣȡȖȓĮȢ Ș șİȡµȠțȡĮıȓĮ ıĲȘ įȚĮțȜȐįȦıȘ ĲȠȣ ıȪȡµĮĲȠȢ µʌȠȡİȓ ȞĮ İȓȞĮȚ µİȖĮȜȪĲİȡȘ Įʌȩ 80 °C, ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȠȚ șİȡµȠțȡĮıȚĮțȑȢ ȚįȚȩĲȘĲİȢ ĲȦȞ țĮȜȦįȓȦȞ ȞĮ ĲĮȣĲȓȗȠȞĲĮȚ µİ ĲȚȢ ʌȡĮȖµĮĲȚțȐ µİĲȡȘµȑȞİȢ șİȡµȠțȡĮıȓİȢ. 3. ȅȚ ȤȡȘıȚµȠʌȠȚȠȪµİȞİȢ İȚıȩįȠȚ țĮȜȦįȓȦȞ ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ıȣµµȠȡĳȫȞȠȞĲĮȚ µİ ĲȠ ȕĮșµȩ ʌȡȠıĲĮıȓĮȢ IP 54 ıĲȘȞ İȞȩĲȘĲĮ 7.2 (ıȪµĳȦȞĮ µİ ĲȠ ʌȡȩĲȣʌȠ EN 50021). 4. ǵȜİȢ ȠȚ ıȣıțİȣȑȢ, ıȣµʌİȡȚȜĮµȕĮȞȠµȑȞȦȞ įȚĮțȠʌĲȫȞ ț.Į., ʌȠȣ ıȣȞįȑȠȞĲĮȚ ıĲȚȢ İȚıȩįȠȣȢ țĮȚ İȟȩįȠȣȢ ĲȦȞ ıȣıĲȘµȐĲȦȞ SIMATIC, ʌȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ĳȑȡȠȣȞ İȖțȡȚµȑȞȘ ʌȡȠıĲĮıȓĮ țĮĲȐ ȑțȡȘȟȘȢ ĲȪʌȠȣ EEx nA Ȓ EEx nC. 5. ȆȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ȜȘĳșȠȪȞ µȑĲȡĮ, ȞĮ µȘȞ µʌȠȡİȓ ȞĮ ȖȓȞİȚ ȣʌȑȡȕĮıȘ ĲȘȢ ȠȞȠµĮıĲȚțȒȢ ĲȐıȘȢ µȑıȦ ĮȚĳȞȓįȚĮȢ µİĲĮȕȠȜȒȢ ĲȘȢ ĲȐıȘȢ ʌȐȞȦ Įʌȩ 40 %. 6. ȆİȡȚȠȤȒ șİȡµȠțȡĮıȓĮȢ ʌİȡȚȕȐȜȜȠȞĲȠȢ: 0° C ȑȦȢ 60° C 7. ȆȡȑʌİȚ ȞĮ ĲȠʌȠșİĲȘșİȓ µȑıĮ ıĲȠ ʌİȡȓȕȜȘµĮ ıİ İȣįȚȐțȡȚĲȠ ıȘµİȓȠ µİĲȐ ĲȠ ȐȞȠȚȖµĮ µȓĮ ʌȚȞĮțȓįĮ µİ ĲȘȞ ĮțȩȜȠȣșȘ ʌȡȠİȚįȠʌȠȓȘıȘ:

!

ȆȡȠİȚįȠʌȠȓȘıȘ ȉȠ ʌİȡȓȕȜȘµĮ İʌȚĲȡȑʌİĲĮȚ ȞĮ ĮȞȠȓȖİȚ µȩȞȠ ȖȚĮ µȚțȡȩ ȤȡȠȞȚțȩ įȚȐıĲȘµĮ, ʌ.Ȥ. ȖȚĮ ĲȘ įȚİȞȑȡȖİȚĮ ȠʌĲȚțȒȢ įȚȐȖȞȦıȘȢ. ȂȘȞ țȐȞİĲİ ȤȡȒıȘ įȚĮțȠʌĲȫȞ, µȘȞ ĲȡĮȕȐĲİ Ȓ İµȕȣıµĮĲȫȞİĲİ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȒµĮĲĮ țĮȚ µȘ įȚĮȤȦȡȓȗİĲİ ȘȜİțĲȡȠĳȩȡȠȣȢ ĮȖȦȖȠȪȢ (İµȕıȣµĮĲȫıȚµİȢ ıȣȞįȑıİȚȢ). Ǿ ʌȡȠİȚįȠʌȠȓȘıȘ ĮȣĲȒ įİ ȤȡİȚȐȗİĲĮȚ ȞĮ ȜȘĳșİȓ ȣʌ’ ȩȥȚȞ, İȐȞ İȓȞĮȚ ȖȞȦıĲȩ ȩĲȚ įİȞ ȣĳȓıĲĮĲĮȚ ĮĲµȩıĳĮȚȡĮ ʌĮȡȠȣıȚȐȗȠȣıĮ țȓȞįȣȞȠ ȑțȡȘȟȘȢ.

ȀĮĲȐȜȠȖȠȢ ĲȦȞ İȖțİțȡȚµȑȞȦȞ įȠµȚțȫȞ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȘµȐĲȦȞ/µȠȞȐįȦȞ Ǿ ȜȓıĲĮ µİ ĲĮ İȖțȡȚµȑȞĮ įȠµȚțȐ ıȣȖțȡȠĲȒµĮĲĮ/µȠȞȐįİȢ ȣʌȐȡȤİȚ ıĲȠ įȚĮįȓțĲȣȠ: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ µİ ĲȠȞ țȦįȚțȩ ıȣȞįȡȠµȒȢ 13702947. 24


ýesky

Použití konstrukþních skupin / modulĤ v prostĜedí s nebezpeþím výbuchu Zóna 2 Zóna 2 Oblasti s nebezpeþím výbuchu jsou rozdČleny do zón. Zóny jsou rozlišeny podle pravdČpodobnosti výskytu explosivní atmosféry. Zóna

Nebezpeþí exploze

PĜíklad

2

Explosivní plynová atmosféra se vyskytuje pouze zĜídka a krátkodobČ

Oblasti kolem pĜírubových spojĤ s plochým tČsnČním u potrubí v uzavĜených prostorech

Bezpeþná oblast

není

x Mimo zónu 2 x Standardní aplikace necentrálních periferií

Dále naleznete dĤležité pokyny pro instalaci konstrukþních skupin/modulĤ v oblastech s nebezpeþím výbuchu.

Další informace Další informace ke konstrukþním skupinám/modulĤm naleznete v pĜíslušné pĜíruþce.

Místo výroby / Registrace II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

dle EN 50021 : 1999

Zkušební þíslo: viz tabulka

Místo výroby Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany


Konstrukþní skupiny/Moduly ET 200S ET 200S Konstrukþní skupiny odolné proti chybám

Kontrolní þíslo KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 KEMA 02 ET 200M ATEX 1096X Spojka sbČrnice DP/PA Diagnostické translaþní relé S7-300 Konstrukþní skupiny odolné proti chybám S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


25

ýesky

UpozornČní Konstrukþní skupiny/Moduly s osvČdþením II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 smČjí být použity pouze v systémech SIMATIC, pĜístrojové kategorie 3.

Údržba K opravČ musí být pĜíslušné konstrukþní skupiny/moduly zaslány do výrobního místa. Oprava smí být provedena pouze zde.

Zvláštní podmínky 1. Konstrukþní skupiny/moduly musí být zabudovány v rozvadČþi nebo kovovém krytu. Ty musí minimálnČ zajišĢovat druh ochrany IP 54 (dle EN 60529). PĜitom je nutno respektovat okolní podmínky, v nichž je pĜístroj instalován. Pro kryt musí být k dispozici prohlášení výrobce pro zónu 2 (dle EN 50021). 2. Pokud je na kabelu popĜ. kabelovém vedení tohoto krytu dosaženo za provozních podmínek teploty > 70 °C, nebo když za provozních podmínek mĤže být na kabelových vČtvích teplota > 80 °C, musí teplotní vlastnosti kabelu souhlasit se skuteþnČ namČĜenými teplotami. 3. Použité kabelové pĜívody musí odpovídat požadovanému druhu ochrany IP a odstavci 7.2 (dle EN 50021). 4. Všechny pĜístroje, vþetnČ spínaþĤ atd. napojených na vstupy a výstupy systémĤ SIMATIC, musí mít osvČdþení vĤþi výbuchu typu EEx nA nebo EEx nC. 5. Musí být provedena opatĜení k zamezení pĜechodného pĜekroþení jmenovitého napČtí, nepĜesahující více než 40 %. 6. Rozsah teploty okolí: 0° C do 60° C 7. UvnitĜ krytu je nutno na dobĜe viditelném místČ po otevĜení pĜipevnit štítek s následujícím varováním:

!

Varování Kryt smí být otevĜen pouze krátce, napĜ. pro vizuální diagnostiku. Nepoužívejte pĜitom žádný spínaþ, nevytahujte ani nezasunujte žádné konstrukþní skupiny a neoddČlujte žádná elektrická vedení (konektorové spoje). Toto varování nemusíte respektovat, pokud je známo, že se na místČ nevyskytuje explozivní atmosféra.

Seznam konstrukþních skupin/modulĤ s osvČdþením Seznam konstrukþních skupin/modulĤ s osvČdþením naleznete na Internetu: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

pod identifikací pĜíspČvku ID 13702947.

26


Estnisch

Sõlmede/moodulite kasutamine plahvatusohtliku piirkonna tsoonis 2 Tsoon 2 Plahvatusohtlikud piirkonnad jagatakse tsoonideks. Tsoone eristatakse vastavalt plahvatusohtliku keskkonna esinemise tõenäosusele. Tsoon

Plahvatusoht

Näide

2

üldine plahvatav keskkond esineb ainult harva ja lühiajaliselt

Piirkonnad lamedate rõngastihenditega torustike äärikliidete ümbruses suletud ruumides

ohutu piirkond

ei

x väljaspool tsooni 2 x Mittstsentraalse välisseadme standardsed rakendused

Järgnevalt leaite Te olulisi juhiseid sõlmede/moodulite paigaldamiseks plahvatusohtlikus piirkonnas.

Täiendav info Üksikasjalik info sõlmede/moodulite kohta on toodud seadme juurde kuuluvas käsiraamatus.

Valmistamiskoht / Kasutusluba II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

vastavalt standardile EN 50021 : 1999

Katsetusnumber: vaadake tabelit

Valmistamiskoht Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany


Sõlmed/moodulid

Katsetusnumber

ET 200S ET 200S Rikkekindlad sõlmed

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M Siinühendus DP/PA Diagnostikarepiiter S7-300 Rikkekindlad sõlmed

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X

Juhis Sõlmi/mooduleid kasutusloaga II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 tohib kasutada ainult SIMATIC-süsteemides, mille seadmeklass on 3. Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02

27

Estnisch

Korrashoid Parandamiseks tuleb sõlmed/moodulid saata valmistamiskohta. Parandustöid tohib teha ainult seal.

Eritingimused 1. Sõlmed/moodulid tuleb monteerida jaotuskarpi või metallkorpusesse. Need peavad tagama kaitseastme vähemalt IP 54 (vastavalt standardile EN 60529). Seejuures peab arvesse võtma seadme paigaldamise keskkonna tingimusi. Korpuse jaoks peab tsooni 2 jaoks olema tootja juhis (vastavalt standardile EN 50021). 2. Kui selle korpuse kaabli juures või kaabelvaheliku (kaabelsisestuse) juures töötingimustes saavutatakse temperatuur > 70 °C või, kui töötingimustes temperatuur soone hargnemiskoha juures võib olla > 80 °C, peavad kaabli termilised omadusd olema vastavuses tegelikult mõõdetud temperatuuridega. 3. Kasutatavad kaabelvahelikud (kaabelsisestused) peavad vastama nõutud IPkaitseastmele ja osas 7.2 toodud nõuetele (vastavalt standardile EN 50021). 4. Kõik seadmed, kaasa arvatud lülitid, jt., mis SIMATIC-süsteemide sisendite ja väljundite külge ühendatakse, peavad võimaldama plahvatuskaitse tüüpi EEx nA või EEx nC. 5. Peab rakendama abinõusid, et nimipinget üleminekute tõttu ei saaks ületatada üle 40 %. 6. Ümbritseva keskkona temperatuurivahemik: 0° C kuni 60° C 7. Korpuse sisse tuleb sellisesse kohta, mis pärast avamist on hästi nähtav, panna silt järgmise hoiatusega:

!

Ettevaatust Korpust tohib avada ainult lühikeseks ajals, näiteks visuaalse diagnostika jaoks. Seejuures ärge kasutage ühtegi lülitit ega võtke välja ega pange sisse ühtegi sõlme ega lahutage ühtegi elektrijuhet (pistikühendused). Seda hoiatust võib mitte arvesse võtta, kui on teada, et ei esine mingit plahvatusohtlikku keskkonda.

Lubatud sõlmede/moodulite loetelu Lubatud sõlmede/modulite loetelu leiate Te internetist: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ lisas-ID 13702947.

28


Latviski

IerƯþu/moduƺu pielietojums sprƗdzienbƯstamas teritorijas zonƗ 2 Zona 2 SprƗdzienbƯstamƗs teritorijas ir sadalƯtas zonƗs. ŠƯs zonas atšƷir pƝc sprƗdzienbƯstamas atmosfƝras pastƗvƝšanas iespƝjamƯbas. Zona

SprƗdzienbƯstamƯba

PiemƝrs

2

eksplozƯva gƗzes atmosfƝra izveidojas reti un uz Ưsu laiku

Teritorijas ap atloku savienojumiem ar plakaniem blƯvƝjumiem uz cauruƺvadiem slƝgtƗs telpƗs

droša teritorija

nƝ

x Ɩrpus zonas 2 x DecentralizƝtas perifƝrijas ierƯces standartlietojumi

TurpmƗk atrodamas svarƯgas norƗdes par ierƯþu/moduƺu uzstƗdƯšanu sprƗdzienbƯstamajƗ zonƗ.

TurpmƗka informƗcija TurpmƗka informƗcija par ierƯcƝm/moduƺiem ir atrodama attiecƯgajƗ rokasgrƗmatƗ.

Izgatavošanas vieta / Atƺauja II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

saskaƼƗ ar EN 50021 : 1999

PƗrbaudes numurs: skatƯt tabulu

Izgatavošanas vieta Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany


IerƯces/moduƺi

PƗrbaudes numurs

ET 200S

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M Kopnes savienotƗjs DP/PA Diagnostikas atkƗrtotƗjs S7-300 Pret kƺǌdƗm aizsargƗtas ierƯces

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


29

Latviski

NorƗde IerƯces/moduƺi ar atƺauju II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 var tikt pielietotas tikai 3.kategorijas SIMATIC sistƝmƗs.

TehniskƗ apkope AttiecƯgu ierƯþu/moduƺu remontam tie ir jƗnosǌta ražotƗjam. Remontu drƯkst veikt tikai tur.

Ʈpaši apstƗkƺi 1. IerƯces/moduƺi jƗiebǌvƝ sadales skapƯ vai metƗla korpusƗ. Tiem jƗnodrošina aizsardzƯbas lƯmenis ne mazƗks kƗ IP 54 (saskaƼƗ ar EN 60529). TurklƗt, ierƯces uzstƗdƯšanƗ jƗievƝro apkƗrtƝjas vides apstƗkƺi. Korpusam ir nepieciešams izgatavotƗja apliecinƗjums zonai 2 (saskaƼƗ ar EN 50021). 2. Ja uz kabeƺa vai šƯ korpusa kabeƺu ievades ekspluatƗcijas apstƗkƺos tiek sasniegta temperatǌra > 70 °C vai ja ekspluatƗcijas apstƗkƺos uz kabeƺa atzariem var bǌt temperatǌra > 80 °C, kabeƺu temperatǌras ƯpašƯbƗm jƗatbilst faktiski nomƝrƯtƗm temperatǌrƗm. 3. PielietojamƗm kabeƺu ievadƝm jƗatbilst nepieciešamajam aizsardzƯbas veidam IP un sadaƺai 7.2 (saskaƼƗ ar EN 50021). 4. VisƗm ierƯcƝm, ieskaitot pƗrslƝgus utt., kas tiek pieslƝgti pie SIMATIC sistƝmu ievadƝm un izvadƝm, jƗbǌt atƺaujƗm EEx nA vai EEx nC tipa sprƗdzienaizsardzƯbai. 5. Nepieciešams veikt pasƗkumus, lai pƗrejas spriegums nepƗrsniegtu nominƗlo spriegumu vairƗk kƗ par 40 %. 6. ApkƗrtƝjas temperatǌras diapazons: 0° C lƯdz 60° C 7. Korpusa iekšpusƝ, vietƗ, kas ir labi redzama, atverot to, ir jƗizvieto plƗksne ar sekojošo brƯdinƗjumu:

!

BrƯdinƗjums Korpusu var atvƝrt tikai ƯslaicƯgi, piemƝram, vizuƗlai diagnostikai. Pie tam nenospiediet nekƗdus slƝdžus, neievietojiet un neizƼemiet nekƗdas ierƯces un nepƗrtrauciet elektriskƗs lƯnijas (spraudsavienojumus). Šis brƯdinƗjums var tikt neƼemts vƝrƗ, ja ir zinƗms, ka nepastƗv sprƗdzienbƯstama atmosfƝra.

Pieƺaujamo ierƯþu/moduƺu saraksts Pieƺaujamo ierƯþu/moduƺu saraksts ir atrodams InternetƗ: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/ zem datu ID 13702947.

30


Lietuviška

Konstrukciniǐ grupiǐ/moduliǐ panaudojimas sprogioje 2 zonos aplinkoje Zona 2 Sprogi aplinka yra apibǌdinama keliomis zonomis. Zonos skirstomos pagal galimos sprogios terpơs atsiradimo tikimybĊ. Zona

Sprogimo pavojus

Pavyzdys

2

sprogi atmosfera bǌna retai ir trumpai

Uždarǐ patalpǐ vamzdynuose - flanšo su tarpikliais sujungimǐ vietose

saugioji sritis

nơra

x ne zonoje 2 x Standartinơ periferinơ sistema

Toliau pateikiamas informacija apie konstrukciniǐ grupiǐ ir moduliǐ montavimą sprogioje aplinkoje.

Papildoma informacija Papildomos informacijos apie konstrukcines grupes/modulius rasite eksploatacijos vadove.

Pagaminimo vieta / Saugos reikalavimai II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

pagal EN 50021 : 1999

Patikros numeris: žiǌr. lentelơje

Pagaminimo vieta

Konstrukcinơs grupơs/moduliai

Patikros numeris

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Ambergas Vokietija

ET 200S ET 200S nuo trukdžiǐ apsaugotos konstrukcinơs grupơs

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M Magistralinơ jungtis DP/PA Diagnozơs retransliatorius S7-300 nuo trukdžiǐ apsaugotos konstrukcinơs grupơs

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Vokietija

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X

S7-300 CP

KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


31

Lietuviška

Nuoroda Konstrukcines grupes/modulius, kuriǐ leidimas eksploatuoti yra II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 galima naudoti tik 3 kategorijos sistemose "SIMATIC".

Priežiǌra Esant gedimams, konstrukcinĊ grupĊ/modulƳ išsiǐskite gamintojui. Tik jis gali kvalifikuotai suremontuoti Ƴtaisą.

Specialiosios sąlygos 1. Konstrukcines grupes/modulius montuokite jungimo spintoje arba metaliniame korpuse. Korpuso ar jungimo spintos saugos klasơ turi bǌti mažiausiai "IP 54" (pagal EN 60529). Bǌtina atsižvelgti Ƴ kitas aplinkos sąlygas. Norint korpusą eksploatuoti zonoje 2, bǌtinas gamintojo pažymơjimas (pagal EN 50021). 2. Jei korpuso kabelio arba kabelio prijungimo temperatǌra pakyla daugiau nei 70 °C arba laidǐ atšakoje temperatǌra padidơja daugiau nei 80 °C, reikia naudoti kabelius, kuriǐ terminơs savybơs atitinka išmatuotas temperatǌros vertes. 3. Kabeliǐ sujungimai turi bǌti saugos klasơs IP ir atitikti 7.2 skyriaus (pagal EN 50021) reikalavimus. 4. Visi prietaisai, Ƴskaitant ir jungiklius, jungiami sistemǐ "SIMATIC" Ƴeigose ir išeigose, turi bǌti tipo "EEx nA" arba "EEx nC" - apsaugoti nuo sprogimo. 5. Bǌtina imtis priemoniǐ, kad pereinamǐjǐ grandžiǐ vardinơ Ƴtampa neviršytǐ 40 %. 6. Leistina aplinkos temperatǌra: 0° C iki 60° C 7. AtidarĊ korpusą, jo viduje gerai matomoje vietoje, Ƴtaisykite lentelĊ su Ƴspơjimu:

!

Ʋspơjimas Korpusą` atidaryti tik trumpam laikui, pvz., patikrai. Neliesti jungikliǐ, konstrukciniǐ grupiǐ neištraukti ir nekišti, neatjungti elektriniǐ sujungimǐ (kištukiniǐ sujungimǐ). Šio Ƴspơjimo galima nepaisyti, kai yra žinoma, jog darbinơ aplinka yra nesprogi.

Leistinǐ konstrukciniǐ grupiǐ/moduliǐ sąrašas Leistinǐ konstrukciniǐ grupiǐ/moduliǐ sąrašą rasite interneto puslapyje: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

ƳvedĊ kodą 13702947.

32


Magya

A fĘegységek/modulok alkalmazása a 2. zóna robbanásveszélyes környezetben 2. zóna A robbanásveszélyes környezeteket zónákba sorolják be. A robbanásveszélyes légkör elĘfordulásának valószínĦsége alapján különböztetik meg a zónákat. Zóna

Robbanásveszély

2

Példa

robbanásveszélyes gázat zárt helységekben elhelyezett tartalmazó légkör csak ritkán és csĘvezetékeknél a lapos tömítéssel rövid ideig lép fel rendelkezĘ karimás kötések környezetében x a 2. zónán kívül

biztonságos nem környezet

x a decentrális periféria készülékek standard alkalmazásai

A következĘkben fontos utasításokat talál a fĘegységek/modulok telepítéséhez a robbanásveszélyes környezetbe.

További információk A további információkat a fĘegységekhez/modulokhoz megtalálja a hozzátartozó kézikönyvben.

Gyártási hely / Engedélyezés II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

az EN 50021 : 1999 szerint

EllenĘrzĘ szám: lásd a táblázatot

Gyártási hely Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany


FĘegységek/modulok

EllenĘrzĘ szám

ET 200S ET 200S hibabiztos fĘegységek

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M DP/PA buszcsatoló Diagnózisrepeater S7-300 hibabiztos fĘegységek

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


33

Magya

Utasítás Az II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 engedélyezéssel rendelkezĘ fĘegységeket/modulokat alkalmazhatja csak a 3. felszerelés-kategóriába tartozó SIMATIC rendszerekbe.

Karbantartás Javítás esetén küldje az érintett fĘegységeket/modulokat a gyártási helyre. Csak itt hajthatják végre a javítást.

Különleges feltételek 1. A fĘegységeket/modulokat egy kapcsolószekrénybe vagy egy fém házba kell beszerelni. Ezeknek kell biztosítaniuk legalább az IP 54 védettségi fokozatot (EN 60529 szerint). Itt figyelembe kell venni azokat a környezeti feltételeket, amelyek fellépnek a készülék telepítésekor. A házhoz meg kell legyen a gyártói nyilatkozat a 2. zónához (az EN 50021 szerint). 2. Ha a jelen ház kábelén ill. kábelvezetésen üzemi feltételek mellett a hĘmérséklet > 70 °C, vagy ha az üzemi feltételek mellett a hĘmérséklet > 80 °C az érelágazásokon, akkor meg kell egyezzenek a kábel hĘmérsékleti tulajdonságai a ténylegesen mért hĘmérsékletekkel. 3. Az alkalmazott kábelvezetések meg kell feleljenek a követelt IP védettségi fokozatnak és a 7.2. bekezdésnek (EN 50021 szerint). 4. Minden készülék, kapcsolót stb. beleértve, amelyeket a SIMATIC rendszerek be- és kimeneteire csatlakoztattak, engedélyezve kell legyen az EEx nA vagy EEx nC típusú robbanásvédelemhez. 5. Intézkedéseket kell hozni, hogy a tranziensek ne lépjék túl a névleges feszültséget több mint 40 %-al. 6. Környezeti hĘmérséklet tartomány: 0° C ... 60° C 7. A házon belül -a nyitáskor jól látható helyen- helyezzen el egy táblát a következĘ figyelmeztetéssel:

!

Figyelmeztetés A házat csak rövid ideig szabad nyitani, pl. optikai diagnózishoz. Eközben ne mĦködtessen egy kapcsolót sem, ne húzzon ki vagy dugjon be egy fĘegységet sem és ne válasszon le villamos vezetékeket (dugós csatlakozók). Ez a figyelmeztetés mellĘzhetĘ, ha tudott, hogy nem áll fenn robbanásveszélyes légkör.

A megengedett fĘegységek/modulok listája A megengedett fĘegységek/modulok listáját megtalálja az interneten: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

a 13702947 cikk azonosító szám alatt.

34


Malti

Tqegƫid tal-Komponenti / Modules fiĪ-ĩona 2, fejn hemm Riskju ta' SpluĪjoni ĩona 2 Sezzjonijiet fejn hemm riskju ta' spluĪjoni jitqassmu f'Īoni. Tagƫmel distinzjoni bejn Īona u oƫra skond il-probabbiltà li jkun hemm ambjent li jista' jwassal gƫal spluĪjoni. ĩona

Periklu ta' SpluĪjoni

EĪempju

2

ambjent gassuĪ li jista' jisplodi jfeƥƥ rarament u gƫal Īmien qasir

ĩoni madwar flanƥ ƥojnts b'gaskits ƛatti f'kanni ƥewwa spazji magƫluqin

Īona ĪĪgura

le

x barra miĪ-Īona 2 x uĪu normali ta' devices periferali deƛentralizzati

Issib hawn taƫt indikazzjonijiet importanti gƫall-installazzjoni ta' komponenti / modules fiĪ-Īona fejn hemm riskju ta' spluĪjoni.

Aktar Tagƫrif Aktar tagƫrif fuq il-komponenti / modules jinstab fil-manwal ikkonƛernat.

Post ta' Manifattura / Approvazzjoni II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

skond EN 50021 : 1999

Numru taƛ-ƚertifikat: ara t-tabella

Post ta' Manifattura Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany


Komponenti / Modules

Numru taƛƚertifikat

ET 200S KEMA 01 ET 200S modules ma jistgƫux ifallu ATEX 1238X S7-300 ET 200M bus coupling DP/PA Ripetitur ta' dijanjosi S7-300 modules ma jistgƫux ifallu

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X

S7-300 CP TS Adapter

KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X

Nota Komponenti / modules bl-approvazzjoni II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 jistgƫu jintuĪaw biss ƥewwa sistemi SIMATIC tal-kategorija 3. Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02

35

Malti

Manutenzjoni Fil-kaĪ li jkun hemm bĪonn ta' tiswija, il-komponenti / modules ikkonƛernati gƫandhom jintbagƫtu fil-post ta' manifattura. It-tiswijiet jistgƫu jsiru biss f'dan il-post.

Kundizzjonijiet Speƛjali 1. Komponenti / modules gƫandhom jiƥu mmontati ƥewwa swiƛƛ kabinett jew kaxxa tal-metall. Dawn iridu jiggarantixxu protezzjoni mill-inqas tat-tip IP 54 (skond EN 60529). Inti u tagƫmel hekk, trid taƫseb gƫall-kundizzjonijiet ambjentali ta' waqt l-installazzjoni tad-device. Irid ikun hemm dikjarazzjoni talmanifatturier gƫall-kaxxa gƫaĪ-Īona 2 (skond EN 50021). 2. Jekk fil-kejbil, jew fil-kaxxa mad-daƫla gƫall-kejbil, tintlaƫaq temperatura ta' aktar minn 70 °C taƫt kundizzjonijiet ta' ƫidma, jew jekk fil-post fejn jinfirdu lwajers jista' jkun li hemm temperatura ta' aktar minn 80 °C, il-kejbil irid ikollu proprjetajiet ta' temperatura xierqa gƫat-temperaturi tabilƫaqq imkejlin. 3. Id-daƫliet gƫall-kejbil li jintuĪaw iridu jikkonformaw mat-tip ta' protezzjoni IP mitlub u t-taqsima 7.2 (skond EN 50021). 4. Id-devices kollha, swiƛƛijiet etc. inkluĪi, li jitqabbdu ma' l-inputs u l-outputs ta' sistemi SIMATIC, iridu jkunu approvati gƫal protezzjoni kontra spluĪjoni tat-tip EEx nA jew EEx nC. 5. Iridu jittieƫdu miĪuri biex il-vultaƥƥ nominali ma jitqabbiĪx b'aktar minn 40% minƫabba transitorji. 6. Varjazzjoni tat-temperatura ambjentali: 0° C sa 60° C 7. Gƫandha titqiegƫed tabella bit-twissija li ƥejja ƥewwa l-kaxxa, f'post li jidher sew wara li tinfetaƫ il-kaxxa:

!

Twissija Il-kaxxa tista' tinfetaƫ biss gƫal Īmien qasir, per eĪempju gƫal dijanjosi viĪwali. Inti u tagƫmel hekk, ma tista' tmiss l-ebda swiƛƛ, ddaƫƫal jew tneƫƫi l-ebda module u tneƫƫi l-ebda kejbil elettriku (konnessjonijiet li tipplaggjahom). Tista' ma tagƫtix kaĪ ta' din it-twissija meta taf li m'hemmx riskju ta' spluĪjoni flambjent.

Lista ta' Komponenti / Modules Approvati Issib il-lista ta' komponenti / modules approvati fl-internet: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

bin-numru ta' identifikazzjoni 13702947.

36


Polski

Zastosowanie grup konstrukcyjnych / moduáów w 2 strefie zagroĪenia wybuchem Strefa 2 Otoczenie zagroĪone wybuchem dzielone jest na strefy. Strefy dzielą siĊ ze wzglĊdu na stopieĔ prawdopodobieĔstwa powstania atmosfery stwarzającej moĪliwoĞü powstania wybuchu. Strefa

NiebezpieczeĔstwo eksplozji

Przykáad

2

atmosfera gazowa z zagroĪeniem wybuchem wystĊpuje rzadko i na krótki okres czasu

miejsca wokóá áącz w kanaáach technicznych z opaskami przy przewodach instalacyjnych w pomieszczeniach zamkniĊtych

obszar bezpieczny

nie

x poza 2 strefą x standardowe zastosowanie decentralnych urządzeĔ peryferyjnych

Dalej znajdą PaĔstwo informacje dotyczące instalacji grup konstrukcyjnych / moduáów w otoczeniu zagroĪonym wybuchem.

Pozostaáe informacje Dalsze informacje dotyczące grup konstrukcyjnych / moduáów znajdą paĔstwo w odpowiedniej instrukcji.

Miejsce produkcji / Rejestracja II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

stosownie do EN 50021 : 1999

Nr testu: zobacz tabela

Miejsce produkcji Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Niemcy

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Niemcy

Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduáy

Nr testu

ET 200S ET 200S grupy konstrukcyjne odporne na uszkodzenia

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M Zbierające áącze sprzĊĪające DP/PA powtarzacz diagnozy S7-300 grupy konstrukcyjne odporne na uszkodzenia

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


37

Polski

Uwaga Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduáy zarejestrowane jako II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 wolno stosowaü jedynie w systemach SIMATIC o 3 kategorii urządzenia.

Konserwacja W celu naprawy naleĪy odpowiednie grupy konstrukcyjne / moduáy przesáaü do miejsca produkcji. Jedynie serwis producenta jest upowaĪniony do dokonywania napraw.

Warunki szczególne 1. Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduáy muszą zostaü zamontowane do skrzynki ochronnej lub metalowej puszki ochronnej. Muszą one speániaü wymagania co najmniej stopnia IP 54 (stosownie do EN 60529). NaleĪy braü pod uwagĊ warunki otoczenia, w którym urządzenie bĊdzie instalowane. NaleĪy posiadaü oĞwiadczenie producenta dopuszczające puszkĊ do uĪytku w strefie 2 (stosownie do EN 50021). 2. W przypadku, gdyby na przewodzie tej puszki podczas pracy temperatura mogáa przekroczyü > 70 °C, lub Īyáa przewodu mogáaby osiągnąü temperaturĊ > 80 °C, wáaĞciwoĞci cieplne przewodu muszą zostaü dobrane do takich wartoĞci. 3. Wszystkie stosowane przewody muszą odpowiadaü wáaĞciwemu stopniowi ochrony IP oraz warunkom okreĞlonym w punkcie 7.2 (stosownie do EN 50021). 4. Wszystkie urządzenia wáączając w to przeáączniki itp., które podáączane są do wejĞü lub wyjĞü systemów SIMATIC muszą byü dopuszczone do ochrony przeciw wybuchom typu EEx nA lub EEx nC. 5. Muszą zostaü speánione takie warunki, aby napiĊcie miana w przejĞciach nie mogáo przekroczyü wiĊcej niĪ 40 %. 6. Temperatura otoczenia: od 0° C do 60° C 7. W puszce w dobrze widocznym po otwarciu miejscu naleĪy umieĞciü ostrzeĪenie nastĊpującej treĞci:

!

Uwaga PuszkĊ wolno otworzyü jedynie na krótki okres czasu na przykáad w celu kontroli optycznej. Nie wolno przy tym naciskaü na Īaden z przeáączników, nie wolno wyciągaü ani montowaü Īadnej grupy konstrukcyjnej ani teĪ odáączaü Īadnych przewodów elektrycznych (áącza wsuwkowe). PowyĪszego ostrzeĪenia nie trzeba przestrzegaü jeĞli wiadomo jest, iĪ na miejscu nie ma zagroĪenia wybuchem.

Lista dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / moduáów Wykaz dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / moduáów znajduje siĊ na stronie internetowej: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

w czĊĞci ID 13702947. 38


Slovensky

Použitie konštrukþných skupín / modulov v prostredí s nebezpeþenstvom výbuchu zóny 2 Zóna 2 Prostredia s nebezpeþenstvom výbuchu sa rozdeĐujú do zón. Zóny sa rozlišujú podĐa pravdepodobnosti prítomnosti atmosféry so schopnosĢou výbuchu. Zóna

Nebezpeþenstvo explózie

Príklad

2

plynová atmosféra s nebezpeþenstvom výbuchu sa vyskytuje len zriedka a krátkodobo

priestory okolo prírubových spojov s plochými tesneniami pri potrubných vedeniach v uzavretých priestoroch

bezpeþná oblasĢ

nie

x mino zóny 2 x štandardné použitia decentrálnej periférie

Ćalej nájdete dôležité pokyny pre inštaláciu konštrukþných skupín / modulov v prostredí s nebezpeþenstvom výbuchu.

Ćalšie informácie Ćalšie informácie ku konštrukþným skupinám / modulom nájdete v príslušnej príruþke.

Miesto vyhotovenia / Osvedþenie II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

podĐa EN 50021 : 1999

ýíslo skúšky : pozri tabuĐka Miesto vyhotovenia Siemens AG, divízia A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Nemecko

Siemens AG, divízia A&D Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50 76187 Karlsruhe Nemecko

Konštrukþné skupiny / moduly

ýíslo skúšky

ET 200S ET 200S konštrukþné skupiny odolné voþi poruchám

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M Zbernicový väzbový þlen DP/PA opakovaþ diagnózy S7-300 konštrukþné skupiny odolné voþi poruchám

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


39

Slovensky

Upozornenie Konštrukþné skupiny / moduly s osvedþením II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 sa smú používaĢ len v systémoch SIMATIC kategórie zariadenia 3.

Údržba Za úþelom opravy sa musia príslušné konštrukþné skupiny / moduly zaslaĢ na miesto vyhotovenia. Oprava sa smie vykonávaĢ len na tomto mieste !

Špeciálne podmienky 1. Konštrukþné skupiny / moduly sa musia vmontovaĢ do spínacej skrine alebo do kovového puzdra schránky. Tie musia zabezpeþovaĢ druh ochrany minimálne IP 54 (podĐa EN 60529). Pritom je potrebné zohĐadniĢ podmienky prostredia, do ktorého sa bude zariadenie inštalovaĢ. V prípade puzdra musí existovaĢ vyhlásenie výrobcu pre zónu 2 (podĐa EN 50021). 2. V prípade, že na kábli, prípadne na káblovom prívode tohto puzdra presiahne teplota pri prevádzkových podmienkach hodnotu > 70 °C, alebo ak na vetve žily môže byĢ pri prevádzkových podmienkach teplota > 80 °C, musia tepelné vlastnosti kábla vyhovovaĢ skutoþne nameraným hodnotám. 3. Všetky použité káblové prívody musia zodpovedaĢ požadovanému druhu ochrany IP a odseku 7.2 (podĐa EN 50021). 4. Všetky zariadenia, vrátane prepínaþa, atć., ktoré sa pripoja na vstupy a výstupy systémov SIMATIC, musia byĢ schválené pre ochranu voþi výbuchu typu EEx nA alebo EEx nC. 5. Musia sa splniĢ také opatrenia, aby sa menovité napätie cez prechody nemohlo prekroþiĢ o viac ako 40 %. 6. Rozsah okolitých teplôt: 0° C až 60° C 7. V puzdre je na dobre viditeĐné miesto po otvorení potrebné umiestniĢ štítok s nasledovnou výstrahou:

!

Výstraha Puzdro sa môže otvoriĢ len poþas krátkej doby, napríklad pre vizuálnu diagnózu. Nestlaþte pritom žiadny prepínaþ, nevytiahnite alebo nezasuĖte žiadnu konštrukþnú skupinu a neoddeĐte žiadne elektrické vedenia (zástrþkové spojenia). Túto výstrahu si nemusíte všímaĢ v takom prípade, ak je známe, že sa na mieste nevyskytuje atmosféra s nebezpeþenstvom výbuchu.

Zoznam dovolených konštrukþných skupín / modulov Zoznam dovolených konštrukþných skupín / modulov sa nachádza na internete : http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

v þlánku ID 13702947.

40


Slovensko

Uporaba sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem obmoþju cone 2 Cona 2 Eksplozivno ogrožena obmoþja se delijo na cone. Cone se loþijo po verjetnosti prisotnosti eksplozivne atmosfere. Cona

Nevarnost eksplozije

Primer

2

eksplozivna zmes plinov v atmosferi je redka in traja le kratko.

Obmoþja okoli prirobnih spojev z ploskimi tesnili pri cevnih napeljavah v zaprtih prostorih.

sigurno obmoþje

ne

x izven cone 2 x Standardna uporaba decentralne periferije.

Sledijo pomembni napotki o inštalaciji sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem obmoþju.

Nadaljnje informacije Nadaljnje informacije o sklopih/modulih najdete v priloženem priroþniku.

Mesto izdelave / Dovoljenje - Atest II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

po EN 50021 : 1999

kontrolna številka: glej tabelo

Mesto izdelave Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany


Sklopi/moduli

kontrolna številka:

ET 200S ET 200S Sklopi varovani proti okvari

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M bus vezava DP/PA Diagnozni repeater S7-300 Sklopi varovani proti okvari

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X

Opozorilo Sklopi/moduli z dovoljenjem II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 se lahko uporabijo samo v SIMATIC-Sistemih kategorije 3 . Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02

41

Slovensko

Vzdrževanje V primeru popravila pošljete sklope/module na kraj izdelave. Popravila lahko izvajajo samo na tem naslovu!

Posebni pogoji 1. Sklopi/moduli se morajo vgraditi v elektro omaro ali metalno ohišje. Omara/ohišje mora zadostiti varovanju IP 54 (po EN 60529). Pri tem je potrebno upoštevati tudi pogoje okolice, v kateri se naprava nahaja. Ohišje mora imeti izjavo (atest) proizvajalca za uporabo v coni 2 (po EN 50021). 2. ýe na kablu oz. uvodnici tega ohišja v režimu obratovanja temperatura doseže vrednost > 70 °C ali þe doseže na razcepih vodnikov v obratovanju temperatura vrednost > 80 °C, se morajo temperaturne lastnosti kablov skladati z dejansko namerjenimi. 3. Uporabljene uvodnice morajo ustrezati predpisani IP zašþiti in poglavju 7.2 (po EN 50021). 4. Vse naprave, vkljuþno s stikali itd., ki so priklopljene na vhodih oz. izhodih sistemov SIMATIC, morajo biti odobrene za zašþito proti eksplozijam tipa EEx nA ali EEx nC. 5. Zagotoviti se mora, da nazivna napetost ne prekoraþi veþ kot 40% pri tranzienci (preklopih, vklopih,...). 6. Temperaturno obmoþje okolice: 0° C do 60° C 7. V notranjosti ohišja, na odprtem dobro vidljivem mestu, se pritrdi napis z naslednjim opozorilom:

!

Opozorilo Ohišje se lahko odpre samo za kratek þas, npr. za vizualno diagnozo. Pri tem ne vklapljajte/izklaplajte stikal, sklopov ali elektriþnih vodnikov (vtiþnih spojev). Opozorilo ne velja, kadar je znano, da ni eksplozivne atmosfere.

Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov najdete na internetu na spletni strani: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

pod ID prispevka 13702947.

42


Türkçe

Patlama tehlikesi olan Alan 2 bölgesinde ünite gruplarının/modüllerin kullanılması Alan 2 Patlama tehlikesi olan bölgeler alanlara ayrılır. Alanlar, patlayabilecek atmosfere sahip ortam ihtimaline göre farklı derecelere ayrılır. Alan

Patlama tehlikesi

Örnek

2

Patlayıcı gaz atmosferi sadece nadir ve kısa bir süre için söz konusu

Kapalı alanlardaki boru ba÷lantılarında yassı contalı flanú ba÷lantıları civarındaki bölgeler

Güvenli bölge

hayır

x Alan 2 haricinde x Merkezi olmayan periferi standart uygulamaları

Aúa÷ıda, ünite gruplarının/modüllerin patlama tehlikesi olan bölgelerde kurulması için önemli bilgiler bulacaksınız.

Daha baúka bilgiler Ünite grupları/modüller hakkında daha fazla bilgi için ilgili kılavuza bakınız.

ømalat yeri / Lisans II 3 G

EEx nA II T3 .. T6

EN 50021 standartına göre: 1999

Test numarası: bkz. Tablo

ømalat yeri Siemens AG, Bereich A&D Werner-von-Siemens-Straße 50 92224 Amberg Germany


Ünite grupları/Modüller

Kontrol numarası

ET 200S ET 200S Hataya karúı emniyetli ünite grupları

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

S7-300 ET 200M Bus kuplajı DP/PA Diyagnoz repeater ünitesi S7-300 Hataya karúı emniyetli ünite grupları

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400

KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X


KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

SIMATIC NET

KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X


43

Türkçe

Bilgi II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 lisanslı ünite grupları/modüller sadece 3 numaralı cihaz kategorisine ait SIMATIC sistemlerine kullanılabilir.

Bakım ve koruma Bir onarım gerekli olması halinde, ilgili ünite grupları/modüller imalat yerine gönderilmelidir. Onarım sadece orada yapılabilir ve yapılmalıdır.

Özel koúullar 1. Ünite grupları/modüller bir úalter dolabı içine veya metal kasa içine monte edilmelidir. Bu kasalar en az IP 54 (EN 60529 standartına göre) koruma türüne ait olmalıdır. Burada, cihazın kuruldu÷u çevre koúulları dikkate alınmalıdır. Kullanılacak kasa için, alan 2 için geçerli bir üretici beyanı mevcut olmalıdır (EN 50021 standartına istinaden). 2. Kabloda ya da bu kasanın kablo giriúindeki iúletme koúullarında sıcaklık > 70 °C oluyorsa veya iúletme koúullarında kablo telleri (damarları) ayrılma noktasında sıcaklık > 80 °C olma ihtimali varsa, kablonun sıcaklık ile ilgili özellikleri, gerçekten ölçülmüú sıcaklıklara uygun olmalıdır. 3. Kullanılmıú olan kablo giriúleri, talep edilen IP koruma türüne ve bölüm 7.2 (EN 50021 standartına göre) dahilindeki taleplere uygun olmalıdır. 4. SIMATIC sistemlerinin giriú ve çıkıúlarına ba÷lanan tüm cihazlar (úalterler vs. dahil) için, EEx nA veya EEx nC patlamaya karúı koruma tipine istinaden izin alınmıú olmalıdır. 5. Nominal gerilimin transiyentlerden (hatlardaki dalgalanmalardan dolayı ani gerilim ve akım de÷iúiklikleri) dolayı azami %40 aúılması için gerekli önlemler alınmalıdır. 6. Çevre sıcaklı÷ı aralı÷ı: 0° C ile 60° C arasında 7. Kasa dahilinde, açıldıktan sonra iyi görülebilen bir yere aúa÷ıdaki uyarı takılmalıdır:

!

økaz Kasa sadece kısa bir süre açılmalıdır, örn. görsel diyagnoz için. Herhangi bir úaltere basmayınız, herhangi bir ünite grubunu çekip çıkarmayınız veya takmayınız, elektrik hatlarını (soket ba÷lantıları) ayırmayınız. E÷er patlama tehlikesi söz konusu olan bir atmosfer olmadı÷ı biliniyorsa, iúbu ikaz göz ardı edilebilir.

øzin verilmiú olan ünite gruplarının/modüllerin listesi øzin verilmiú olan ünite gruplarının/modüllerin listesi için internete bakınız: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

Doküman ID 13702947.

44


SIMATIC Product information to the ET 200S manual

1 Introduction ______________ 2 Product information ______________

SIMATIC Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information

Edition 07/2005 A5E00583609-01

Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Notice indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed Usage Note the following: Warning This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Automation and Drives Postfach 48 48 90437 NÜRNBERG GERMANY

Order No.: A5E00583609-01 07/2005

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005. Technical data subject to change

Table of contents 1

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1

2

Contents..................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Product information................................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1

Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO .......................................................................... 2-1

2.2

Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) ......................................................... 2-10

2.3

Digital Electronic Modules........................................................................................................ 2-11

2.4

Power modules ........................................................................................................................ 2-11

Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1 Tables Table 2-1

Status and error displays of the IM151-3 PN............................................................................. 2-2

Table 2-2

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module ...................................................... 2-11

Table 2-3

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module................................................. 2-13

Product information to the ET 200S manual Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01

iii

Table of contents

iv


Introduction 1.1

1.1

1

Contents

Introduction This product information describes corrections and additions to the manual Distributed Peripheral Device ET 200S (EWA-4NEB 780602401-13), release 07/2005.


1-1

Introduction 1.1 Contents

1-2


2

Product information 2.1

2.1

Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO

6.3.1.3 Integrating modules for the configuration Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DO modules %\WH[ 0RGXOH0RGXOH0RGXOH ZLWKRXWಯ ರZLWKಯ ರZLWKಯ ರ

:KHQSXOOHGRQO\WKHSXOOHG'2LVRPLWWHG DUHPRYHPRGXOHLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHG :KHQSXOOHGWKHQDOO'2PRGXOHVWKDWDUH FRPSULVHGLQWKLVE\WHRXWSXWUHSODFHPHQWYDOXHV

Figure 2-1

Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DO modules

Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DI modules %\WH[ 0RGXOH0RGXOH0RGXOH ZLWKRXWಯ ರZLWKಯ ರZLWKಯ ರ

:KHQSXOOHGRQO\WKHSXOOHG',LVRPLWWHG DUHPRYHPRGXOHLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHG :KHQSXOOHGWKHUHIHUHQFHGDWDPDUNHUIRUWKHLQSXWE\WHLVVHWWRಯ%$'ರ 7KH,2FRQWUROOHUWKHQVHWVWKHLQSXWE\WHWR

Figure 2-2

Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DI modules


2-1

Product information 2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO

6.3.3 LED display diagnostics Status and error displays through LEDs on IM151-3 PN Table 2-1

Status and error displays of the IM151-3 PN Meaning

LEDs SF

BF

ON

*

Flashing 2 Hz

on

Incorrect or no connect telegram – no data exchange between the IO controller and the interface module (IO device) takes place but the IO device is physically linked to the switch. Causes: • Device name is incorrect • Configuration error • Parameter assignment error • The IO controller is switched off, defective or the bus cable to the IO controller is missing.

Remedy • • • • •

Check the interface module. Check the configuration and parameter assignment. Check the device name. Assign a valid device name to the interface module. Check the IO controller

on

on

on

•

A factory new SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is being formatted.

•

Wait until the formatting procedure is completed. This can take a number of minutes to complete. When the SF LED goes out, the formatting procedure is complete.

on

off

on

•

There is no S7 program located on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card No SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is inserted. The inserted SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is full or does not have enough storage space for the device name. No suitable SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is inserted (i.e. no SIMATIC Micro Memory Card from Siemens).

• •

Format the die SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. Before switching on the power supply voltage, insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.

• •

•

The IO device cannot be reached in this state.

2-2



6.3.5 Evaluate interrupts from ET 200S Diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" For the components • 2DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0), • 4DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) and • 4DI UC24..48V HF (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) the diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" is not available at present.

Note Process interrupts should not be used for technological purposes (e.g. cyclical creation of process interrupts). If more than 90 process interrupts are generated per second, process interrupts can be lost.


2-3


6.3.7.2 Channel diagnostics Definition The channel diagnostics provide information on channel faults of modules. Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics in IO diagnostic data records. A data record contains 10 Bytes in each case. Diagnostics can be read for a submodule slot, for a slot, for the IO controller assigned slot in an IO device or for an IO device. The determination is reached via the data record number: 800AH

Channel diagnostics for a submodule slot

800BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming)

800CH

Manufacturer-specific diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming and going)

C00AH

Channel diagnostics for a slot

C00BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming)

C00CH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming and going)

E002H

Deviation of the set configuration by the actual configuration of an IO controller assigned IO device

E00AH

Channel diagnostics for the IO controller-assigned channel in an IO device

E00BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO controller assigned channel in an IO device (coming)

E00CH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for the IO controller assigned channels in an IO device (coming and going)

F00AH

Channel diagnostics for an IO device

F00BH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming)

F00CH

Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming and going)

AFF0H to AFFFH

Manufacturer, order number, creation state, version, etc.

The data record is read with the SFB 52 RDREC (read data record).

Structure of diagnostic data records You can find the diagnostic data records structure and examples for programming in the programming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO. The data record that the ET 200S supports, based on the PROFINET IO - Application Layer Service Definition V2.0 standard. You can download the standard at http://www.profibus.com at no cost.

2-4



Channel diagnostics The channel diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-3 PN interface module:

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+


%\WHDQG 9HUVLRQ



%\WHDQG

%LWQR


%\WH

%LWQR


%\WH

%LWQR

%LWQR

%\WHDQG (UURUW\SH +WR)))+0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV +'LDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHIRUVXEPRGXOHLVSHQGLQJ +0XOWLSOH +([W&KDQQHO'LDJQRVLV'DWD +ELV)))+5HVHUYHG +ELV))+5HVHUYHGIRUSURILOH $+WR))))+5HVHUYHG

Figure 2-3

Structure of the channel diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN


2-5


%LWQR

%LWQR


%\WH

%LWQR


%LWQR

%\WH &KDQQHOW\SH +IUHHGDWDW\SH +:RUG +%LW +'RXEOHZRUG +%LW +GRXEOHZRUGV +%LW +WR))+5HVHUYHG +%\WH

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

Figure 2-4

Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN


Error types of the other modules The error types of the power modules, digital electronic modules, analog electronic modules, and the technology modules are the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.

2-6



6.3.7.4 Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus Diagnostics for the bus interruption If the ET 200S does not startup, it can have the following causes: • one or multiple missing modules • Terminating module missing • Number of modules exceeds the maximum configuration • Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective terminal module) If the ET 200S does not startup, it can have the following causes: • At least two missing modules (that is in contrast to a missing module no more gap rather a separated backplane bus) • Terminating module missing • Faulty backplane bus (for example, terminal module is defective) An interrupt is not generated in the event of an interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus. The information must be read out explicitly by the user. The data record with index F00BH is available for this purpose. You can read out this data record with STEP 7 in SIMATIC Manager via reachable nodes in the component status window. The PG must be located in the PROFINET subnet.


2-7


Composition of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt Contents of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt:

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

%LWQR

%LWQR

'DWDUHFRUGFRQWHQWV+

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

'DWDUHFRUGOHQJWK+

%\WHDQG 9HUVLRQ

%\WHDQG

6ORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW+

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

6XEPRGXOHVORWQXPEHURIWKHFRPSRQHQWWULJJHULQJWKHLQWHUUXSW+

%\WHDQG

%LWQR

&KDQQHOQXPEHU+

%\WHDQG

%LWQR


%\WHDQG

%LWQR

(UURUW\SH+ 0DQXIDFWXUHUVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV

%\WH

%\WH

%\WH

%LWQR 5HVHUYHG %LWQR 5HVHUYHG %LWQR 5HVHUYHG %LWQR

%\WH 6ORWQXPEHUDIWHUZKLFKWKHEDFNSODQHEXVLVLQWHUUXSWHG

Figure 2-5

2-8

Structure of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on the PROFINET IO



6.3.7.5 Failure of the load voltage The electronic modules behave as follows for a failure of the load voltage (generally analog and technology modules): • If such a module is removed during the failure of the load voltage, a remove interrupt is generated. • If such a module is inserted during the failure of the load voltage, an insert interrupt is generated.

Note If an electronic module was unparametrized with an IO controller via the application program, then these unparametrized data are not available after restoration of the load voltage.


2-9

Product information 2.2 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

2.2

2.2

Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

8.7.1 Features of the interface module IM151-3 PN Compatibility of the interface module IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) Note Firmware version of the controller used In order for you to be able to operate the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA100AB0) on a controller, this must be operated with one of the firmware versions listed in the tables below. You can utilize the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0) independently of the controller firmware version.

The following firmware versions are compatible to the interface module IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0): CPU Controller

Firmware version

CP

SOFTNET PNIO

315-2 PN/DP 317-2 PN/DP

317F-2 PN/DP

443-1

343-1

SIMATIC NET-CD

≥ V2.3.2

≥ V2.3.3

≥ V2.2

≥2.0

V 6.3 Hotfix 1

8.7.2 SNMP The IM151-3 PN supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported R/W objects are changeable using SNMP tools and are stored in the device. Remanent stored SNMP parameters are reset to default settings (STEP 7 V5.3 SP 3 and higher) in HW config dialog "Target system > Ethernet > Edit Ethernet nodes" "Reset" button under "Reset to default settings". Provided that the component has a station name (saved on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card), this is not deleted. The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is not a part of a factory-new component. Likewise, the IP address, that is only present when the component is in a switched on state, is not deleted. After an exchange with a factory-new component the R/W objects in the IM151-3 PN are set to default settings.

2-10


Product information 2.3 Digital Electronic Modules

2.3

2.3

Digital Electronic Modules

11.13 Digital Electronic module 4DO DC24V/0,5A ST (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) Features • Digital electronic module with four outputs • Output current 0.5 A per output • Rated load voltage 24 VDC • Suitable for solenoids, direct current switches and warning lights • Supports isochronous operation

2.4

2.4

Power modules

10.2 Power module PM-E DC24V (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0) Terminal assignment The following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module for the different terminal modules: Table 2-2

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module View

Terminal assignment


7036$DQG30(9'&

M: Chassis ground AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.

$8; $ $

9'&

9'&

0

0

$8;

$

$

$8;

9'&


2-11

Product information 2.4 Power modules View

Terminal assignment


7036$DQG30(9'&

M: Chassis ground AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage. AUX1 is used as PE.

$8; $

9'&

$

9'&

0

$

$

$8;

9'& 0 $8;

7036DQG30(9'&

24 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground

$8;

9'&

9'&

0

0

9'&

2-12


Product information 2.4 Power modules

10.3 Power module PM-E DC24..48V (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0) Terminal assignment The following table shows you the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module for the different terminal modules: Table 2-3

Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module View

Terminal assignment 7036$DQG30(9'&

Remarks 24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground AUX1: Ground terminal or usable as any voltage bus up to the level of the load voltage.

$8; $

9'&

$

9'&

0

$

$

$8;

9'& 0 $8;

24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage 7036$DQG30(9'&

M: Chassis ground $8; $ $

9'&

9'&

0

0

$8;

$

$

$8;

9'&

7036DQG30(9'&


24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage M: Chassis ground

$8;

9'&

9'&

0

0

9'&


2-13

Product information 2.4 Power modules

2-14


Index B

I

Backplane bus Interruption, 2-7

IM151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE SNMP, 2-10

C

L

Channel diagnostics, 2-4

Load voltage Failure, 2-9

D Diagnostics Bus interruption, 2-7

P Power module PM-E 24..48 VDC Terminal assignment, 2-13

F Failure of the load voltage, 2-9


Index-1

Index

Index-2
